Datex AS/3

Anaesthesia Monitor

Service Manual

Part I - General Service Guide

P

“Part Il = Product's Service Guide

1. “Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit, F-CUS, B-CPU2, B-CPU3 and

SsSTD96/ARIK96
“ Displays and'Command Board, D-VNCIS5, D-LCCIO, B-DISP,
в

' B-DVGA and K-VNCI5

Haemodynamic Modules M-ESTPR, M-ETPR and M-ESTR
‘Cardiac Output Modules, M-COP and M-COPSv
== DONNA

. Pressure and Pressure-Temperature Modules, M-P and M-PT

: Non-Invasive Blood Pressure Module, M-NIBP
-Recorder Module, M-REC
"Extension Frame, F-EXT4
“Memory Mödule, M-MEM and Memory Board, B-CMMEM
“Nellcor Compatible Saturation Module, M-NSAT
o

‘Network Board, B-NET

мы =

«Interface Board, B-INT ..

o upwuNs

“Airway Module, G- O/OV/AO/AiO/AOV/AiOV, and B-GAS

ши

‘Anaesthesia Keyboard, K-ARK, B-ARK

мм

Neuro Muscular Transmission Module, M-NMT

пи

UPINET Board, B-UPINET |

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document no. 889535

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

に
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

Part I

AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor

General Service Guide

I INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Notes to the Reader nenene rieeieiieenionee 2
1.2 Symbols...
Symbols on Equipment...
Symbols on Transport Packaging
1.3 Related Documents ........cccscscsscsssssssscssssccssescescsesssnsenesenceseasesessesssesersssecsssscanssesenseseseasseeass 4
2 SAFETY 5
21 Warnings... sense
2.2 Cautions ss
2.3 Equipment Classification.
3 ARCHITECTURE
3.1 Bus Structure... eee ieri ieri iii iii iii einen
3.2 Distributed processing... Ree ete eennné
3.3 Module Communication ..
3.4 Software loading
3.5 GenericModule........................ee eee eeemenenensnen
4 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE 17
5 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING | 18
Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

I INTRODUCTION
Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor is a cardiac and respiratory
monitoring device used during anaesthesia in operating rooms.

The monitor consists of the Central Unit and different modules.

Additionally the monitor can be equipped with a secondary
display and Anaesthesia Record Keeper.

There are single and double width modules containing one or

more parameters. The modules that are placed in the Central
Unit can be removed and inserted during operation. The
Airway Module, additional display and the Anaesthesia
keyboard can only be connected when the monitor is turned off.

Part 1-1
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

1.1 Notes to the Reader

This service manual is intended for service personnel and
engineers who will perform service and maintenance
procedures on Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor.

This service manual is divided into two parts: Part I gives to the
reader overview of the AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor and its
configuration. Part II gives detailed descriptions of each module
and component of AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor.

The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes in product

specifications without prior notice. The information in this
manual is believed to be accurate and reliable; however, the
manufacturer assumes no responsibility for its use.

Datex assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its

software on equipment that is not furnished by Datex.

This document is protected by copyright. All rights are

reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied,
reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior
written consent of Datex.

AS/3, ComWheel, Datex, D-lite, D-fend, EarSat, FingerSat,

MemCard and Side Stream Spirometry, are trade marks of
Instrumentarium Corp., Helsinki, Finland.

Copyright by Datex, 1994

Part I-2
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

1.2 Symbols

Я
Symbols on Equipment
This battery contains lead acid and in case of disposal, must be
separated from other waste according to local regulations.
РЬ

GÖ
Pb
This battery contains Pb and it can be recycled.

Dangerous voltage.

Symbols on Transport Packaging

The contents of the transport package are fragile and it has to be

— he

handled with care.

This symbol indicates the correct upright position of the

transport package.

The transport package shall be kept in a dry environment.

This symbol is to indicate the temperature limitations within

which the transport package shall be kept and handled.

Part 1-3
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

1.3 Related Documents

The following documents are available on and for Datex AS/3
Anaesthesia Monitor in addition to this service manual.

Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Operator's Manual (p/n

889381)

This manual provides detailed instructions and references

for the operating and configuration of the system.
Everyday service and maintenance procedures as well as
simple troubleshooting hints are also included.

Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Installation Manual (p/n

889470)

The installation manual gives clear and comprehensive

picture on planning, unpacking, and installing the system.

Datex AS/3 Schematic Diagrams (p/n 886091)

The Schematic Diagrams is the collection of schematic

diagrams and part layouts of the Anaesthesia Monitor and
other AS/3 Family products (excluded AS/3 Anaesthesia
Delivery Unit).

Datex AS/3 Supplies and Accessories (p/n 882300)

Supplies and Accessories is an accessory catalogue in which (=

all the necessary accessories and supplies to the system are
listed.

Clinical Applications

The following Datex publications are useful in obtaining

information on clinical application.

- Interpreting the Plethysmographic Pulse

Wave, Appliguide

- Cardiac Output, Ouick Guide

- PCWP, Quick Guide

- ST Segment Analysis, Quick Guide

Part I-4
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

2 SAFETY

2.1 Warnings
A WARNING indicates a situation in which the user or the
patient may be in danger of injury or death

POWER CONNECTION:

e Before connecting the power cord to the mains outlet, check

that the local voltage and frequency rating corresponds
with the rating stated on the device plate on the rear panel
of Anaesthesia Monitor Frame.

+ Connect the monitor to a three-wire, grounded, hospital

grade receptacle. Do not remove the grounding prong from
the power plug.

» Use intact power cord. Replace the cord if it is cracked,

frayed, broken or otherwise damaged.

+ Do not apply tension to the power cord. The cord may get
broken.

+ Do not use extension cords or adapters of any type.

EXTERNAL CONNECTION:

+ Donot connect any other external devices to the monitor

than those specified by Datex.

FUSE REPLACEMENT:

+ Replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and with the
same rating.

EXPLOSION HAZARD:

。 Do not use the monitor in the presence of flammable

anaesthetics.

Part I-5
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

PATIENT SAFETY:

+ Do not perform any testing or maintenance on the monitor

while it is being used on a patient.

+ . Use only cables and accessories approved by Datex. Do not

modify them. Other cables and accessories may damage the
monitor or interfere with measurement.

CLEANING AND SERVICE:

+ Only trained personnel with proper tools and test

equipment shall perform the tests and repairs described in
this manual. Unauthorized service may void the monitor
warranty.

e Switch the power off and unplug the power cord before
cleaning or service. Get rid of moisture completely before
reconnecting it to the mains outlet.

e Donot touch any exposed wire or conductive surface while

covers are off and the monitor is energized. The voltages
present can cause injury or death.

» Perform electrical safety check and current leakage test to

the monitor always after service.

Part 1-6
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

2.2 Cautions
A CAUTION indicates a condition that may lead to equipment
damage or malfunction.

INSTALLATION:

。 Leave space behind the monitor to allow proper

ventilation.

BEFORE USE:

e Allow two minutes for warm-up and note any error

messages or deviations from normal operation.

‧ Clean rear panel fan dust filter once a month or whenever

necessary.

AUTOCLAVING, STERILIZING:

« © Donotautodlave any part of the monitor.

+ Donot gas sterilize the modules.

CLEANING AND SERVICE:

e Donot use ammonia-, phenol-, or acetone-based cleaners.

These cleaners may damage the monitor surface.

‧ Donot immerse the monitor in any liquid. Do not allow

liquid to enter the monitor or into modules.

‧ Electrostatic discharge through the PC boards may damage

the components. Before replacing PC boards, wear a static
control wrist strap. Handle all PC boards by their non-
conductive edges and use anti-static containers when
transporting them.

‧ Do not break or bypass the patient isolation barrier when

testing PC boards.

Part I-7
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

SPECIAL COMPONENTS:

e There are special components used in this monitor which

are vital to assure reliability and safety. Datex assumes no
responsibility for damage if replacement components not
approved by Datex are used.

e There is a lithium battery on the CPU board. Discard

М broken IC containing the battery according to local
regulations.

BATTERIES

The battery package of the power supply unit in this device

contains lead acid (Pb) which is hazardous to environment and
thus the battery needs to be disposed of carefully according to
local regulations.

To replace the batteries safely, please refer to the instructions

further on in this manual.

+ Donot short-circuit the battery terminals, short-circuiting

the battery may produce a very high current, which
damages the battery.

e Do not dispose of the battery into open flame, nor put the
battery near fire, as it may explode.

+ Do not disassemble the battery. It contains electrolyte,

which may damage clothing or cause injury to skin or eyes.
If exposed to electrolyte, wash the injured area with plenty
of water and contact a doctor.

See also the chapter “Symbols on Equipment”.

Part I-8
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

STORAGE AND TRANSPORT:

‧ Donot store or transport the monitor outside the specified

temperature and pressure range:

Temperature -10 to +50°C /14 to 122°F.

Ambient pressure 500 to 800 mmHg/660 to 1060 mbar
Humidity 0 to 90 % non-condensing

except LCD Display:

temperature +5...+35°C/41 to 95°F
humidity 0 to 85 % non-condensing

DISCARD:

» Discard the device and paris thereof according to local

regulations. Do not discard to the nature.

The manufacturer accepts no responsibility for any

modifications made to the monitor outside the factory.

Part I-9
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

2.3 Equipment Classification

Classification according to TEC 601-1:

CLASS 1 equipment according to the type of protection

against electrical shock.

TYPE BF or CF equipment according to the degree of

protection against electrical shock is specified in the
specifications of each parameter module.

Degree of protection against the harmful ingress of water

as detailed in the IEC 529: IPX0.

Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of

FLAMMABLE ANAESTHETIC MIXTURE with air or with
OXYGEN /NITROUS OXIDE.

CONTINUOUS OPERATION according to the mode of

operation.

Part I-10
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

3 ARCHITECTURE
Datex AS/3™ family builds up to freely configurable modular
system. The architecture is designed to enable different module
combinations so that the user is able to get the desirable
parameter and feature set. Further, the modular approach
makes it possible to add new features in the order and pace they
are needed.

3.1 Bus structure

The operation of Datex AS/3™ products is based on two
communication channels, the AS/3 Bus and Module Bus. All
boards connected to the AS/3 Bus as well as the parameter
modules attached to the Module Bus receive their power from
the same power supply, which is an integral part of the frame.

Display
UPI CPU Controller

Parameter, | Parameter
Module Module

Figure 1 General structure of AS/3 system

Part I-11
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

The AS/3 Bus is a parallel communication channel used only for

internal data transfer between the boards connected to one
frame. It is based on the ISA bus used in the IBM PC computers,
although it is slightly modified for Datex needs. Data is
transferred on this 16 bits wide bus using the CPU clock
frequency.

The Module Bus is used to connect the parameter modules to

the frame. It is following the widely used industry standard RS-
485, which uses differential serial method to transfer the data.
This type of bus is quite robust and it allows the modules to be
attached or detached on the fly, ie. when the power is on. The
RS-485 type serial communication supports so called multidrop
or party line connections. This means that all modules connected
to Module Bus are using the same two physical wires for
communication purposes. The advantage is, that all the module
bus connectors are identical and the modules can be connected
to any order and position. Module Bus is using 500 kbits per
second data transfer rate and it can be used for longer distances
than the AS/3 Bus, e.g. for external-frame connections.

Part 1-12
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

3.2 Distributed processing

A system put together from AS/3 products is a multiprocessor
system. All the modules have their own microprocessor and
they are doing the low-level functions such as module key
control, waveform filtering, pneumatic control, etc. At the same
time the main CPU is doing higher level tasks, e.g. trending and
alarm control. While modules and CPU are doing their job, the
UPI processor takes care of all functions needed to transfer the
data between modules and CPU. And at the same time the
processor on display control board is doing pixel calculations
for graphics.

Dual-port RAM System memory

Display Control
Board
Display memory

Figure 2 Distributed processing in AS/3 system

This kind of parallel processing gives one major advantage to

centralised processing: each time new modules or boards are
added to the system, the processing power is also increased. As
a result the system is not slowing down when new features are
added.

Part I-13
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

3.3 Module Communication

The communication master controlling the data transfer
between AS/3 Bus and Module Bus is called UPI (Universal
Peripheral Interface) board. It sends information or questions to
each module 100 times per second, and if the module is present
it replies to each question immediately by sending a data
package back to UPI. This communication protocol ensures that
the each module receives and sends information every 10 ms,
the package length depends on the module type. If the module
does not respond, the UPI presumes that the module is not
connected.

Each module type has a unique name, which UPI uses to

address its messages. If there are two modules of the same type,
they both answer at the same time. This results an error and
thus two similar modules are not allowed in one frame.

UPI Board

三 !
Бианром | 1 に3
RAM =©
D.

!
S
の

Microcontroller ドーーー つ

Figure 3 Principle of UPI operation

UPI microprocessor collects all information coming from the

modules into a dual-port RAM. This memory is located on UPI
board and it is mapped directly to the address space of the main
CPU. The main CPU is thus reading information from it's own
memory and UPI guarantees that the data is up to date. This
operation works also to the other direction, when CPU is filling

Part I-14
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

the dual port RAM with data and UPI processor is distributing
it to the modules.

3.4 Software loading

The Software Cartridge attached to the CPU board contains the
program for the CPU board as well as for the other boards
attached to the AS/3 Bus. When the system is turned on, all
processors load their part of the software from the cartridge and
after that start to execute their program.

Software
‘Cartridge
Display
Control
Board
Program Program Program
Memory Memory Memory

Figure 4 Software loading

Part I-15
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

3.5 Generic Module

The detailed structure of the modules depends on the specific
needs for each individual parameter. Some common parts can
be found from inside the modules, however. First of all, the
electronics inside the module is usually divided into isolated
(floating) and non-isolated sections. Typically the non-isolated
part consists only buffers needed to interface the module to
Module Bus, the rest of the electronics can be found from the
isolated side. This includes the microcontroller together with
memory components, the front end analog electronics
(amplifiers, etc.) and peripheral drivers to control LEDs,
sensors, valves and pumps.

ee |
es | +5V Isolation
transforme:
+12V

Analog
Patient +> 2
GEEconverter CPU 5
の
El
RAM 回
EEPROM El
Peripheral
Opto RS485
drivers isolation drivers

Figure 5 General structure of parameter modules

Part J-16
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

4 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE

Field service is mostly limited to replacing the faulty circuit
boards or mechanical parts. Only the parts listed as Spare Parts
of each product are available for field service.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide the

unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed fault
description.

Detailed description of the service procedures and

troubleshooting is found in each of the module chapters in the
part If, AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Product's Service Guide in
this manual.

CAUTION: The tests and repairs outlined in this manual should

only be attempted by a trained personnel. Unauthorized service
may void the warranty of the unit.

The monitor can be cleaned by wiping with a soft cloth

moistured with mild detergent solution, and disincfected by
wiping with normal disinfectants. The monitor cannot be
autoclaved.

Special attention must be paid to fan dust filter and D-fend

water trap for their blockage may lead to monitor failure. See
Operator's Manual for further instructions.

The LCD Display is a fragile component, please refer to PART II

Displays for its cleaning and maintenance.

Part I-17
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Service Manual

GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
Monitor not functioning

On/STBY switch 'O No

Display connected? Connect and check
Keyboard connected?

The power supply unit

Connect power cord was shut down by instant over
voltage in the mains.
Remove all modules
and turn power on

Keyboard trouble. See part It

for troubleshooting.
No
Yesy

tart-up texts
appear on
screen?

Clock etc
appears on No Faulty Central Unit. Go to
the screen troubleshooting in part Il.

a,
Plug in a module [$

Module data
appear on Yes
Pick up next module

Faulty module. Go to Module

troubleshooting in part Il.

Faulty Central Unit. Go to

troubleshooting in part Il.

Part 1-18
Part li

AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor

Product’s Service Guide

Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit, F-CU8, B-CPU2, B-CPU3 and

S-STD96/ARK96
Displays and Command Board, D-VNCI 5, D-LCC 10, B-DISP,
N

B-DVGA and K-VNCI 5

Haemodynamic Modules M-ESTPR, M-ETPR and M-ESTR
YOWRW

Cardiac Output Modules, M-COP and M-COPSv

Pressure and Pressure-Temperature Modules, M-P and M-PT
Non-Invasive Blood Pressure Module, M-NIBP
Recorder Module, M-REC
Extension Frame, F-EXT4
00

Memory Module, M-MEM and Memory Board, B-CMMEM

Nellcor Compatible Saturation Module, M-NSAT
σδυδων-9

Network Board, B-NET

Interface Board, B-INT
Airway Module, G- O/JOV/AO/AiO/AOV/JAiOV, and B-GAS
Anaesthesia Keyboard, K-ARK, B-ARK
Neuro Muscular Transmission Module, M-NMT
UPINET Board, B-UPINET
 8-Module Frame, F-CU8 (Rev.03)

CPU Board, B-CPU2 (Rev. 01)

CPU Board, B-CPU3 (Rev. 00)

Software Cartridge, S-STD96 or S-ARK96 (Rev. 00)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Doc. no. 885931-2

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual X
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION I

1 SPECIFICATIONS 2

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
2.1 8-Module Frame... iene irene iii 3
2.1.1 UPI Board cecccessecsescsscsscccssssasecsescessssscsesscesscesssesessssencasensaescesenssessesenssassasesessecseesores 5
2.1.2 Power supply unit. 7
2.1.3 CPU Mother Board einen 18
2.1.4 Module Mother Board sterermermeeeeesereeser „18
2.2 CPU Board, B-CPU2 or B-CPU3...............
2.3 Software Cartridge, S-STD96 or S-ARK96..
2.4 Connectors and Signals ....
2.4.1 Internal Connectors.. „23
2.4.2 External Connectors ..26
2.4.3 Serial Data Interface sine 29
2.4.2 Digital and analog I/O connector mn 29
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES 35
3.1 General Service informaton ss 35
3.2 Preventive Maintenance ee eee nene 36
3.3 Disassembly and Reassemblÿ eee een nete eee 38
3.4 Adjustments and Calibrations ss 42
4 TROUBLESHOOTING 43
5 SERVICE VIEW 46
5.1 To Enter Service Menu..................... ee 46
5.2 Service Menu Structure инета 47
5.3 Service View Menu.
5.3.1 Monitor Menu
54 Keyboard Menu
5.5 Module Menu
5.6 Service Log Menu
6 SPARE PARTS 54
6.1 Spare Parts sn 54
6.2 Exploded View of Anaesthesia Monitor Frame 아 아 와와 59
7 EARLIER REVISIONS 61
Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
This Service Manual Section provides information on the Datex
AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor’s Central Unit. It consists of
following products:

8-Module Frame, F-CU8 (including UPI or UPINET board

and Power Supply Unit)

CPU Board, B-CPU2 or B-CPU3

Software cartridge, S-STD96 or S-ARK96

Part I-AM Central Unit-1

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

I SPECIFICATIONS
CENTRAL UNIT
Dimensions depth 382mm = (15.0 in)
width 315mm = (12.4 in)
height 128 mm (5.0 in)
weight 9.5 kg (21 Ibs)

ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Power supply 100, 110-120, 220-240 VAC 50/60 Hz

1.2 A (for whole system)
Stability +10 % of nominal voltage
Power consumption 280 VA
Grounding Hospital grade
Interruptibility Data memory and alarm settings are
saved during power failures up to
15 minutes

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Operating temperature 10 - 35°C / 50 - 95°F

Storage temperature -10- 50°C / 14-122°F
Atmospheric pressure 500 - 800 mmHg (660 - 1060 mbar)
Humidity 0 - 90 % non-condensing
(in airway 0 - 100 % condensing)

Analog outputs (+5 V, -5 V) of UPI board

Resolution: 12 bits
Gain error: +2,5%...-4.5%
+5 У max.: +5.50 У
+5 У min.: +4.30 У
-BV max.: -465 V
-BV min.: -5.25 V

Part II-AM Central Unit-2

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 8-Module Frame

The center of the Central Unit is the 8-Module Frame, F-CU8,
that includes UPI or UPINET Board and Power Supply Unit. To
operate AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor, the following products
should be installed into the frame.

CPU board, B-CPU2 or B-CPU3

Display Controller, B-DISP or B-DVGA
Software Cartridge, S-STD96 or S-ARK96

The frame has two sections. The front part is vacant for housing
the modules. The rear part is for installation of the AS/3 boards.
On the wall between the front and rear parts, there are Module
mother board and CPU mother board. The Module mother
board connects modules to the system , and the CPU mother
board connects boards together.

Part II-AM Central Unit-3

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

ii >a
i ©
i 5
: の
i ©
| る5
: ==

| Recorder Module

NIBP Module

o ©
Lo
© © το
gs) RS >
σσ
86 oa ESTP Module

P
uZE y
—s
шо.
RG
Шо o
IMI 5
m
Fo 5
る W m
| >= < 2 COP MOdule
る© SEE
26 8 A
32
=
è8 | 6853
> Ep Бом

= る
SED
26 &
228
osm P
ー | g 5
ο
8 m
a 5
<© =o
. © E
Airway Module = ©
R5 3©
=

Figure1 Basic structure of AS/3 Monitor, an example of

possible configurations

Part II-AM Central Unit-4

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
] Service Manual

2.1.1 UPI Board

NOTE: the following information is related only to the UPI

board. In case your monitor uses the UPINET board instead,
please refer to the corresponding information in the UPINET
section of this manual.
The UPI board functions as a general I/O-board. It performs I/O
duties assigned to it by the CPU board. The main processor and
the processor on the UPI board communicate through a dual-
port memory which is located on the UPI board.
Functional blocks

The UPI board contains the external bus interface, a processor,

program- and dual-port memories, IO-block, and an isolated
serial bus interface.

External bus interface

The UPI board is connected to the CPU mother board. The

following signals pass between the UPI and CPU mother board:
Data bus, Address bus, Reset, Write and Read signals, and other
related signals.

Processor

The processor in the UPI board is an 80C196KC-16, which

functions at 16 MHz frequency.

TO-block

IO-block consists of the following units.

- 4 channel 10 bits AD-converter
- 8 channel 12 bits DA-converter
- B digital inputs and 4 digital outputs

Isolated and non-isolated serial bus interface

Isolated power supply consists of transformer and other

peripheral components. It gives about 100 mA @5 V.

There are isolated and non-isolated serial bus interfaces. The

latter is connected to module bus through the CPU mother
board. The isolated interface is available on rear panel X3
connector.

Part II-AM Central Unit-5

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Unisolated serial
channel #1SVD. | isolation |
power
supply 55
Serial 、
Isolated serial ©
a channel channels 등
Address
decoding er 1interface a9
2 =
トニ ーー て で a
2 o
2]5 , Ri
=

3 | [Digital lO
|
Address の te 73
buffers 8 Analog output
channels

Address bus
u
о
È 4 analog input
u 5 channels
= 5 Processor ο
Qu nterrupt + Address 은
ag register latch る
zo u 5
no 8

° Timing
L Memory:
-DP
5
=
a
z
Contro! logic -code a
register -data κ

Digital ar;
input 5 digital input
Data
bufter/ TT
register |
[register Digital iai output
4 digital |
output

Figure 2 UPI Board Block Diagram

Part II-AM Central Unit-6

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

2.1.2 Power supply unit

Power supply unit contains three PC boards (Power Supply
board, Power Logic board, and Triac board) and four external
components (Mains transformer, Fan, Loudspeaker, and lead
acid battery).

All the operational controls in the power supply unit are located
in the three PC boards.

+32 Vd| sam

HRANSFORMER ' TI0A RECTIFIERS, SWITCH -
, POWER
I | ・ FACTOR

wy У ドー
= CORRECTION

・ | 45 Vint -15V

e CONVERTER [iim
・ *POWER [σης sei
© ON/STBY Fr
: CONTROL, [Y +5 Ven | 一
TRAE me BATCHRG, 00
BOARD | * etc. y
이

ISPL
aunt — ib τσ +15 Vá
+15 Va
+15 V
|

CONVERTER 14159)
<A:

slí+15 V)

y
15 V4 +5 Vepu
|

DIP SMÍCH
ON POWER
SUPPLY BOARD: © *AUDIO АО,
・ AMP.
45Υ

BATCHRG | Е +5 у

CONVERTER |9
STOP
s+5

rl PU (— ro!
fee
BUTTON”
INTERFACE

«POWER ON/STBY CONTROL, AUDIO AMP., and CPU INTERFACE are in Power
Logic Board. All other functions are in Power Supply Board.

Figure3 Power Supply Unit Block Diagram

Part II-AM Central Unit-7

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual —.

APPLIANCE INLET MAINS F DISPLAY OUTLET

TRANSFORMER yr T25A
: TRIAC
- SA BOARD |P G La
L E BN Ux* |
5 ㆍ WH や
|

Supply РЕ ©
D
VE
ee +
“FIT IOA | La
Mains
N F2 av POWER SUPPLY
[A Bu L BOARD 30
一 一 RD = POWER LOGIC
Y BOARD
GNYE

y :
o
La and Nx in Disploy outlet ore
Equipotentiolity separoted from the Supply Moins’
potentials L and N.

я т ий ESa Mairaτ FT and E2

Ux« is the same nominal voltage 100 V Т 6.3 А
as the nominal mains voltage 110-120 V| Slow 5 A
If no polarized mains plug and mains socket outlet system 220-240 V|T 3.15 A
is used, position of line (L) and neutral (N) in the
appliance inlet depends on the position of mains plug set
into the mains socket outlet.

The contact positions of the appliance

inlet by looking at the engagement face
of the appliance inlet.

Figure 4 Mains Part and Display Outlet Block Diagram

Part II-AM Central Unit-8

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Power Supply Board

Power Supply board includes:

Rectifiers

Rectifiers processes 21 VAC from the mains transformer.

Power factor correction

Power factor correction is performed in a preregulator. The

regulator modifies output current from sinusoidal power lines
into sinusoidal form. Its purpose is to boost efficiency of the
mains transformer.

Battery charging

Batchrg charges the 6 V battery which maintains the supply

voltage of CPU for 15 minutes after the power is cut off. The
battery is charged as long as the power cord is connected to the
mains outlet.

Supply voltage for pulse width modulators

Supply voltage for pulse width modulators of chopper power

supplies is generated by 12 V regulator at power-up and +15 V is
short-circuited. Otherwise the supply voltage comes from +15 V.

-15 V converter

-15 V converter is a Flyback-type chopper power supply that

generates -15 V analog voltage from +32 V. The load capacity is
1.2 A (18 W). +5 Vepu is also generated in this converter.

+15 V converter

+15 V converter is a Buck-type chopper power supply that

generates +15 V from +32 V.

The output of the power supply is divided into two; +15 Va for
analog voltage and +15 Vd for less sensitive components.

Part JI-AM Central Unit-9

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

+5 V converter

+5 V converter is a Buck-type chopper power supply that

generates +5.1 V from +32 V. The load capacity is 8 A (40 W).

+5 V, +15 V, +32 V, and +5 Vcpu checking

Those voltages are checked and if one of them increases more

than is allowed, thyristor pulls the rectified +32 V down.
Service reset button

Service reset button is for service purpose. Press this button with
an appropriate tool for at least five seconds before you remove
the software cartridge, any PC board or the Power supply unit
from the rear of the Central Unit.

Before connecting the power cord back and start monitoring, be

sure that at least one minute has passed after the service reset
button has pressed. Too short time may lead to memory flaw.
Audible Alarm for Power Fail

Under the cover plate of the Power supply unit there are two dip
switches. By turning the switches to the right the audio alarm is
activated. When mains power fails the audio alarm is generated
by the lead-acid battery.

Part II-AM Central Unit-10

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

. Power Supply Board

Mains Transformer
Preregulator X3
connectors py
Xi
2 TIOA av 4 aa
X2 = „+15 V converter | Cuca

32V σσ +15 Vd
Battery , Εξ A ZA 4
X6 mi RA
RA | È 415 V
ma NIC CA
+5 V converter
Fan
1 Fan + SIV
x Fan- 32V #5
B8
」 A6,A8
Audio Out; Audio Out+
X4 4 Audio Out- +5 Vepu
€ -15V
converter
+5 Vepu
i 5
Triac Km
32V B10
X4 6
Service Reset | しL 5Y
N ca

ON/STBY
一一 一 >
À 14

RESET_CPU
Ald

POWER_FAIL
——_—_—_ a
A12

RESET
B14

REFRESH_WD
B12

AUDIO_IN
Power Supply Board |X5 İX5 |X5 |X5 X5 (XS |x 6 | [6 Ci
3 125 28 19 24 13 4 5 6 7

Power Logic Board

A EPA |
Aia
the Power Logic
Board Section)

Figure 5 Power Supply Board Block Diagram

Part II-AM Central Unit-11

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Power supply board interface to CPU Mother board

Pin c2,c4: +32 Vd

Rectified and filtered +32 V dirty voltage. This voltage is

switched on by pulses of +15 V chopper power supply which
turns the switching transistor on with the help of charging
pump. The switching transistor is a short-circuit protected
MOSFET. The ripple voltage when fully loaded is about 3 Vpp at
the frequency of two times mains frequency.

Pin c32: -15 V

Accuracy of -15 V is +2 %. The load capacity is 1.2 A and the

ripple voltage about 30 mVpp at the chopper frequency
(200 kHz +10 %).
Pin c22: f(-15 V)

The chopper freguency measured at the rear panel connector

whose pulse ratio corresponds to the pulse width modulator's
pulse ratio. For test use only.

Pin c20: st (-15 V)

The chopper can be turned off by connecting this line at the rear
panel connector to ground. For test use only.

Pin a2,a4: +15 Vd

Accuracy of +15 V is +2 %. The load capacity is 6.5 A if +15 Va is

not loaded. The ripple voltage about 50 mVpp at the chopper
frequency (200 kHz +10 %).
Pin 32: +15 Va

+15 V for analog voltage. The load capacity is 1.2 A and is

passive filtered from +15 Vd. The ripple voltage about 10 mVpp
at the chopper frequency (200 kHz +10 %).

The total load capacity of +15 Va and +15 Vd is about 6.5 A (97.5
W).

Part II-AM Central Unit-12

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Pin b22: f (+15 V)

The chopper frequency measured at the rear panel connector

whose pulse ratio corresponds to the pulse width modulator's
pulse ratio. For test use only.

Pin b20: st (+15 V)

The chopper can be turned off by connecting this line at the rear
panel connector to ground. For test use only.

Pin a6,a8,b8: +5 V

Nominal voltage is 5.1 V and its accuracy is +2 %. The load

capacity is 8 A. The ripple voltage about 50 mVpp at the chopper
frequency (200 kHz +10 %).

Pin a22: Е (+5 У)

The chopper frequency measured at the rear panel connector

whose pulse ratio corresponds to the pulse width modulator's
pulse ratio. For test use only.

Pin a20: st (+5 V)

The chopper can be turned off by connecting this line at the rear
panel connector to ground. For test use only.

Pin b10: +5 Vepu

K i
Supply voltage for the CPU. Nominal voltage is 5.1 V. The
accuracy is +2 % and the load capacity 1 A. The ripple voltage is
50 mVpp. The +5 Vcpu is connected to linearly regulated battery
voltage when the choppers are switched off.
Pin b14: -RESET

Signal for the digital boards.

Pin a10: -RESET CPU

Signal for the CPU.

Part II-AM Central Unit-13

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Pin a12: -POWERFAIL

The signal informs about supply voltage failure to the CPU.

Pin b12: WD

Watchdog input signal. The CPU must toggle WD every 1.6

seconds. Otherwise the power supply will generate -RESET and -
RESET CPU signals.

Pin c12: AUDIOin

Audio signal which is amplified in Audio-amp. circuit.

Ground

All the signals and lines within the Power supply unit share the
common ground which is connected to AS/3 Anaesthesia
Monitor chassis.

Power Logic Board

Power Logic board includes:

Power ON/STBY control

Power ON/STBY control includes a logic with which power

supply is switched on or off by turning ON/STBY switch.

Reset

-RESET_CPU signal is transmitted to the CPU interface in case

the mains voltage fails or the power is cut off.

-RESET signal is also generated for other digital boards.

Audio amp.

Audio signal from the CPU is amplified and filtered for the
loudspeaker. Amplification gain is about 5 dB.
CPU interface

All the necessary communications between the Power supply

unit and the CPU (Reset-, powerfail-, and watchdog-functions)
are realized in this board. Additionally, the block contains a

Part II-AM Central Unit-14

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

circuit that supervises the maintenance of CPU's supply voltage

from the battery for 15 minutes after AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
is turned off.

Display control

Display control circuit controls Triac board control signal

(TRIAC).

Part II-AM Central Unit-15

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

VDD +5 Vint +2.5 Vref

Vin > + y
BATchg—>
—O0N/STBY—> POWER ON/OFF トー PWR_ENA
+32 У—>
Temperature—>

BATchg

v
|
+15vi-> DISPLAY CONTROL トラ TRAC
ο
ο __— ———_

+5 Vepu

+5 Vep
+5 VepuE RESET_CPU
POWER_FAIL ~RESET_CPU
RESET-

+5 Vepu

+5 Vint
+5 Vepu
451 V +5 Vepu ENA +5 Vepu ENA
15 min. TIMER

+5.1 V

+5 Vepu—> y
START —3A -> — POWER FAIL
-SToP—>| ~RESET > -RESET
+5.1 V—>
一REFRESH_WD 一 >> _

+5 Усри +15 VD +5 Vcpu

Vin 一 一一 POWER OUT 4 | to SPEAKER

_ | ALARM SIGNAL» | >
ON/STBY— POWER OUT AUDIO AMP. AU_OUT+
ALARM— ENA AUDIO IN s >
switch A om, SPO AU- OUT—

Figure 6 Power Logic Board Block Diagram

Part IT-AM Central Unit-16

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Triac Board
Tasks of the Triac board are to supply voltage to the Video
display when AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor is turned on and cut off
the voltage when it is turned off. This is done by a solid state
relay and peripheral components.

External Components
1. Transformer

The power of the mains transformer is 250 VA. The secondary

voltage is 21 VAC and for the display unit it is either 100 VAC,
115 VAC, or 230 VAC.

Depending on the voltage in use, there are three different

transformers for the AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor.

2. Fan

The fan is switched on automatically when +32 Vd is generated.

3. Loudspeaker

The loudspeaker is controlled by the audio-amplifier on the

Power Logic board.

4. Battery

6 V, 1.2 Ah sealed lead-acid battery is used to supply power to

the CPU board after the power is turned off and the power cord
is disconnected.

Part II-AM Central Unit-17

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

2.1.3 CPU Mother Board

The CPU mother board connects the CPU board and other AS/3
boards (e.g. UPI and Display controller) and functions as a bus
between them.

There are connectors for six AS/3 boards. Four of those are
normally occupied (UPI or UPINET, CPU, Display controller and
Gas interface or INT boards) and two are reserved for, e.g. B-
NET or B-ARK board. AS/3 bus structure is the same in all AS/3
monitors.

ON/STBY-line is connected only to a Display controller

connector from where it goes directly to Keyboard and
ON/STBY switch. The CPU mother board is connected to
Module mother board by 25-pin D-connector.

2.1.4 Module Mother Board

This board connects AS/3 modules and the Anaesthesia Monitor
together electrically. Module Bus structure is the same in all the
AS/3 monitors. There are connectors for four double-width or
eight single-width modules.

Part II-AM Central Unit-18

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

2.2 CPU Board, B-CPU2 or B-CPU3

The CPU board takes care of the central processing.

The main features of the CPU board are:

80486 processor
0 *

Clock freguency 32 MHz

Software cartridge interface
푸

B-CPU2: 2 Mbytes DRAM

오

B-CPU3: 8 Mbytes DRAM

À

8 Kbytes static RAM with real time clock

À

32 Kbytes EEPROM memory

4 channel UART:
*

3 channels with modem signals in AC-logic level

1 channels without modem signals in RS232-level
programmabie alarm sound generator
5 external and 3 internal interrupts

Control logic

IO-decoding and wait state generation takes place in GAL IC

and as well as the processor itself. Code memory (EPROM) and
working RAM (DRAM) are designed to be linear, and static
RAM and EPROM are mapped in I/O space.
Wait state generators

The processor and the GAL IC have internal wait state

generators for their predecoded chip select pins. The wait state
generator in the GAL IC is used also by the other boards
connected to the AS/3 bus.

Halt detection

NMHinterrupt is generated by the power control logic. The

interrupt signals in the CPU means that all supply voltages
except +5V for the CPU board will be switched off shortly. NMI
interrupt service program then saves all necessary parameters in
the static RAM before supply voltages fail.

When hardware detects HALT command all signals generated in

the CPU board as well as all the outputs to the CPU mother
board are left floating in high impedance state; only DRAM
refreshment cycle continues to occur. The halt state will

Part II-AM Central Unit-19

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

continue until a RESET pulse from the power control logic circuit
is received.

External Bus

External bus signals are AC logic level signals. Series resistors

are used to limit signal ringing when the signals change their
states. Additional signal filtering is performed in the CPU
mother board.
Software cartridge interface

See chapter “Connectors and signals”.

Main peripherals

QUART
Four series channel Quart is used.

SAA1099

IC SAA1099 is used as alarm sound generator.

M48T18

Lithium battery back-up 8 Kbytes static RAM with a real-time

clock.

CAUTION: The IC contains a lithium battery. Discard the

battery according to local regulations.

Refresh watchdog

The processor has to refresh periodically the watchdog timer in

the Power supply unit in order to prevent reset pulse.

Part II-AM Central Unit-20

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

=
(Address) lAddress| DRAM
latches muxes bank

JI
Processor

|
il
Data
buffers

ddress
decoding NT
Sw cartridge
Data connector
bus
swap | |

Control
logic ——

AS/3 BUS

Serial
control Control bus
Data bus
Address bus

Figure 7 CPU Board Block Diagram

Part H-AM Central Unit-21

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

2.3 Software Cartridge, S-STD96 or S-ARK96

CAUTION: The AS/3 Software Cartridge cannot be
disassembled. There are no serviceable parts inside.

The Software Cartridge contains the main software, which

includes software for the CPU board, Display controller boards,
UPI/UPINET board and Network board.

The main software is named S-STD96 or S-ARK96. The software

S-ARK96 is needed when the monitor is used for anaesthesia
record keeping. Both softwares contain the same monitoring
functions.

Software cartridge pin configuration

A B
1 [GND +5 V VCC
2 |+5VVpp EPROM 1
3 |-SMEMW -SMEMR
4 |-SBHE SAO
5 | A21/A20 -EPROMO
6 |ws2/4 -EPROMO
7 |SA21 -EPROM1
8 |SA19 SA20
9 |SA17 SA18
10 |SA15 SA16
11 |SA13 SA14
12 (SAI SA12
13 |549 SA10
14 | SA7 SA8
15 |545 SA6
16 | SA3 SA4
17 [sal SA2
18 | DIS D14
19 | p13 D12
20 | DI1 D10
21 | Do D8
> lp; D6
23 | D5 D4
24 [Ds D2
> İn DO

Part II-AM Central Unit-22

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

2.4 Connectors and Signals

2.4.1 Internal Connectors

Power supply (X3) - CPU mother board connector

a(a) b(c) c (e)

2 +15 VD GND +32 VD
4 +15 VD GND +32 VD
6 +5V GND GND
8 +5V 45V GND
10 RESET_CPU +5 V_CPU GND
12 POWER_FAIL REFRESH WD1 LOUDSPEAKER
14 ON/STBY RESET N/C
16 NIC NIC NIC
18 GND GND GND
20 TESTI N/C TEST2 N/C TEST3 N/C
22 TEST4 N/C TEST5 N/C TEST6 N/C
24 TEST7 N/C TESTS N/C TEST9 N/C
26 GND GND GND
28 BAT_ON NIC V_BATNIC LBAT NIC
30 N/C GND N/C
32 +15 V GND -15V

Part II-AM Central Unit-23

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

CPU mother board - Module mother board connector

Module bus connector

Pin No MO Signal
1 o RESET RS485
2 o -15 VDC
3 o +15 VDIRTY
4 ο +15 VDC
5 0 -DATA_RS485
6 o DATA RS485
7 o Ground & Shield
8 ο -RESET_RS485
9 I CTSB
10 O RTSB
11 I RXDB
12 0 TXDB
13 o Ground & Shield
14 o +32 VDIRTY
15 o GroundDIRTY
16 I CTSC
17 o RTSC
18 I RXDC
19 o TXDC
20 I ON/STANDBY
21 I PWM_ECG
22 I RXDD_RS232
23 o TXDD RS232
24 o +5 VDC
25 o +5 VDC

Part II-AM Central Unit-24

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

CPU Bus connectors on CPU Mother board

a b c
1 +15 V AGND DGND
2 -15V BALE DGND
3 SAO SA1 DGND
4 SA2 SA3 RESET_RS485
5 SA4 SAS -RESET RS485
6 SA6 SA7 DATA. RS485
7 SA8 SA9 -DATA_RS485
8 SA10 SA11 TXDD RS232
9 SA12 SA13 RXDD RS232
10 SA14 SA15 PWM_ECG
11 SA16 SA17 BITHN
12 SA18 SA19 TXDC
13 SA20 SA21 RXDC
14 SA22 SA23 RTSC
15 -SMEMR -SMEMW CTSC
16 -SIOR -SIOW TXDB
17 CLK -RESET RXDB
18 -IOCHRDY IRQ10 RTSB
19 N/C_1 IRO11 CTSB
20 N/C_2 IRQ12 TXDA
21 -SBHE 18015 RXDA
22 SDO SD1 RTSA
23 SD2 SD3 CTSA
24 SD4 $05 AUDIO_OUT
25 SD6 SD7 +5 V
26 SD8 SD9 +5V
27 SD10 SDi1 +5V
28 .|SD12 SD13 +5 V
29 SD14 SD13 ON/STBY
30 +15 VD -RESET_CPU +5 V_CPU
31 +15 VD +32 VD REFRESH_WD
32 GNDD GNDD POWER FAIL

Part II-AM Central Unit-25

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

2.4.2 External Connectors

Figure 8 Central Unit Rear Panel

(1) Display power outlet

(2) Mains power inlet
(3) Equipotential connector
(4) Service reset button
(5) Software Cartridge
(6) Network Board /UPINET Board /Keyboard Interface Board
(7) CPU Board
(8) UPI board
(9) Primary Display Controller
(10) Secondary Display Controller /Keyboard Interface Board
(11) Interface Board /Gas Interface Board

NOTE: Your Central Unit may not include all circuit boards
listed above.

Part II-AM Central Unit-26

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

9-pin D-connector X3 on UPI board for serial data interface

Pin No vo Signal
1 N/C
RXD (RS)

N
TXD (RS)

000
U aU
DUA +5 V
GND
NIC
© RTS (RS)
CTS (RS)
NIC
NO

Part II-AM Central Unit-27

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

44-pin D-connector X2 for digital and analog I/O on the UPI Board

Pin No | VO | Signal
1 o GND
2 I (D) input 3
3 ο Def Sync (D) output 0
4 I (D) input 2
5 ο Nurse call (D) output 3
6 o Reserved (D) output 3
7 o GND
8 o Pacemaker Sync. (D) output 2
9 I Reserved (A) CH3
10 o (Ay CAS
11 ο +15 V
12 ο -15 У
13 I Reserved (A) CHO
14 ο (A)Y*CHI
15 o +5 V
16 ο (A)*CH4
17 ο (A)*CH3
18 I for monitor interfacing (A)CH1
19 ο (A)*CH2
20 ο (A)*CHO
21 I Reserved (D) INPUT 4
22 I for monitor interfacing (A) CH2
23 I Reserved (D) INPUTS
24 O (A)*CH6
25 ο (A)*CH7
26 М/С
27 NIC ;
28 NC に
29 N/C
30 N/C
31 N/C
32 N/C
33 N/C
34 N/C
35 N/C
36 N/C
37 N/C
38 0 Direct ECG (A)
39 NIC
40 NC
41 NC
42 NC
43 NC
44 NC
* Analog outputs are selectable.

Part Ii-AM Central Unit-28

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

2.4.3 Serial Data Interface

Serial Data Interface connector

The Serial Data Interface connector is a 9-pin male D-connector

(X3) on the rear panel of the UPI board.

Serial interface is RS-232 connection which uses +12V

input/output signals.

2.4.2 Digital and analog I/O connector

The digital and analog I/O connector is a 44-pin female
D-connector (X2) on the rear panel of the UPI board.

Digital Inputs

There are 4 separate digital inputs. Each signal uses TTL -level.
The inputs and pins are (numbering starts from input 2):

Input 2 pin4
Input 3 pin2
Input 4 pin 21
Input 5 pin 23
Ground pin7

Digital Outputs

There are 4 separate digital outputs. Each signal uses TTL-level.

The outputs and pins are:

output 0 (Defibrillation Sync.) pin3

output 1 (Nurse Call) pin 5
output 2 (Pacemaker Sync.) pin 8
output 3 (reserved) Pin 6
ground pin7,1

Defibrillation Sync indication is generated by ECG. When active,

the signal is state 1. After 10 ms the signal is reset to state 0. New
Defibrillation Sync is not generated before the indication is
deactivated.

Nurse Call indication is generated by red, yellow and white

alarms. When activated, it is set to state 1 and remains at that

Part I-AM Central Unit-29

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

state until the alarm situation is over or SILENCE ALARM key is

pressed.

Pacemaker Sync indication is generated by ECG. When a

pacemaker pulse is detected, this signal is set to state 1, then it is
reset to state 0. The indication pulse width is between 0.5 ms and
2.5 ms.

The range of state 0 is from 0 to 0.8 V, and range of the state 1 is

2.8 to 5 V.

Analog Inputs

There are 4 separate analog input channels. Each channel accepts

voltages between 0 and 5 volts. The resolution consists of 1024
different voltage levels. All signals are read once in 10 ms. The
channels and pins are:

channelO pin 13
channeli pin 18
channel 2 pm22
channel3 Pin9
ground pin 7,1

NOTE: The inputs can be used only for interfacing and each of
the channels require a simultaneous serial data interface at UPI
board connector X3.

Part II-AM Central Unit-30

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Analog Outputs

AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor produces analog real-time signals

according to measured parameters. Among them is the Direct
ECG signal which is available only at pin 38. All other analog
signals are selected by the user trough the Analog Outputs menu
(Monitor Setup / Install/Service). The selection is automatically
stored into permanent memory.

NOTE: When source of the selected analog output becomes

invalid (for example, transducer is disconnected), the last valid
waveform information remains on the output and the numerical
information is no longer valid.

Direct ECG (pin 38)

Delay (max.): 15 ms
Gain ECG (out)/ECG (in): 1 V/1 mV
Frequency band:
ST and diagnostic: 0.5 - 35 Hz
Monitor: 0.9 - 35 Hz

NOTE: Direct ECG is available with frame revision F-CU8-xx-02

or higher, and with M-ESTP revision 02 or higher, and M-
ETP/EST module revision 01 or higher or M-ESTPR, M-ETPR or
M-ESTR module. The availability differs in other combinations.

There are eight separate analog output channels:

channel 0 pin 20
channel 1 pin 14
channel 2 pin 19
channel 3 pin 17
channel 4 pin 16
channel 5 pin 10
channel 6 pin 24
channel 7 pin 25
ground pin7,1

Part II-AM Central Unit-31

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Analog signals

Each signal is scaled in linear way between -5 ... +5 volts. The

resolution consists of 4096 different voltage levels. All signal
levels are updated once in 10 ms.

NOTE: Output scale -5...+5 volts is available from frame revision

F-CU8-xx-02. The older versions use scale 0... 10 volts. See the
UPI board information for specification.

OFF: Default state. No signal is present at analog output pin.

HR according to selected source (display value): The original

scale 0...300 beats are scaled between 0 and 3 volts.

ECGI, ECG2, ECG3: The original scale -5000 microvolts...+5000

microvolts is scaled between -5 and +5 volts.

P1 lre, P2 Ire, P3 lre, P4 Ire (Invasive pressure real-time values,

low resolution): The original scale -20 mmHg...+320 mmHg is
scaled between -0.2 and +3.2 volts.

P1 hre, P2 hre, P3 hre, P4 hre (Invasive pressure real-time values,

high resolution): The original scale -20 mmHg...+50 mmHg is
scaled between -2 and +5 volts.

Pleth: The original scale -100%...100% is scaled between -5 and +5

volts.

SpO,>40, SpO,>60, SpO,>80 (beat-to-beat, display value, 10 s

average): The original scale 40-100% (SpO,>40), 60-100%
(SpO,>60) or 80-100% (SpO,>80) is scaled between -5 and +5
volts.

CO»: The original scale 0%...10% is scaled between 0 and +5

volts. Values greater than 10% are set to 10%. (Airway gas
special indications are applied, see also chapter Special
Indications).

AA (Anesthesia Agent): The original scale 0%...10% is scaled

between 0 and +5 volts. Values greater than 10% are set to 10%.
(Airway gas special indications are applied, see also chapter
Special Indications).

Part II-AM Central Unit-32

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

O,: The original scale 0%...100% is scaled between 0 and +5 volts.

(Airway gas special indications are applied, see also chapter
Special Indications).

N,O: The original scale 0%...100% is scaled between 0 and +5

volts. (Airway gas special indications are applied, see also
chapter Special Indications).

Paw (Airway Pressure): The original scale -20 cmH20...+80

cmH20 is scaled between -5 and +5 volts. (Airway gas sensor
failure is applied, see also chapter Special Indications).

Flow: The original scale -100 1/min...+100 1/min is scaled

between -5 and +5 volts. (Airway gas sensor failure is applied,
see also chapter Special Indications).

Volume: The original scale -2.5 litres...+2.5 litres is scaled

between -5 and +5 volts. (Airway gas sensor failure is applied,
see also chapter Special Indications).

Resp: The original scale -5000 mohms is scaled between -5 and

+5 volts.

RR: RR display 0 to 150 breaths per minute are scaled between 0

and +1.5 volts.

T1, 12, T3, T4 (Temperature): The original scale 0 degrees...50

degrees Celcius is scaled between 0 and +5 volts.

TEST 1: Test signal of a triangle shape with base width of 1

second, min value of 0 volt and max value of 5 volts.

TEST 2: Test signal of a triangle shape with base width of 4

seconds, min value of -5 volts and max value of +5 volts.

TEST SIGNALS -5 V, 0 V, +5 V: Steady signals with one of the

listed values.

Part H-AM Central Unit-33

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Special Indications

Start up indication occurs when monitor is started. This can be

caused either by power on or by internal restart (caused by a
fatal failure). Indication consists of three triangle signals with
base width of 1 second, base of 0 volt and height of 5 volts.

Airway Gas Calibration: During calibration of any of gases a

square wave is generated: min value 0 volts, max value +2 volts,
min phase length equals max phase length and frequency 0.25
Hz.

Airway Gas Zeroing: During zeroing of any of gases a square

wave is generated: min value 0 volts, max value +5 volts, min
phase length equals max phase length and frequency 0.25 Hz.

Airway Gas Occlusion: During occlusion of any of gases a

triangle signal is generated with base width of 4 seconds, min
value of 0 volts and max value of +5 volts.

Airway Gas Air Leak: During air leak of any of gases a triangle
signal is generated with base width of 3 seconds, min value of 0
volts and max value of +5 volts.

Airway Gas Sensor Failure: During sensor failure a triangle

signal is generated with base width of 2 seconds, min value of 0
volts and max value of +5 volts.

Part Ii-AM Central Dnit-34

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES

3.1 General Service Information

Field service of the AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Frame is limited
to replacing the faulty circuit boards or mechanical parts. Return
the boards to Datex for repair. Only the parts listed as Spare
Parts are available for field service.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide the

unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed fault
description.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with the appropriate tools

and equipment shall perform the tests and repairs outlined in
this section. Unauthorized service may void warranty of the
unit.

Part II-AM Central Unit-35

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

3.2 Preventive Maintenance

We recommend that you perform these checks after any service
and at least once a year to keep the AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Central Unit in good condition.

1. Visual inspection

_ Grounding wires and all connectors are properly

connected. Check especially rear panel connectors for
tight connection.

—: Fanis running and rear panel dust filter is clean (clean it

at least once a month).

— Display screen is not distorted.

—: © Real time and date are correct in Monitor Setup menu. If

the monitor is used part of the time, replace the lithium
battery back-up static RAM MK48T02 (CPU1) every four
years and MK48T08 (CPU2), MK48T18 (CPU3) every eight
years.

Part II-AM Central Unit-36

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

2. Functional checks

—: Check the operation of the loudspeaker with an alarm.

—: Press the key "DISPLAY TRENDS" and check that there

are trends data in the memory. Turn the power off and
disconnect the power cord. After two minutes, turn the
power back on and make sure that the trend data is not
erased from the memory. Check also that the real time
and date is still correct.

_ Check that the modules operate normally in other slots as

well.

CAUTION: The Airway module cannot be connected or

disconnected while the power is on.

—: While the power is on, remove M-NIBP or M-

ESTP/ETP/P module at a time from the Central Unit.
Only the data of the parameters of the module in question
should disappear from the display.

_: Reinsert the module to the Central Unit. Within 15

seconds, the data should return to the display.

Part II-AM Central Unit-37

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly

To open the
monitor
enclosure:
The Central unit is disassembled in the following way. See the
exploded view of the unit:

a) Disconnect the power cord.

b) Remove all the parameter modules from the front of the

Central unit.

©) Press and hold the service reset button on the rear panel
of the Power supply unit for at least five seconds (until a
soft sound is heard). After this the Power supply unit,
Software cartridge, and all the boards are free to be
detached from the Central unit.

9) Remove the cross recess screw M6x30 with its support

plate from the bottom of the unit.

e) Remove the two screws with star washers which are at the
top of the back panel of Power supply unit.

Now the Power supply unit is free. Get hold of the eguipotential
connector pin and fuse housing, and pull the unit out. Move the
unit from side to side if it does not come out smoothly. Be
careful not to damage the speaker attached to the bottom of the
unit.

f) Blank connector plates, Software cartridge, and the boards

are pulled off after removing two screws and washers.
Notice that the boards can be removed only in certain
order.

8) Remove the screws at the Module mother board and one

screw from the bottom panel. The metal chassis to which
Module mother board and CPU mother board are
attached can be pulled out from rear.

h) Module mother board and CPU mother board are

attached to the metal chassis with screws. These boards
are connected to one another by 25-pin connector.

Part IJ-AM Central Unit-38

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

When reassembling, reverse the order of the disassembling steps

as described before. When inserting the metal chassis into the
external frame, fasten the screws from the front before fastening
the one thick screw on the bottom panel. This way the metal
chassis can be attached as close as possible to the inner divider
wall. Check that the 25 pin module connectors are exactly in the
middle of the openings for the connectors in the plastic frame.

When reinstalling PC boards, push them carefully until they stop

before fastening them with screws.

NOTE: When reassembling the boards set them to the slots

recommended in the sticker. The boards can only be assembled
in certain order.

Power Supply Unit

The Power Supply unit is disassembled by removing four screws
from the top cover, disconnecting the cables between the top
cover and the Power supply board and then lifting the cover off.
Lead-acid battery and Power logic board are attached to the back
of the top cover. See the exploded view of the unit, see chapter
6.2 of this section.

Power supply board is attached to the bottom of chassis with

three screws. Transformer, loudspeaker, and Triac board are also
attached to the bottom. Fan, mains power receptacle, and display
power outlet are attached to the rear of the chassis. Rear panel is
also attached to the rear of the chassis with three screws.

When reassembling, reverse the order of the disassembling steps

as described before. When inserting the Power Supply unit back
to the Central unit, make sure that the Power Supply unit is
properly attached to the CPU mother board before fastening the
screws.

Part II-AM Central Unit-39

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Lead acid battery

The sealed lead-acid battery in the Power supply unit can be
used for 3 to 5 years. If the trends are not stored in the memory
for 15 minutes after the power is turned off and the power cord
is disconnected, the fault is probably in the battery or in the
battery fuse.

To change the battery: Remove the screw that holds the battery
to the top cover of the power supply unit.

When replacing the battery, make sure the + indicated battery

cable is attached to the + pole of the battery

Dispose of the old battery according to the local regulations.

Changing the
Software
Cartridge
Change the AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Software Cartridge
according to following procedures. If necessary, save all user
default settings into the Memory card of M-MEM or write them
down using the Default Configuration Worksheet in the AS/3
Anaesthesia Monitor Installation Manual.

1. Turn off the power to the monitor. Press and hold the
SERVICE RESET button on the rear panel for five seconds.

2. Unscrew the two screws that hold the cartridge in place and
pull it out.

3. Insert the new cartridge into the CPU board and press it
gently until it seats firmly. Secure the cartridge with the two
screws removed earlier.

4. Turn the power back on.

5. Perform Factory Reset through the Service Menu. If

necessary, restore the previous user default settings.

NOTE: The factory reset restores all user specific configurations

back to factory defaults.

Part II-AM Central Unit-40

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Changing and
Installing AS/3
Board
Change any of the AS/3 boards according to following
procedures.

1. Turn off the power to the monitor. Press and hold the
SERVICE RESET button on the rear panel of the monitor for
five seconds.

(Before removing the CPU board, remove the software cartridge

as explained earlier.)

2. Unscrew the screws that hold the board in place and pull it
out.

3. Remove the new board from the protective anti static

packaging. Always hold the board by its edges and wear a
wrist grounding strap.

CAUTION: The board comprises sensitive integrated circuits that

can be damaged by an electrostatic discharge.

4. Insert the board into the slot and press the board gently until
it seats firmly. Secure the board with the screws removed
earlier.

5. Turn the power to the monitor back on.

Changing fuses
Power supply main fuses are located next to power cord
receptacle. The fuse holder can be removed by gently pushing
the locking pin above the holder (or the locking pins at both
sides) and the same time pulling the holder.

CAUTION: Use only fuses with specified type and ratings.

To change the secondary fuse on the power supply board:

Remove the rear panel from the power supply unit by removing
the two screws at the top and two screws at the bottom of the
panel. Replace the fuse placed on the upper right corner.

Part II-AM Central Unit-41

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

3.4 Adjustments and Calibrations

It is not necessary to do calibrations or adjustments to the
Anaesthesia Monitor frame.

Part II-AM Central Unit-42

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

TROUBLESHOOTING
Monitor not functioning

On/STBY switch 'O No

Display connected? >| Connect and check
Keyboard connected?

No
Yes >| The power supply unit
Connect power cord <> was shut down by instant over
No| voltage in the mains.
No |
Remove ali modules
and tum power on

‘Tum power on by shorting

13 (GND) and 20 (ON/STBY)
jat Gas Interface board connector:

No

Yes
Any LEDs lit Keyboard trouble. See part ll
on keyboard? for troubleshooting.

tart-up texts
appear on
screen?

Yes

Clock etc Faulty Central Unit. Go to

appears on No next page.
the screen

Yesy

Plug in a module <

Faulty module. Go to Module
troubleshooting.

odule data Yes! Pick up next

appear on module
e screen?
Faulty module mother board

Faulty Central Unit, go to

next page.

Part II-AM Central Unit-43

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Central Unit faulty

Y|
Check mains fuses.
Does Central Unit work?

{No
Y
Check fuses on Power
Supply Board,
Does Central Unit work?
[Νο
Y
Disconnect mains power cord.
Remove ali plug-in modules.
Disconnect Airway module.
Disconnect Command board.

y
Connect mains power cord and
turn power on by shorting pins
13 (GND) and 20 (ON/STBY) at
Gas interface board connector.

Yes

No

[ Remove Power supply unitand |

turn iton by shorting pins ai4
(ON/STBY) and a18 (GND). See
chapter 2.4.1 connector
X3 .
一 一 一-
CPU mother board or Gas
Yes interface board faulty.
——~>| Check continuities of ground
and ON/STBY line through to
Command board.

Digital section faulty. Go to

power supply YES N "Digital section troubleshooting
voltages chart’.
OK?*
* see 2.4.1 connector x3
5V
一-一一 一一 一 5V CPU
+15V
Power supply board/unit -15V
faulty. Replace it. +32 V

Part JI-AM Central Unit-44

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Digita! section faulty.

Y
Remove all modules and boards
except CPU, UPI and display
controller board

Y
Turn
the monitor on.
OK?

Insert one of the removed

boards.
same as at
Try with another display
OK start?

Tum
Replace display
the monitor on.

|
ОК?
s tone
same as at Ye У
OK start but >> Replace Display controller.
longer?
Replace faulty board

Is tone
Ye
lower and longe > Replace UPI-board
than at OK
start ?

Part II-AM Central Unit-45

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

5 SERVICE VIEW
The monitor has Service Menu, which is a useful tool to examine
monitor functions and to troubleshoot in case a fault occurs.

5.1 To Enter Service Menu

Monitor Setup
Monitor Setup Install/Service
Waveform Fields Units
Digit Fields 100 Service View 26 100
Select Mode Save Modes

De
Set Time and Date Interfacing

m ABA
Instal1/Service Analog Qutputs
Normal Screen Monitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu

Give password. Give password.

1. Press the MONITOR SETUP key.

The Setup menu appears.

2. Turn ComWheel to highlight Install/Service and push.

3. Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 16 - 4 - 34.
The Install/Service menu appears.

4. Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and push.

5. Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by pushing
the ComWheel. Password numbers are 26 - 23 - 8.

6. Turn the ComWheel to highlight Modules and push.

7. Turn the ComWheel to highlight right module and push.

Part II-AM Central Unit-46

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

5.2 Service Menu Structure

Service View

Monitor Communication Network

| Watchdog tests | Computer If.

Keyboard

Modules -- Gas Unit Mother Board

Service Log ACX

PVX

A ESTP:ECG ASX

HA ESTP:STP ト- ゴ| Calibrations

НР | Calibrations

4 COP LJ Calibrations

mM NIBP Calibrations

Fi NMT | Safety Valve

(| M-NSAT Pulse Valve

Buttons/Leds

Pneumatics

| Watchdog

— NMT Setup

M Interface =| Gases

Hi Battery

i Memory Module Spo2

NIBP

Spirometry

| $02/C.0.

Communication

Part II-AM Central Unit-47

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual o...

5.3 Service View Menu

Service View] Sw version / Unit id
Monitor Monitor Frane -—
Уег. 883898-5.0
Keyboard
Keyboard 1 -ーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーー
Modules 3
Service Log Keyboard 2 一
11 Ver: ?
sorol Vers Keyboard 3 一 -—
Record Vers 3
Previous Menu Čascade Keyboard ————————
3
Gas Unit == mona nana
2
3
AN -----------------------— 一 一 一
3

The field on the right shows software versions and their release
dates of different parts of the monitor.

The selections in Service View are:

1. Monitor unit service menu.

2. Keyboard service menu.

3. Modules service menu.

4. Error and event history.

5. Scroll Vers enables to scroll the software versions and

release dates. "-more-" indicates that there are more lines
to be viewed.

6. Record Vers: By choosing this selection, the recorder (M-

REC) prints the software versions and other information
onto the paper.

7. Return to previous menu.

Part II-AM Central Unit-48

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

5.3.1 Monitor Menu

Monitor

Watchdog Tests
Factory Reset
Language Eng.
Previous Menu

1. Communication service menu. Includes service information

on Networking „please refer to section B-NET and on
Computer Interface. From Computer Interface screen you
can see In/Out packet and bytes, as well as received errors.

2. Watchdog Tests Service Menu. Watchdog

Monitor performs a reset after ca. 2 seconds. If watchdog
circuit in power supply is faulty, the time is counted on and
stops at “>20s”.

3. Factory Reset
Restore factory default settings; clear data memories.

4. Language:
Select the language used in this monitor.

5. Return to previous menu.

Part II-AM Central Unit-49

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

5.4 Keyboard Menu

Keyboard Service Data
Message count. 0
Upper Led Leds upper OFF lower OFF
Lower Led Direct action keys
Dummy Press Silence Freeze Mark Alarms
M Alarms Event Setup
Previous Men
q Recorder ECG NIBP Invasive
Pressures
Normal
Screen
Help Reset Display Monitor
Case Trends Setup
Patient Pulse Airway Others
Date Dximetry Gas

Control wheel
Press
Clockwise Ú Counterclockwise 0

1. Silence Alarms upper led (red) check.

2. Silence Alarms lower led (yellow) check.

3. ComWheel pressing check.

4. Return to previous menu.

SERVICE DATA Detailed Description

Message Count counts whenever a function is selected.

Leds upper and Leds lower indicate Silence Alarms leds' state.

Direct action keys' 17 items change its color when the key is
pressed. If the color does not change, the key may be
mechanically damaged.

In Control wheel, Press counts whenever the ComWheel is

pushed. Clockwise and Counterclockwise counts whenever the
ComWheel is turned.

NOTE: Counters in this page are automatically zeroed on

returning to the previous menu.

Part II-AM Central Unit-50

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

5.5 Module Menu

Hodules

ESTP : ECG

ü © © © © © a 0 mi
ESTP : STP
р
СОР

NIBP
NAT
M-NSAT
Interface
Battery
Memory Module
Previous Menu

Gas unit service functions.

ESTPR module ECG board service functions.

Rp $ N

ESTPR module STP board service functions.

NS

P module service functions.

COP module service functions.

4

NIBP module service functions.

NMT service functions. Not available in earlier software

revisions.

M-NSAT module service functions

99

Interface service functions

10. Battery service functions only for AS/3 Compact Monitor

battery

11. Memory module service functions

12. Return to previous menu.

The module menus are discussed further in the module chapters.

Part II-AM Central Unit-51

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

5.6 Service Log Menu

Event and error data is stored on Service Log.

Service Log Error History

Last errors:
Error History

Scroll Last Er
Scroll Countrs
Record Log
Reset Log
Reset Run Time Error counters:

Previous Menu

Last log reset: 1970-Jan-0i 00:00:00

Service Log Event History

Running hours: Û
Error History since 1995-Aug-24 09:40:00
Event History Last events:
Cold start
1995-Aug-24 09:39:54
Scroll Countrs
Record Log

Reset Log
Reset Run Time
Previous Menu Event counters:
Cold star! t
Count 1 last 1995-Aug-24 09:30:54

Last log reset: 1995-Jan-01 00:00:00

Error history is displayed.

Event history is displayed.

Scroll last events in menu

Scroll error events in menu

Part II-AM Central Unit-52

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

5. Record both error and event history

6. Reset the whole service log.

7. Reset the run time counter

8. Return to previous menu.

Detailed Description

Cold starts is the number of monitor starts with longer than 15

minutes power off time. Warm starts is the number of starts with
shorter than 15 minutes power off time. Non-zero counter values
does not indicate a failure.
Fast cold starts indicates number of erroneous cold starts with
power off time less than 20 seconds. The reason can be either
failing battery unit or software problem solved by hardware
watchdog.

GSP watch-dog time-out and UPI watch-dog time-out indicate

erroneous cold restarts controlled by monitor and caused by
display controller board, or by the UPI or UPINET board
respectively.

Part II-AM Central Unit-53

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS

6.1 Spare Parts list

NOTE: Only changed part numbers are listed under later
revisions. To find the desired part: check first the list of the
revision that corresponds your device. If the part is not listed
there, check the previous revision, etc. until you find the right
number.

Item numbers refer to the exploded view in the chapter 6.2

Part II-AM Central Unit-54

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

8-Module Frame, F-CU8

Rev. Ol

Item Item description Order No.

4 UPI board, AS/3 AM (Rev. 01) *(880321) Use 886914

2 CPU mother board, AS/3 AM (Rev. 01-02) 880319
3 Module mother board, AS/3 AM (Rev. 01-02) 880320.
9 Frame 879097
5 Metal box, F-CU8 (Rev. 01-02) 880349
12 Rail for PC boards 879257
6 Connector plate, blank/narrow 879393
13 Connector plate, blank/wide 880278
17 Cross recess screw M6x30 61673
18 Support plate for 61673 879502
10 Cross cylinder head screw M5x8 61516
15 Cross cylinder head screw M3x8 61722
14 Star washer M3.2 63611
11 Pad 65144
1 Bronze tap for display screen tray 879476
7 Power supply unit, AS/3 AM (-21-) (Rev. 01-02) 1884588
7 Power supply unit, AS/3 AM (-23-) (Rev. 01-02) 1884589
7 Power supply unit, AS/3 AM (-28-) (Rev. 01-02) 884590
19 Power supply unit top cover, (Rev. 01-02) 880351
30 Lead-acid battery 17006
24 Power supply board, AS/3 AM (Rev. 01-02) *(880316) Use 885334
25 Fuse T6.3A *51128
23 Fuse Miniature TIA *51062
32 Triac board, AS/3 AM (Rev. 01-02) *(880317) Use 887364
33 Fuse T2.5A *51118
33 Fuse T2.5A (USA) *511181
34 Transformer (110-120 V) 26133
34 Transformer (220-230 V) 26135
34 Transformer (230-240 V) 26134
20 Fan, AS/3 AM 880049
2 Loudspeaker, AS/3 AM (Rev. 01-02) 880048
27 Mains power receptacle 54014
28 Fuse T3.15A *51119
28 Fuse 5A slow (USA) *511382
29 Display power outlet 54027
26 Power supply unit chassis, AS/3 AM (Rev. 01-02) 879254
16 Service Reset Switch, AS/3 AM (Rev. 01-02) 881378
Dust filter *871558

Part II-AM Central Unit-55

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Rev. 02

Item Item description Order No.

4 UPI board, AS/3 AM (Rev. 02-03) *(882354) Use 886914

Rev. 03

Item Item description Order No.

4 UPI board, AS/3 AM (Rev. 03) *886914

7 Power supply unit, AS/3 AM (-22-) (Rev. 03) *884591
7 Power supply unit, AS/3 AM (-28-) (Rev. 03) *884592
7 Power supply unit, AS/3 AM (-31-) (Rev. 03) *884593
26 Power supply unit chassis, AS/3 AM (Rev. 03) 882337
19 Power supply unit top cover, AS/3 AM (Rev. 03) 882336
24 Power supply board, AS/3 AM (Rev. 03) *882507
16 Service Reset Switch, AS/3 AM (Rev. 03) 52090
25 Fuse T10A 250 V *51137
23 Fuse Miniature 2AF *51063
31 Power logic board, AS/3 AM (Rev. 03) *882508
32 Triac board, AS/3 AM (Rev. 03) *(884185) Use 887364
21 Ribbon cable 882520
34 Transformer (100-105 V) 26139
34 Transformer (110-120 V) 26138.
34 Transformer (220-240 V) 26137
22 Loudspeaker, AS/3 AM (Rev. 03) 882509
27 Mains power receptacle 540140
28 Fuse T6.3A (JPN) *51128
2 CPU mother board, AS/3 AM (Rev. 03) (882953) Use 886331
3 Module mother board, AS/3 AM (Rev. 03) 882954
5 Metal box, F-CU8 (Rev. 03) 882501
6 Connector plate, blank/narrow 879393
36 Grounding plate, blank/narrow 885398
13 Connector plate, blank/wide 880278
37 Grounding plate, blank/wide 885394
Grounding plate for UPI board 885399

* = the part is recommended for stock

Part II-AM Central Unit-56

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

PRODUCTS (related to F-CU8)

NOTE: These products have been launched together with the corresponding frame
revisions. Possible spare parts are listed in each product's chapter.

F-CU8 Rev. Ol

Item description Order No.

Gas İnterface Board B-GAS

CPU Board *B-CPU1
High Resolution Display Controller *B-DHIGH

F-CU8 Rev. 02

İtem description Order No.

Software Cartridge (all except USA) S-STD93

Software Cartridge (USA) S-STD

F-CU8 Rev. 03

Item description Order No.

CPU Board *B-CPU2

CPU Board *B-CPU3
Software Cartridge S-STD94
Software Cartridge S-ARK94
Software Cartridge S-STD95
Software Cartridge S-ARK95
Software Cartridge S-STD96
Software Cartridge S-ARK96
VGA Display Controller B-DVGA
Display Controller *B-DISP
Interface Board B-INT
Network Board B-NET
UPINET Board B-UPINET
Keyboard Interface Board B-ARK

* = the part is recommended for stock

Part U-AM Central Unit-57

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

CPU Board, B-CPUI

Item description Order No.

SRAM 2kx8, Timekeeper *139423

Grounding plate 885400

CPU Board, B-CPU2 (Rev. 00)

Item description Order No.

SRAM 8kx8, Timekeeper *139422

Grounding plate 885400

CPU Board, B-CPU2 (Rev. 01)

Item description Order No.

Battery for SRAM/Timekeeper *197230
Grounding plate 885400

CPU Board, B-CPU3

Item description Order No.

Battery for SRAM/Timekeeper *197230

Grounding plate 885400

* = the part is recommended for stock

Part II-AM Central Unit-58

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

6.2 Exploded View of Anaesthesia Monitor Frame

Figure9 Exploded View of the Central Unit

Part II-AM Central Unit-59

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

Figure 10 Exploded View of the Power Unit

Part II-AM Central Unit-60

 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
This service manual fully supports earlier revisions except,

8-Module Frame, F-CU8 (rev 01/rev.02), then refer to Service

Manual p/n 880850,
CPU Board, B-CPU1 (rev 01), then refer to Service Manual p/n
882580,
Software Cartridge,S-STD/S-STD93, then refer to Service
Manual p/n 882580,
Software Cartridge, S-STD94/S-STD94, then refer to Service
Manual p/n 885930 and
Software Cartridge, S-STD95/S-STD95, then refer to Service
Manual p/n 885930.

Part II-AM Central Unit-61

M
 Video Display, D-VNCI 5 (Rev 00)

LCD Display, D-LCCIO (Rev. 03)

VGA Display Controller, B-DVGA (Rev. 03)

Display Controller, B-DISP (Rev. 00)

Command Board, K-VNCI5 (Rev. 00)

LTT

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 889926

March 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Heisinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Table of Contents

GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1

I SPECIFICATIONS 2
1.1 General Specifications... iii
1.2 Typical Performance ....
1.3 Technical Specification
2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 5
2.1 Measurement Principles 5
2.1.1 CO>/N20/AA Measurement .ee 5
2.1.2. Oz Measurement
2.13 Agent Identification se
2.1.4 Side Stream Spirometry ーー
2.2 Main Components and Block Diagram ,ee 10
2.2.1 In General unes
2.2.2 Gas Sampling System
2.2.3 ACX-200 Measuring Um ireesererensensereemeerrereereeesercereeereeneereeneenso 18
2.24 Où Measurement sn 21
2.2.5 ACX Measuring Board eee ee R ena R 22
2.2.6 ASX Agent Identification Bench... nnece 24
2.2.7 ASX Measuring Board
2.2.8 PVX Boad eee iii einen
2.2.9 Саз οι αμ μμ μμ μμ μμ μμ μμ μμ μϱϱϐϱἛϱ---ι
2.2.10 Gas Interface Board ...
2.3 Connectors and Signals
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES
3.1 General Service Information
3.2 Preventive Maintenance............
3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly ......
3.4 Adjustments and Calibrations ..
34.1 Gas Sampling System Adjustment….......................................... 43
3.4.2 Oxygen Measurement Unit Adjustments .0000 아 나 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 어 이 어 아 아 이 이 이 이 아 아 이 아 이 아 46
3.3.3 Flow Calibration iii 48
4 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 General Troubleshooting Chart...rene νε νκτο ντος
4.2 Gas Sampling System Troubleshooting
4.3 O 7 Measurement Troubleshooting
4.4 ACX Troubleshooting
4.5 ASX Troubleshooting
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

4.6 PVX Board troubleshooting .................

4.7 Gas Mother Board Troubleshooting .
48 ErrorMessages................................. eee
5 SERVICE VIEW
5.1 Gas Mother Board... issues
5.2 ACX Service menu....
5.3 PVX Service Menu .... .
54 ASX Service Menu e eee eno e nene en Pe KAR Re AA AR n nA Poe aan tao e né
6 SPARE PARTS 76
6.1 Spare parts list...
sn 76
7 EARLIER REVISIONS 80
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
This section provides information about the maintenance and
service of the LCD display (D-LCC10), the Display controller
boards (B-DISP, B-DVGA, B-DHIGH), and the Command
Boards (K-VNC15, K-VHC14) of the Anaesthesia and Compact
Monitors.

Notice that the service information of D-VNC15 (D-VHC14) are

delivered on request.

4 NOTE: The backlight circuit runs on a high voltage. Do not

touch the adapter board when powered.

Part II-Displays and Command Board-1

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

SPECIFICATIONS

I.I LCD Display, D-LCCI0

Display size 10.4 in
Display type Active Matrix 8-colour LCD
Display
Resolution 640 x 480 x (R,G,B)

DIMENSIONS

Outline (ComWheel™ included)

(WxDxH) 315 x 74 x 265.5 mm/
124x2.9x10.5in
Weight 3.5 kg / 7.7 lb

ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

LCD Display, D-LCC10 rev.03, can only be used connected to B-

DVGA rev. 03 or B-DISP Display controller boards in the
Anaesthesia Monitor.

Power consumption 10W

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Operating temperature 10-35°C / 50-95°F

Storage temperature -10-50°C / 14-122°F
Atmospheric pressure 500-800 mmHg (660-1060 mbar)
Humidity 0-85 % non-condensing
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

1.2 Display Controller Board, B-DISP

Video output: both connectors and both resolutions, analog
RGB, 0.2V - 1.1V, 0,8 V,,, 75 ohm

Output data, B-DISP, High resolution

Resolution: horizontal 1984 pixels, vertical 512 pixels

Frame frequency: 65 Hz
Scan frequency: 34,7 kHz
Dot frequency: 80 MHz max.
Sync polarity: H/negative, V/negative, level TTL
Sync pulse:

Horizontal Vertical
Front porch 1.125 us 0.037 ms
Sync period 3.000 us 0.073 ms
Back porch 1.375 us 0.442 ms

Output data, B-DISP, VGA resolution

Resolution: horizontal 640 pixels, vertical 480 pixels

Frame freguency: 60 Hz
Scan freguency: 31.6 kHz
Dot freguency: 25 MHz max.
Sync polarity: H/negative, V /negative, level TTL
Sync pulse:

Horizontal Vertical
Front porch 0.640 us 0.349 ms
Sync period 3.520 us 0.063 ms
Back porch 1.920 us 1.019 ms

Part II-Displays and Command Board-3

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
] Service Manual

1.3 Display Controller Board, B-DVGA (B-DHIGH)

Output data, B-DVGA

Video output: 15-pin D-connector: analog RGB, 0.45 V - 1.25 V,

75 ohm. 26-pin D-connector: analog RGB, 0.45 - 1.25 V
Resolution: horizontal 640 pixels, vertical 480 pixels
Frame frequency: 60.125 Hz
Scan frequency: 31.566 kHz
Dot frequency: 25 MHz max.
Sync polarity: H/negative, V/negative, level TTL
Sync pulse:

Horizontal Vertical
Front porch 0.640 us 0.349 ms
Sync period 3.520 us 0.063 ms
Back porch 1.920 us 1.019 ms

Output data, B-DHIGH

Video output: both connectors, analog RGB, 0.45 V - 1.25 V, 75

ohm

Resolution: horizontal 1984 pixels, vertical 512 pixels

Frame frequency: 51.987 Hz
Scan frequency: 27.397 kHz
Dot frequency: 32 MHz max.
Sync polarity: H/negative, V /negative, level TTL
Sync pulse:

Horizontal Vertical
Front porch 1.125 us 0.037 ms
Sync period 3.000 us 0.073 ms
Back porch 1.375 us 0.442 ms
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

1.4 Command Board, K-VNCIS (K-VHCI4)

Dimensions
Input voltage 5У
Power consumption
Communication protocol RS-232
NOTE: Power supply from the display controller board only.

Part II-Displays and Command Board-5

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 LCD Display

LCD Display, D-LCC10 includes LCD Display module, LCD
Interface board, and Command Board with keyboard.

The keyboard works independent of the main keyboard of AS/3

monitor.

The LCD Display is connected to B-DVGA or B-DISP Display

controller board in the monitor frame with the LCD Display
interface cable. The interface cable is available as an accessory.
See AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Supplies and Accessories
Catalogue.

Communication between the Display controller board and the

LCD Display takes place in analog form (in 00-02 revisions it
was in digital form). Incoming signals are buffered in the
interface board and fed forward to the LCD Display module.

Communication between the Display controller board and the

Command Board takes place in RS232 serial communication
channel D.

NOTE: B-DVGA rev. 01 and rev. 02 do not support D-LCC10-

XX-03. D-LCC10-XX-03 requires B-DVGA rev. 03 or B-DISP.
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一 一一 i
| |
|
| LCD INTERFACE OLE |
BOARD xs る
DISPLAY | BACKLIGHT |
CONTR. ¿cable X8 x UNIT |
BOARD | xe ! À |
(X3) |
| |
|
|
| || -
|
|
|
| |
| |
|
|
| |
レル |
| xi |
| ON/STBY
KEYBOARD PCB x6 SWITCH |
| X4 x2 X5 |
|
| |
|
|| KEYBOARD | | COMWHEEL] 5 PIN DIN
CONNECTOR |
|
|
_ 이 의 의 그 |

Figure 1 General Block Diagram

Part H-Displavs and Command Board-7

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2.1.1 LCD Interface Board

In general

The LCD Interface board is the interface between the Display

controller board and the LCD Display component. The
keyboard is also connected to the Interface board. (See Figure 1)
The incoming signal to LCD Interface board is pure analog VGA
- RGB with separate horizontal and vertical synchronisation
signals. (See Figure 2) The display element needs digital RGB-
signals, HSYNC, VSYNC, DOTCEK and a display timing signal
DTMG. The DTMG signal indicates that the digital RGB-signals
are active.

The functions of this board are digitalization of the video

signals, regeneration of the DOTCLK and generation of the
DTMG. The backlight driver is also located on the board.

Power Supply

The DC/DC power supply is an isolated discontinuous mode

flyback switcher. It has a current mode PWM circuit and a
separate FET switch on the primary side. The transformer has
two secondary windings, one for 5V and another for 12V. On
the secondary side (5V), there is a separate chip on the feedback
path to drive the optoisolator.

Backlight Unit

The backlight unit is integrated to the LCD Display component.

The backlight consists of one Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp
(CCFL), which runs on a high AC voltage. The lamp needs
approximately 1400 Volts to lit, but runs on a lower (500-600)
voltage when on.

The backlight unit is an irreparable part, therefore only the

whole LCD Display component can be replaced. If there is
need to replace the LCD Display component please note: that
the LCD Display is very sensitive for mistreatment. The
service instructions (in Chapter 3) should be followed
carefully when handling the component.

NOTE: The LCD Display component and Backlight unit are

separate units in the D-LCC10, revision 01 and 02, therefore the
units are possible to be replaced separately.
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

ON/STBY CCFL
ON/ Backlight Backlight
WER STBY 12VINV li
inverter
control
US +5V 5VKb
32V
IND
+12V

C +5V LCD

SYNC (792 Digital Display,

BUS
buffer
Video Phase LP VCO
comparator detector] filter

Video
comparator gic to generate | DTM
DTMG -signal
Video Keyboard
comparator

Figure 2. LCD Interface Board Block Diagram

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2.1.3 External Connector Configurations

LCD Display, D-LCC10 has two external connectors. Main
connector is situated at the back. It is 13 pin Coax D-connector
and has pins for operating voltage (+32 Vdc), display signals,
and serial communication RS232.

5-pin DIN connector (see the following page) is situated on the

right side of D-LCC10.

LCD Display 13 pin Coax D-connector (main connector)

Pin No JO | Signal Notes

Dirty Ground
et στι

Intensity
ENR

Hsync2 horiz. deflect

Vsync2 vert. deflect
Contrast
+32 Vdd
AMA

GND
RXDD RS232 from keyboard
OE

TXDD RS232 to keyboard

AO

ON/STBY active GND

ha
o

BLUE GND &

>n

BLUE VIDEO 2
GREEN GND &
>
N

GREEN VIDEO2
A3 I RED GND &
RED VIDEO2

5-pin DIN connector (PC-connector)

Pin No | I/O | Signal Notes

1 0 CLK
2 I/O | DATA
3 not connected
4 GND
5 0 +5 Vde
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

26-pin male D-connector at the end of Interface cable (AS/3,

Display controller board side)

Pin No | VO | Signal Notes

1 ο RED VIDEO2
2 0 GREEN VIDEO2
3 O BLUE VIDEO2
4 BLANK not used
5
6 O GND chassis
7
8 O Hsync2 horiz. deflect
9 o Vsync2 vert. deflect
10 0 RED GND
11 O GREEN GND
12 o BLUE GND
13 O GND chassis
14 o DCLK GND
15 not connected
16 ON/STBY active GND
17 O Dirty GND
18 O Dirty GND ]
19 I RXDD RS232 from keyboard
20 O TXDD RS232 to keyboard
21 not connected
22 not connected
23 not connected
24 not connected
25 0 +32 Vdd
26 O +32 Vdd

Part H-Displays and Command Board-11

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2.2 Display Controller Board:

High Resolution Display, B-DISP

2.2.1 Functional Description

B-DISP board is connected to the CPU Mother board. The
processor on the CPU board transmits program through the
AS/3 bus to B-DISP board.

B-DISP board includes the functions of both B-DHIGH and B-

DVGA boards. Thus, B-DISP board supports both high
resolution and VGA resolution. The resolution is automatically
selected based on monitor ID codes. The resolution is set to
640x480 if a VGA resolution display is used, otherwise the
resolution is set to 1984x512.

NOTE: S-STD96 and S-ARK96 softwares support B-DISP, B-

DHIGH and B-DVGA boards. 1, however, B-DISP board is used
to drive D-VHC14 display, a small part of the resulting picture
will be clipped.

System Memory
The system memory contains the GSP software code. The
memory consists of two 256kx16 memory banks.

Frame Memory
The frame memory contains digital display data. The size of the
memory is 1 Mbyte making 1984x512 display resolution with
256 colours possible. The memory consists of four 256kx8
VRAM memory circuits.

Video Interface Palette

The video interface palette reads the digital display data from
the frame memory and converts the data into analog RGB-
signals. The synchronization signals for the conversion are
generated by the GSP.

The video interface palette is clocked by two pixel clocks. A 25

MHZ clock is selected for VGA resolution and a 40 MHz clock is
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

selected for high resolution. The 40 MHz clock is internally

converted into a 80 MHz clock.

Graphics System Processor (GSP)

There are four 16-bit registers in the GSP, from which the host-
processor reads and to which it writes data.

Display Controller Resolution

The resolution of the display controller depends on initialization
of the GSP's registers and frequency of the video oscillator.

Reset Signal
Reset signal comes from the Power supply unit through the
AS/3 bus.

Monitor ID Register
The monitor ID register contains a three bit (numeric values 0-7)
monitor ID code. The register is connected to channels 11-13 of
the X3 D-connector. If no display is connected to B-DISP board
or if the monitor ID code fails, 111 code is generated by pull-up
resistors. If the ID code is 011 or 101, VGA resolution is selected,
otherwise high resolution is selected.

Part II-Displays and Command Board-13

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2.2.2 Block Diagram

Control
logic
pixeldata

AS/3-bus DRAM VRAM

256K * 16 256K * 16

i AS な RGB1
i bus GSP Video
addr/data Interface
| interface | addr/data
TMS34010 Palette RGB 2

FLASH
EEPROM 1M*16
Keyboard
2K*8 or
- um
2M*16

Audio Audio
Interface output

Figure 3 Display Controller Block Diagrams

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2.2.3 Jumper Locations

The B-DISP board can be configured as either primary or
secondary by shifting the location of J1 jumper (interrupt signal)
as shown in figure 4.

Primary Display Controller Secondary Display Controller

Jiepej Jifssje

Figure 4 Jumper Locations, B-DISP Board

2.2.4 Connectors and Signals

15-pin D-connector X2 on B-DISP Display controller boards

Pin No | V/O | Signal Notes

1 O RED VIDEO 1 analog
2 O GREEN VIDEO 1 | analog
3 O BLUE VIDEO 1 analog
4 MONIID2 monitor identification
5 0 GND
6 O RED GND
7 0 GREEN GND
8 0 BLUE GND
9 N/C
10 0 SYNC GND
11 MONIIDO monitor identification
12 MONIIDi monitor identification
13 0 HSYNC 1 TTL, CMOS
14 ο VSYNC 1 TTL, CMOS
15 N/C

Part II-Displays and Command Board-15

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

26-pin D-connector on B-DISP Display Controller Boards

PinNo | V/O | Signal

1 O Red video (analog)
2 ο Green video (analog)
3 O Blue video (analog)
4 I MON2ID2
5 I MON2ID1
6 O Ground
7 I MONZIDO
8 O Horizontal sync
9 O Vertical sync
10 O Red ground
11 O Green ground
12 O Blue ground
13 O Ground
14 O Ground /Sync ground
15 o +5V
16 I ON/STBY
17 0 Ground
18 O Ground
19 1 RxD RS232
20 O TxD RS232
21 O Brightness
22 O Contrast
23 O Audbufout
24 Not connected
25 o +32 Vd
26 0 +32 Vd

Part II-Displavs and Command Board-16

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2.3 Display Controller Board:

VGA Display, B-DVGA (B-DHIGH);

2.3.1 Functional Description

The Display controller board is connected to CPU Mother board.
The CPU board's processor transmits program through the
AS/3 bus to the Display controller board.

Graphics System Processor (GSP)

There are four 16-bit registers in the GSP, from which the host-
processor reads and to which it writes data.

Display Memory
Four memory circuits (256k x 4 bit) are used.

Program Memory
Four memory circuits (256k x 4 bit) are used.

Video Signal
Serial outputs of the frame buffer memory are transferred to two
Latch circuits so that two consecutive pixels (8 bits) are fed to
one, and the next two consecutive pixels (8 bits) are fed to the
other. Those four pixels (16 bits) are multiplexed into two
consecutive pixel data bytes of 8 bits each. The data is then fed
into the video palette circuit. The RGB signal is sent to the video
buffer. The signal can be used with a CRT display.

Display Controller Resolution

The resolution of the display controller depends on initialization
of the GSP's registers and frequency of video oscillator. The B-
DHIGH board uses a 64 MHz oscillator and the B-DVGA board
a 25 MHz oscillator.

Reset Signal
Reset signal comes from the Power supply unit through the
AS/3 bus.
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2.3.2 Block Diagram

DISPLAY CONTROLLER BOARD

CPU HOST PORT
MOTHER INTERFACE
BOARD (X1

GRAPHICS
SYSTEM
PROCESSOR SYSTEM
1 MEMORY

i MEMORY ルー B-DVGA: B-DHIGH:

i INTERFACE NC CRT
i VIDEO
i DISPLAY DAC
i MEMORY [一 VIDEO
i BUFFER
i Ines,
i VIDEO
i TIMING
i B-DVGA: | B-DHIGH:
iix K-VHC14
LCD
İL RS-232 INTER-
に< ONSTBY FACE
BOARD
+32 Vnom

Figure 5 Display Controller Block Diagrams

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2.3.3 Jumper Locations

The B-DVGA and B-DHIGH boards can be configured as either
primary or secondary by shifting the location of J5 and J2
jumpers ( board address and interrupt signal) as shown in
figures 6 and 7.

Primary Display Controller Secondary Display Controller

Je 4598 회

vzs able | segs

Figure 6 Jumper Locations, B-DVGA board, revision 01,

and B-DHIGH board, revision 01 (s/n < 174671)

Primary Display Controller Secondary Display Controller

J5e 회 J5[ej*

42906이 | Jales]e

Figure 7 Jumper Locations, B-DVGA board, revision 01-

02, and B-DHIGH board, revision 01-02 (s/n >
174670)
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2.3.3 Connectors and Signals

15-pin D-connector X2 on Display controller boards

Pin No | I/O | Signal Notes

1 O RED VIDEO 1 analog
2 ο GREEN VIDEO 1 | analog
3 o BLUE VIDEO 1 | analog
4 N/C
5 o GND
6 o RED GND
7 o GREEN GND
8 o BLUE GND
9 N/C
10 O SYNC GND
11 N/C
12 N/C
13 ο HSYNC 1
14 O VSYNC 1
15 N/C
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

26-pin D-connector on Display controller boards

Pin No | VO | Signal
1 O Red video (analog)
2 O Green video (analog)
3 O Blue video (analog)
4 0 Not connected /Blank
5 Not connected
6 0 Ground
7 Not conected
8 O Horizontal sync
9 O Vertical sync
10 0 Red ground
11 O Green ground
12 0 Blue ground
13 o Ground
14 O Ground
15 0 +V
16 ON/STBY
17 O Dirty ground
18 O | Dirty ground
19 RxD RS232
20 O TxD RS232
21 Not connected
22 Not connected
23 Not connected
24 Not connected
25 Not connected
26 Not connected

Part If-Displays and Command Board-21

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2.4 Command Boards, K-VNCI5 (K-VHCI4)

The Command board consists of 17 direct function keys,
ComWheel, and ON/STBY switch.

2.4.1 Functional Description

Command Board PCB

The Command board PCB is located inside the Command

Board. The board reads the status of the front panel keys and the
ComWheel and forwards the information to the CPU board.

External communication

Communication with the host processor takes place in R5232

serial communication channels which are available in both the
AS/3 bus and module bus. Two signals, TXD and RXD, are in
use. No handshaking is used.

The 26-pin subminiature D-connector of the Command Board is

connected to a Display controller board.

Serial communication speed is 19.2 KBaud.

ComWheel

The ComWheel on the front panel is used for menu selection.

LEDs

The alarm LEDs are activated by the Command Board PCB

under the commands received via serial communication from
the CPU board. The red or yellow alarm LED is lit when red or
yellow alarm is activated. "STBY" -led is lit when the device is
switched to stand-by and connected to mains.

NOTE: If there are two Command Boards connected to the

system, the system is ON (STBY LED not lit), when at least one
of the switches is positioned ON.
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2.4.2 Block Diagram

KEYBOARD PCB

CPU
E, Come

E 5PINDIN (010010)
CONNECTOR
DISPLAY
xt
CONTROLLER oar 기
BOARD È R8232
PROGRAM
(DI MEMORY
EPROM

KEYBOARD X4 i
SCANNING ドーーーーー KEYBOARD
CIRCUIT

ALARM
LEDS

STBY
LED

DISPLAY i
CONTROLLER €
i ON/STBY
i SWITCH
BOARD i

Figure 8 K-VNC15 (K-VHC14) Block Diagram

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2.4.3 Connectors and Signals

Command Board 26-pin male D-connector

Pin No | I/O | Signal Notes

1 Not connected
2 Not connected
3 Not connected
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 I GND
7 Not connected
8 Not connected
9 Not connected
10 Not connected
11 Not connected
12 Not connected
13 Not connected
14 N ot connected
15 I +5V
16 0 ON/STBY
17 Not connected
18 Not connected
19 O TXDD RS232
20 I RXDD RS232
21 Not connected
22 Not connected
23 Not connected
24 Not connected
25 Not connected
26 Not connected
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES

3.1 General Service Information

Usually field service is limited to replacing the faulty circuit
boards or mechanical parts. The boards are then returned to
Datex for repair.

Datex Technical Services is always available for service advice.

Please provide the unit serial number, full type designation, and
a detailed fault description.

CAUTION: The tests and repairs outlined in this section should

only be attempted by trained personnel with the appropriate
equipment. Unauthorized service may void warranty of the
unit.

3.2 LCD Display

NOTE: The LCD Display component and the backlight lamp are
irreparable parts and they should be replaced as a whole unit
whenever necessary.
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

3.2.3 Disassembly and Reassembly

Disassemble the LCD display according to the following
procedure. Please refer to the exploded view of the LCD display
(chapter 6, spare parts).

NOTE: Wear a static control wrist strap and soft cotton gloves
(dust free) when handling the LCD Display parts. Do not
touch connector pins.

1. Place the LCD Display on a flat surface the front side

downwards.

2. Remove the screws (4) that are located at the corners of the
rear panel.

3. Lift the rear panel gently, disconnect the cable(s) and set the
rear panel aside.

In normal circumstances it is very difficult to keep the LCD

Display component and the LCD Display shield free of dust
when those are detached from the LCD Display frame. If dust
particles remain on the LCD Display component and LCD
Display shield surfaces, those may impair the quality of picture
on the screen.

In case you need to detach the LCD Display component for

repair, if you can provide a dust free environment, follow the
instructions below. Otherwise, you may return the whole LCD
Display to be repaired at Datex.

NOTE: If the LCD Display unit is broken, handle it carefully

to avoid injury (the LCD Display component and the
backlight lamp are made of glass). Wash your hands if you
touched liquid crystal which may flow out from a broken LCD
Display component.

NOTE: Do not touch , push or rub the exposed soft polarizer.

Keep the polarizer clean. In case of accidental mishandling see
the instructions following this chapter.

1. The Adapter board and its insulation plate can be detached

by disconnecting the cable connectors and removing the
screws (4).
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

2. Remove the screws (8) that are located at the back of the
LCD Display unit.

3. The following parts can now be lifted off one by one:

+ the Adapter unit

e the LCD Display component with the backlight
e the LCD Display shield
+ the EMC cover with the LCD Display gasket

4. The Command board PCB can be detached by

disconnecting the cable connectors and removing the
screws (3).

(D-LCC10 Rev. 00-02)

1. The backlight unit as well as the LCD Display component

can be detached by removing the screws (4) at their corners.

2. The Command board PCB can be detached by

disconnecting the cable connectors and removing the
screws (2).

3. The Power supply board is attached to the rear panel by

four (4) screws.

Reassembly of the LCD Display is made in reversed order. Make

sure that all connectors are connected properly and cables are
not pinched between covers.

NOTE: The backlight unit in D-LCC10, revision 03, cannot be

changed and the whole LCD display component must be sent
back to the factory for repair.

Part II-Displavs and Command Board-27

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

3.3 Display Controller Boards

The Display controller boards can only be replaced. Please refer
to the Installation manual of your monitor for instructions how
to remove and replace the boards.
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board”
Service Manual

3.4 Command Boards

3.4.1 Preventive Maintenance Check List

We recommend that you perform these checks after any service
and at least once every six months.

1. Visual inspection

All connectors are properly connected.

2. Functional checks

—: Check the operations of all the keys and ComWheel.

Check the alarm operation by changing alarm sound

volume.

Check alarm LEDs

Part II-Displays and Command Board-29

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
' Service Manual

3.4.2 Disassembly and Reassembly

The Command Board included in the display set is disassembled
according to the following procedure. Please refer to the
exploded view of the Command Board (chapter 6, spare parts).

Command Board, K-VNCI5

1. Disconnect the display power cable, the display data cable
and the Command Board cable from the Central Unit.

Pull out the display power cable and the display data cable
through the hole in the rear panel of the display screen tray.
Leave the Command Board cable inside the tray.

Turn the display set upside down and unscrew the cross
head screw holding the display screen tray to the display.
Lift off the tray.

Turn the display screen tray upside down and unscrew the
two screws holding the Command Board to the tray.

Turn the display screen tray right side up and pull off the
Command Board.

Disconnect the Command Board cable, the wire set from

the ON /STBY switch, the wire set from the ComWheel and
the flat cable from the membrane keyboard.

Detach the Command Board PCB by pressing the two

plastic fasteners holding the PCB in place and
simultaneously lifting off the PCB.

The Command Board is reassembled by reversing the

disassembly procedure.
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

Command Board, K-VHCI4

1. Disconnect the display power cable, the display data cable
and the Command Board cable from the Central Unit.

2. Turn the display set upside down and unscrew the cross
head screw holding the display screen tray to the display.
Lift off the tray.

3. Pull out the display power cable and the display data cable
through the slot in the rear panel of the display screen tray.

4. Unscrew the two screws holding the Command Board to

the display screen tray. Remove the tray.

5. Unscrew the two screws holding the front cover of the

Command Board to the rear cover. Carefully remove the
rear cover.

6. Disconnect the Command Board cable, the wire set from

the ON/STBY switch, the wire set from the ComWheel and
the flat cable from the membrane keyboard.

7. Detach the Command Board PCB by pressing the two

plastic fasteners holding the PCB in place and
simultaneously lifting off the PCB.

The Command Board is reassembled by reversing the

disassembly procedure.

Part II-Displavs and Command Board-31

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

4 TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 LCD Display

PROBLEM CAUSE TREATMENT
No image on screen and No power or loose Check LCD - ON/STBY switch
no backlight interface cable. position and interface cable
No image on screen, Cables may be loose. Check the items. Replace the
backlight on Display controller board | board(s) if necessary
or LCD Interface board
failure
Vertical stripes on right Jumpers in Display Check the jumpers. See
side of screen controller board not Installation Manual for
continuously positioned correctly reference.
Only small portion of CRT | LCD Display defined as | Use menu (Monitor setup-
screen is displayed on High Resolution Display | Install/Service-Screen 2 setup)
LCD display in zoomed- | with the B-DVGA. to change into VGA. In S-
up form STD95/S-ARK95 and S-
STD96/S-ARK96 automatic
resolution selection.
Unstable image +5 V unstable. Loose Check cable connections.
cable. Jumpers in Check the jumpers. Check the
Display controller board board(s) and replace if
not positioned correctly necessary
or board failure. LCD
Interface board failure
Backlight flickering or Backlight connector Check the connector. Check
dim failure or lamp/LCD the lamp/ LCD Interface
Interface board failure board failure. If faulty lamp,
replace the whole LCD unit.
See chapter 3.1.
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

4.2 Display Controller Boards

PROBLEM CAUSE TREATMENT
No image on the screen No power Check power on
Cable or display board | Check cable and board
loose connections
Board or display faulty | Try with another board and/or
display
Regular stripes on the Faulty Display Replace the board.
picture controller board
B-DHIGH and B-DISP
with D-VNC15 only:
Part of the screen has Triac board failure Replace triac board, see part II
wrong colours Central Unit, power supply.
Picture disfigured. Outer magnetic field Turn the monitor off, wait 10
minutes and turn the monitor
on again in order to
demagnetize the screen.
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

4.3 Command Boards

See Keyboard Service Menu in chapter 5, and perform tests
available. If any of the tests fail, see explanation below.

PROBLEM CAUSE TREATMENT

ON/STBY switch not Keyboard cable loose or | Check the items. Replace them
working broken. D-26 connector | if necessary
pin failure. Switch leads
broken. Switch
connector loose. Switch
faulty
ComWheel not working | ComWheel leads Check the items. Replace the
broken or connector ComWheel if necessary
loose. ComWheel
faulty.
Membrane key not Switch cable loose or Check the items. Replace them
working broken. Keyboard cable if necessary.
loose or broken. D-26
connector pin failure.
RS232 communication
failure on CPU board
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

5 SERVICE VIEW

Monitor Setup
Monitor Setup Install /Service
Waveform Fields Units
Digit Fields 100 Service View | 26 100
Select Mode Save Modes

5 © i a A
Set Time and Date Interfacing
Install/Service | 16 Analog Outputs
Normal Screen Monitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu

a
Give password. Give password.

To enter Service Menu:

1. Press the MONITOR SETUP key. The Setup menu appears.

2. Turn ComWheel to highlight Install/Service and push.

3. Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 16 - 4 - 34.
The Install /Service menu appears.

4. Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and push.

5. Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 26 - 23 - 8.

6. Turn the ComWheel to highlight Modules and push.

7. Turn the ComWheel to highlight the right module and

push.

Part II-Displavs and Command Board-35

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

5.1 LCD Display

There is no separate service menu for the LCD Display.

5.2 Display Controller Boards

There is no separate service menu for Display controller boards.
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

5.3 Command Boards

Keyboard Service Data

Message count 0
Upper Led Leds upper OFF lower OFF
Lower Led Direct action keys
Dummy Press Silence Freeze Hark Alarms
Alarms Event Setup
Previous Menu .
Recorder ECG NIBP Invasive
Pressures
"Normal
Screen
Help Reset Display Monitor
Case Trends Setup
Patient Pulse Airway Others
Data Oximetry Gas

Control wheel
Press ©
Clockwise O Counterclockwise 0

Menu items:

1. Silence Alarm upper LED (red) check

2. Silence Alarm lower LED (yellow) check

3. ComWheel pressing check

4. Return to previous menu

Service Data
Message count counts whenever a function is selected.

Leds upper and Leds lower indicate Silence Alarms leds’ state.

Direct action keys: the key item changes its colour when the key
is pressed. If not the key may be damaged. .

Control wheel: Pressing and turning the ComWheel Clockwise

and Counterclockwise are counted.

Ali counters are zeroed when the menu is closed.

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS
NOTE: Only changed part numbers are listed under later
revisions. To find the desired part: check first the list of the
revision that corresponds your device. If the part is not listed
there, check the previous revision, etc. until you find the right
number.

* = the part is recommended for stock

Item numbers refer to the exploded view.

6.1 Spare Parts Lists

14” Color Display, D-VHCI4

Item description Order No.

Display cover, D-VHC14 (w/o stickers) 902661

Monitor cable, D-VHC14 3902660
Display power cord, D-VHC14 (EUR/USA) 545581
Service Manual for D-VHC14 (Hitachi) 572772

* = the part is recommended for stock

15” Color Display, D-VNCI5

Rev. 00 (see figure 9)

Item Item description Order No.

1 Locking washer, D-VNC15 889164

2 Motion limiter for 889164 889165
5 Power cord guard, D-VNC15 889704
STBY switch cover, D-VNC15 889325
6 Cross cylinder head screw M3x8 61722
3 Cross cylinder head screw M6x16 61775

* = the part is recommended for stock

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

LCD Display, D-LCCIO

Rev. OI (see figure 10)

tem Item description Order No.

rel

Power supply board, D-LCC10 (Rev. 01-02) *881808

*(883022) Use 886821
WO

Command board PCB, D-LCC10 (Rev. 01-02)

2887874
Membrane keyboard, AS/3 AM/CM 879373
572770
UAN

LCD Module, AS/3 AM/CM

Backlight unit, AS/3 AM/CM *883929
Inverter for back light unit, AS/3 AM/CM "572776
Adapter board for back light unit, AS/3 AM/CM 883269
10 Rotary wheel 879872
9 ComWheel cover and spring 879191
7 ON/STBY switch *879871
8 ON/STBY switch protector 881431
1 Front panel sticker, D-LCC10 (Rev. 01) (Eng) 879479
1 Front panel sticker, D-LCC10 (Rev. 01) (Ger) 880469
1 Front panel sticker, D-LCC10 (Rev. 01) (Fre) 880161
11 Internal cable (Power to Keyboard) 881807
12 Internal cable (Power to LCD) 881721
13 Internal cable (Personal Computer) 881826
External cable 2.5 m (LCD Display to AS/3 AM) (881966)Use 885517

Rev. 02 (see figure 10)

Item Item description Order No.

1 Front panel sticker, D-LCC10 (Rev. 02-03) (Eng) 885878

Front panel sticker, D-LCC10 (Rev. 02-03) (Ger) 885879
на

1 Front panel sticker, D-LCC10 (Rev. 02-03) (Fre) 885880

External cable 2.5 m (LCD Display to AS/3 AM) 885517
External cable 6 m (LCD Display to AS/3 AM) 884976

Part II-Displavs and Command Board-39

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

Rev. 03 (see figure 11)

Item Item description Order No.

3 Command board PCB, AS/3 AM/CM *886821
Command board software *887874
16 LCD display gasket, AS/3 AM/CM 887719
17 LCD display shield, AS/3 AM/CM 572787
18 LCD display unit, complete, AS/3 AM/CM 887737
19 LCD display (contains the backlight), AS/3 AM/CM 572784
20 Adapter unit, AS/3 AM/CM 887125
21 Flat cable 71409
22 Adapter board, AS/3 AM/CM 887840
23 Insulation plate 887739
24 Connector board (LCD), AS/3 AM/CM 888220
25 Connector board (frame), D-LCC10 (Rev.03) 888222
1 Front panel sticker, D-LCC10 (Rev. 03) (Spa) 886272
1 Front panel sticker, D-LCC10 (Rev. 03) (Swe) 885946
1 Front panel sticker, D-LCC10 (Rev. 03) (Dut) 886043
1 Front panel sticker, D-LCC10 (Rev. 03) (Ita) 886751
1 Front panel sticker, D-LCC10 (Rev. 03) (Fin) 888860
26 Rear cover, D-LCC10 (Rev. 03) 889367
External cable 2.5 m (LCD Display to AS/3 AM) 888525
External cable 10 m (LCD Display to AS/3 AM) 888643

* = the part is recommended for stock

” The Command board 886821 can be used as a replacement only with Command board
software 887874.

NOTE: If you have to replace rear cover, please remove the type data sticker and send it
tous. We will send you a new rear cover with reprinted sticker on it.

Display Controller Boards

Item description Order No.
Grounding plate 885398
* = the part is recommended for stock
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

Command Board, K-VHC14 (see figure 12)

Rev. Ol

Item Item description Order No.

Command board PC board, K-VHC14 (Rev. 01) *(880310) Use 883228

al
+

ON/STBY switch *879871

©

ON/STBY switch protector 881431

ОА

Rotary wheel 879872

ComWheel cover and spring 879191
М

Plastic front cover, K-VHC14 (Rev. 01) 879087

на на на на на а
BO

Plastic rear cover, K-VHC14 (Rev. 01) 879088

Front panel sticker, K-VHC14 (Rev. 01) (Eng) 879479
Front panel sticker, K-VHC14 (Rev. 01) (Ger) 880469
Front panel sticker, K-VHC14 (Rev. 01) (Fre) 880161
Keyboard membrane, AS/3 AM/CM 879373
G

Command board cable, K-VHC14 (Rev.01) *(880358) Use 883229

Cross cylinder head screw M3x12 61736
PORNO

Cross cylinder head screw M3x8 61722

Star washer M3.2 63611
m

Display screen tray 879474

Display rear plug cover 879475
o

Rev. 02 (see figure 12)

Item Item description Order No.

15 Command board PC board, K-VHC14 (Rev. 02) *883228
6 Command board cable, K-VHC14 (Rev.02) *883229
13 Plastic front cover, K-VHC14 (Rev. 02) 883178
14 Plastic rear cover, K-VHC14 (Rev. 02) 883177
Front panel sticker, K-VHC14 (Rev. 02) (Eng) 885878
は

Front panel sticker, K-VHC14 (Rev. 02) (Ger) 885879

ビビ ロビ

Front panel sticker, K-VHC14 (Rev. 02) (Fre) 885880

Front panel sticker, K-VHC14 (Rev. 02) (Spa) 886272
Front panel sticker, K-VHC14 (Rev. 02) (Swe) 885946
ロビ

Front panel sticker, K-VHC14 (Rev. 02) (Dut) 886043

Front panel sticker, K-VHC14 (Rev. 02) (Ita) 886751
ーー

Front panel sticker, K-VHC14 (Rev. 02) (Fin) 888860

* = the part is recommended for stock

NOTE: Parts listed in Rev.1 and 2 Spare parts lists are not interchangeable

Part II-Displavs and Command Board-41

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

Command Board, K-VNCI5

Rev. 00 (see figure 13)

Item Item description Order No.

3 Command board PC board, K-VHC14, K-VNC15 #883228

13 ON/STBY switch *879871
7 ON/STBY switch protector 881431
14 Rotary wheel 879872
18 ComWheel cover 879191
5 Plastic front cover, K-VHC14 (Rev. 02), K-VNC15 883178
6 Keyboard membrane, AS/3 AM/CM 879373
15 Front panel sticker, K-VNC15 (Rev. 00) (Eng) 885878
15 Front panel sticker, K-VNC15 (Rev. 00) (Ger) 885879
15 Front panel sticker, K-VNC15 (Rev. 00) (Fre) 885880
15 Front panel sticker, K-VNC15 (Rev. 00) (Spa) 886272
15 Front panel sticker, K-VNC15 (Rev. 00) (Swe) 885946
15 Front panel sticker, K-VNC15 (Rev. 00) (Dut) 886043
15 Front panel sticker, K-VNC15 (Rev. 00) (Ita) 886751
15 Front panel sticker, K-VNC15 (Rev. 00) (Fin) 888860
2 Command board cable, K-VNC15 *889206
1 Display screen tray, K-VNC15 889162
Pad 65142
10 Cable clamp 64076
11 Cross cylinder head screw M3x8 61722
4 Bushing 640444

* = the part is recommended for stock

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

6.2 Exploded Views

|
TT NENE

Figure 9 Exploded View of Video Display, D-VNC15

Part II-Displays and Command

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

Figure 10 Exploded View of LCD Display (Revisions 01 and

02)
 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

Figure 11 Exploded View of LCD Display (Revision 03)

Part II-Displavs and Command Board-45

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

Figure 12 Exploded View of Command Board, K-VHC14

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

Figure 13 Exploded View of Command Board, K-VNC15

Part II-Displavs and Command Board-47

 Datex AS/3 Displays and Command Board
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
For more service information on the earlier revisions, please
refer to:

Command Board revision 01 Service Manual p/n 880850

Command Board revision 02 Service Manual p/n 885930
LCD-Display revision 01 Service Manual p/n 882580
LCD-Display revision 02 Service Manual p/n 885930

This manual supports ail later revisions.

ESTPR Module, M-ESTPR (Rev. 01)
ETPR Module, M-ETPR (Rev. 01)
ESTR Module, M-ESTR (Rev. 01)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 885933-4

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION I
I SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 General Specifications
12 Typical Performance in
1.3 Technical Specifications
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 7
2.1 Measurement Principles 7
2.2 Main Components sens 12
IAN AAA eeneeeeneraenn 13
2.2.2 ECG Board μμ μμ μμ μ.μ ὐμ-- 21
2.2.3 Module Bus Connector Configuration . . . . . ieri 25
2.2.4 Front Panel Connectors inner 26
SERVICE PROCEDURES
3.1 General Service Information
3.2 PreventiveMaintenance.............................. sise
3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly ....
34 Adjustments and Calibrations iii
TROUBLESHOOTING 34
4.1 Troubleshooting Charts... seen 34
SERVICE MENU 41
5А ЕСС бегусе Мепи........... лилии или erener reereneaneseneessenennsnz 42
5.2 STP Service Menti................ seine 44
5.2.1 Calibration Menu... tee tee né 47
SPARE PARTS
6.1 Spare Parts List
6.2 Exploded View
EARLIER REVISIONS 54
Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
Datex AS/3 Modules M-ESTPR, M-ESTR, and M-ETPR are
double width modules that provide general haemodynamic
parameters followingly:

M-ESTPR:
ECG with ST-segment analysis, pulse oximetry, two
temperatures, two invasive blood pressures and respiration
measurement.
M-ESTR:
ECG with ST-segment analysis, pulse oximetry, two
temperatures and respiration measurement.

M-ETPR:
ECG with ST-segment analysis, two temperatures, two
invasive blood pressure measurements and respiration
measurement.

Use this manual with the module revisions M-ESTPR 01, M-

ETPR 01, and M-ESTR 01. Information on revisions M-ESTP
04 and 03, M-ETP 03 and 02, and M-EST 03 and 02 is also
available, but for older module revisions see other manuals
indicated in chapter 7.

Part II-ESTPR-1
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

I SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 General Specifications

Module size: 75 x 180 x 112 mm
WxDxH 3.0x7.1x44in

Module weight: 0.6 kg / 1.3 Ibs

Power consumption: 6W
Operation temperature 10..40 °C / 50..104 F °

1.2 Typical Performance

ECG

Lead selection LIL I, aVR, aVL, aVF, V

Sweep speeds 12.5, 25, 50 mm/sec

DISPLAY FILTER
Monitoring 0.5 to 30 Hz (-3 dB, with 50 Hz reject
filter)
0.5 to 40 Hz (-3 dB, with 60 Hz reject
filter)
Diagnostic 0.05 to 100 Hz
ST filter 0.05 to 30 Hz (with 50 Hz reject filter)
0.05 to 40 Hz (with 60 Hz reject filter)

HEART RATE
Range 30 to 250 /min
Accuracy +5 bpm or +5 %; whichever is
greater
Resolution 1 bpm
Update interval 5s
Averaging time 10s

ST LEVELS (in main software)

ST level range -6 to +6 mm (-0.6 to +0.6 mV)
Resolution 0.1 mm (0.01 mV)
Averaging calculated from 16 ORS

Part II-ESTPR-2
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

In learning mode:
- update interval beat to beat
- no averaging

SYNCHRONIZATION
Direct ECG analog output of ECG ,1 V/1 mV
Pacer 5 V pulse 1 ms < 20 ms after pacer peak
Defibrillator 5 V pulse 10 ms < 35 ms after R-point
synchronization

Invasive Blood Pressure

MEASUREMENT
RANGE: -40 to 320 mmHg
Zero adjustment range +150 mmHg
Calibration range +20 %
Scales Upper limit is adjustable between 10
and 300 mmHg in steps of 10. Lower
limit is 10 % of selected upper limit
below zero.
Sweep speed 12.5, 25,50 mm/s

DIGITAL DISPLAY:
Range -40 to 320 mmHg
Resolution +1 mmHg

WAVEFORM DISPLAY:
Range -30 to 300 mmHg

HEART RATE FROM ARTERIAL PRESSURE:

Measurement range 30 to 250 bpm
Resolution 1 bpm
Accuracy +5 bpm or +5 % whichever is
greater

Temperature

Measurement range 10 to 45 °C (50 to 113 °F)

(In rev. ESTP 03/ EST 02/ETP 02 or earlier 15 to 45 °C (59 to
113 °F))
Display resolution 0.1 °C (0.1 °F)
Temperature test Automatic (every 10 min.)

YSI 400 probe compatible

Part II-ESTPR-3
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Pulse Oximetry

SpOz:
Measurement range 40 to 100 %
Accuracy 100 to 80 %: +2 digits
(%SpO2 +1 SD) *) 80 to 50 %: +3 digits
50 to 0 %: unspecified
Resolution 1 digit = 1%
Display averaging 20, 10 sec, beat-to-beat
Pulse beep pitch Varies with SpO2 level

The monitor is calibrated over the measurement range

against functional saturation SpOz(func)

HEART RATE FROM PLETH:

Measurement range 30 to 250 bpm
Accuracy 30 to 100, +5 bpm,
100 to 250, +5 %
Resolution 1bpm
Display averaging 10s
Adjustable pulse beep volume

PLETH WAVEFORM:
Scales 2,5, 10, 20, 50 mod%, Auto

Start up scale is 20 mod% if AUTO is not selected to be the

default setting.

*) 1 SD (standard deviation) = 68 % of all readings in the

specified range in stable conditions.

Respiration

Measurement range 4...120 bpm

Accuracy +5 bpm ог +5 %
Resolution 1 bpm
Aveaging time 30s
Update interval 10s

RESPIRATION WAVEFORM
Sweep Speeds 6.25 mm/s and 0.625 mm/s
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

1.3 Technical Specifications

ECG

Defibrillation protection5000 V, 400 J

Recovery time 28
Input impedance g.t. 2.5 Mohms/10Hz
System noise <10 uV (p-p, RTD
Allowable offset +300 mVDC
Gain range 0.2 to 5.0 mV/cm
Pacemaker pulse 2 to 500 mV, 0.5 to 2 ms pulses
detection

Protection against Type CF defibrillator proof

electrical shock

Invasive Biood Pressure

DIGITAL DISPLAY AVERAGING

Digital displays Art and P1 are averaged over 5 seconds and
updated at 5 seconds intervals. All other pressures have
respiration artifact rejection.

Error +5 % or +2 mmHg
Transducer and
input sensitivity 5 uV/V/mmHg, 5 VDC
20 mA max current
Input resistance 101º ohms
Zero drift <0.1 mmHg/°C
Nonlinearity <1 %, 0 to 200 mmHg
<2 %, -40 to 0 and 200 to 320 mmHg
Gain drift <0.05 %f.s./°C
Filter O to 4 - 22 Hz adjustable
Zero set accuracy +1 mmHg
Calibration resolution +1 mmHg
Zero time less than 5 sec

Protection against Type CF defibrillation proof

electrical shock

NOTE: The accuracy of the measurement may be different

from the specified, depending on transducer /probe used.
Please check the transducer/probe specification.

Part II-ESTPR-5
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Temperature

Measurement accuracy 40.1 °C (25.0 to 45.0 °C)

+0.2 ºC (10.0 to 24.9 °C)
Amplifier accuracy +0.1 °C (25.0 to 45.0 °C)
+0.2 °C (10.0 to 24.9 °C)
Sensor accuracy +0.1 ºC (15 to 45 °C)
+0.2 °C (10 to 15 °C)
Protection against
electrical shock Type CF

NOTE: The accuracy of the measurement may be different

from the specified, depending on transducer/probe used.
Please check the transducer/probe specification.

Pulse Oximetry

Protection against
electrical shock Type BF
Respiration

Excitation frequency 31kHz

Breath detection automatic, range 0.3..6 ohm
manually adjustable minimum
detection: 0.2, 0.4, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0
Input dynamic range 0.2.60
Input impedance range 100..5000 ©

Waveform frequency 0.1..2 Hz (default), adjustable

according to HR

Respiration Rate min. 4 bpm

max. 120 bpm

Lead off detection >3MQ

 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Measurement Principle

ECG
Electrocardiography analyzes the electrical activity of the
heart by measuring the electrical potential produced with
electrodes placed on the surface of the body.

ECG reflects:
Electrical activity of the heart
Normal/abnormal function of the heart
Effects of anaesthesia on heart function
Effects of surgery on heart function

See the Operator's Manual for electrodes positions and other

information.

SpO>
A pulse oximeter measures the light absorption of blood at
two wavelengths, one in the near infrared (about 900 nm)
and the other in the red region (about 660 nm) of light
spectrum. These wavelengths are emitted by LEDs in the
SpOz probe, the light is transmitted through peripheral
tissue and is finally detected by a PIN-diode opposite to
LEDs in the probe. Pulse oximeter derives the oxygen
saturation (SpOz) using empirically determined relationship
between the relative absorption at the two wavelengths and
the arterial oxygen saturation SaO2.

In order to measure the arterial saturation accurately, pulse

oximeters use the component of light absorption giving
variations synchronous with heart beat as primary
information on the arterial saturation.

A general limitation of the above pulse oximetry principle is

that due to only two wavelengths used only two hemoglobin
species can be discriminated by the measurement.

Part H-ESTPR-7
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

The modern Pulse Oximeters are empirically calibrated

either against fractional saturation SaOzfrac,

SaOzfrac = HbO2/(HbO2+Hb+Dyshemoglobin),

or against functional saturation SaOzfunc,

SaOzfunc = HbO2/(HbO2+Hb),

which is more insensitive to changes of carboxyhemoglobin

and methemoglobin concentrations in blood.

The oxygen saturation percentage SpO2 measured by Datex

AS/3 module is calibrated against the functional saturation
SaOzfunc. The advantage of this method is that the accuracy
of SpO2 measurement relative to SaOzfunc can be maintained
even at rather high concentrations of carboxyhemoglobin in
blood. Independent of the calibration method, pulse
oximeter is not able to correctly measure oxygen content of
the arterial blood at elevated carboxyhemoglobin or
methemoglobin levels.

Plethysmographic pulse wave

The plethysmographic waveform is derived from the IR

signal and reflects the blood pulsation at the measuring site.
Thus the amplitude of the waveform represents the
perfusion.

Pulse rate

The pulse rate calculation is done by peak detection of the

plethysmographic pulse wave. The signals are filtered to
reduce noise and checked to separate artifacts.

Probe

The standard probe is a finger clamp probe which contains

the light source LEDs in one half and the photodiode
detector in the other half. Different kinds of probes are
available from Datex.
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Intensity of |
transmitted 1 e
tight max (DC-component) — max

NL, min
AC-component

Transmitted |
fight t Variable absorption
due to pulse added
volume of arterial
blood
Arterial blood

Venous blood

Tissue

Time

Incident light | | | | | | | | | | |

PROBE CABLE __PROBE CONNECTOR ___

i ` 6
4 + CNO |
Wa ! | \ 1 \ TryСНЕС
en |
(RED | i
+
EMITTER 1
| 1 1
< | | 5 |
DIRE | 1 GND |
1 1
1 | 1
ん
| || 8
NB
|
|
| | R cl
I I 1
DETECTOR | / / 1 js |
k i
| — enn |

Figure 1 Absorption of Infrared Light in the Finger

and Finger Probe Parts Layout and
Schematic diagram.

Part II-ESTPR-9
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Invasive Blood Pressure

To measure invasive blood pressure, a catheter is inserted
into an artery or vein. The invasive pressure setup,
consisting of connecting tubing, pressure transducer, an
intravenous bag of normal saline all connected together by
stopcocks, is attached to the catheter. The transducer is
placed level with the heart, and electrically zeroed.

The transducer is a piezo-resistive device that converts.the

pressure signal to a voltage. The monitor interprets the
voltage signal so that pressure data and pressure waveforms
can be displayed.

Temperature
The temperature is measured by a probe whose resistance
varies when the temperature changes, called Negative
Temperature Coefficient (NTC) resistor.

The resistance can be measured by two complementary

methods:

1 Applying a constant voltage across the resistor and

measuring the current that flows through it.

2. Applying a constant current to flow through the

resistor and measuring the voltage that is generated
across it. ]

In AS/3 module the two methods are combined in a form of

a voltage divider. The NTC-resistor is connected in series
with a normal resistor and a constant voltage is applied
across them. The temperature dependent voltage can be
detected at the junction of the resistors, thus producing the
temperature signal from the patient. The signal is amplified
by analog amplifiers and further processed by digital
electronics.
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Respiration
Impedance respiration is measured across the thorax
between three ECG electrodes. The signal of the respiration
is made by supplying current between two electrodes and by
measuring the differential current from the third electrode.
The input current is 200 LA (31kHz). The impedance
measured is the impedance change caused by breathing.
When the patient is breathing or is ventilated, the volume of
the air in the lungs changes, resulting the impedance
between the electrodes. From these impedance changes,
respiration rate is calculated, and respiration waveform is
displayed on the screen.

Part II-ESTPR-11
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

2.2 Main Components

The ESTPR/ETPR/ESTR module contains two main PC
boards: the STP board and ECG board. They work
independently. Both of them has their own processor and
software EPROM. Some components on the boards are not
used in ETPR and ESTR modules.

In ESTPR module, additionally, there are two small boards,

the SP input and ECG input boards, attached to the front
panel. The front panel has six connectors and four keys. The
connectors are two for temperature measurement, two for
invasive blood pressure measurement, one for ECG, and one
for SpO2 measurement. The keys are for ECG lead, Start
Wedge, P1 zero, and P2 zero.

In ETPR module, there are two small boards: the ECG input
board and 2P input board attached to the front panel. The
front panel has five connectors and four keys. The connectors
are two for temperature measurement, two for invasive
blood pressure measurement, and one for SpOz
measurement. The keys are for ECG lead, Start Wedge, P1
zero, and P2 zero.

In ESTR module, there are two small boards: the SP input

board and ECG input board, attached to the front panel. The
front panel has four connectors and two keys. The
connectors are two for temperature measurement, one for
ECG, and one for SpO2 measurement. The keys are for ECG
lead and Start Wedge.

NOTE: Revisions M-ESTP rev. 03, M-ETP rev. 02 and M-EST

rev. 02 and all earlier revisions had separaté T and SP input
boards.
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

2.2.1 STP Board

Module bus connector

Power for
[Modute data — {Module reset |Powertor ee
À Communication
RS485 Driver R$485 Driver Power
tor data formodule — Power non-
rese reset isolati
isolation
section
| I
Opto Isolation
isolation Patient isolation transformer |]
a

Reset| | processor
W unit P
= Module | RAMintemal 2K isolation
oF bus extemal 16K section
сЕ
oo
data EPROM 48K
之 三 RS communication
Intensities |

Serial device communication

ㄴㄴ 66006 | AD-converter
2 È -8 chn
s 3 3 -12bit 、

=| | eel (Be
= De o G -

u Press AD Temp AD
~
o
a

[ 1 =

INV TEMP 3
PRESS measuring 2 o
P measuring unit os
amplifier unit i 32

— |
Patient connectors

Figure2 STP Board Block Diagram

Part II-ESTPR-13
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Processor section
As processor, Intel's 80C196KC-16 is used. There are external
memories, an 8-bit data bus, a 16 MHz oscillator, an open
collector reset, and a watchdog timer. Three A/D-converters
within the processor are used. The processor's internal
UART communicates with the CPU board.

High speed 1/0 is used to obtain pulse control sequence

necessary for pulse oximetry measurement. It gets its timing
clock from the oscillator.

Temperature measurement section

Value of NTC-resistor in the probe depends on patient's
temperature. It is measured with the following principle.

The temperature signal(s) is produced by voltage dividers,

part of which is the patient probe (YSI 400-series thermistor).
The output is amplified by the calibrated amplifier(s) whose
offset voltage makes its output spread on both sides of zero.
Wider output range (measurement range) means better
resolution.

+5Vreference
0°C => 7K357
15 °C => 3K541 LL
25 °C => 2K253
38 °C => 1K301 |
45 °C => 984R
| | |
U

| A1 +>
to AD
NTC | | converter

offset

Figure3 Temperature Measurement Block Diagram

 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Invasive blood pressure measurement section

Isolated +5 V voltage is supplied to the pressure transducer.
From the bridge connection a differential voltage, which
depends on pressure and supplied voltage, is calculated (see
the formula below).

Uout = Uin x Pressure x 5 V

where Uin=5V

Uout = 25 V x Pressure [mmHg]

Pressure amplification is realized in the instrumentation

amplifier. Gain of the amplifier is set so that the level of the
signal transferred to A/D converter stays within the
measurement range even when there are circumstantial
offsets or offsets caused by the transducer. There is a filter
before the amplifier to attenuate high freguency
disturbances.

There is also FET switch, which, by cutting the measurement

current, detects the existence of the transducer. The existence
of the transducer cable is also checked binary by the jumper
beside the connector.

Pressure
Vin transducer
Instrumentation
amplifier

Input
Filter G >
to AD converter

Figure 4 = Pressure Transducer Working Principle

Part II-ESTPR-15
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Pulse oximetry measurement section

LED control signals

The processor sends pulse width modulated signals, IRED

intensity and RED intensity, which are converted to DC
voltage and filtered. By switches either RED or IRED
intensity is sent forward to amplifier in LED driving circuit.
LED driving circuit

Voltage difference which corresponds to LED current, is

measured by the differential amplifier circuit and its output
is sent back to the processor in 0 to 5 V level. There are
feedback circuits from LED current measurement and LED
intensity control.

Background light is measured by picking up a sample from

the signal. The sample is modified to 0 to 5 V level and sent
to the processor.
Measured signal preamplification

Voltage of -4 V is gained by voltage divider from -12 V and is

fed to non-inverted input of current-to-voltage converter
amplifier. Thus inverse bias voltage is generated for probe
detection. There is a switch, which if closed, a multiple (x30)
amplification is resulted (necessary in thin tissue
measurement such as earlobe).

Digitally controlled amplifier

D/A converter is a digitally controlled amplifier after which

there is another constant amplifier.
Red and Infrared channels' separation

Red and infrared channels are separated from each other by

switches. Operational amplifier functions as a buffer and
after this infrared DC signal is sent to the processor. A
capacitor separates AC signal from it and the AC signal is
sent to the processor after amplification. There is a switch to
choose the amplification constant.
 Service Manual
Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR

ΙΘΛ6Ι 9 pod

Pulse Oximetry Measurement Block Diagram

jeubis ov pe
зэнелиоэ
JeMIdue OV Joyenue}}e
pajoujuoo Ayeysiq
эбенмол - 0} - Juana
Je 由 dueaeid
dais omy 18104
jeubls oy pe
920 L-960ÿ/1= 9
Jena 00 出

Part II-ESTPR-17
eqoid
<= (nd9 이) 4 이 6904 146408 037 10 10767
Jinosjo yoRqpes}
put juaweinseeu

Figure 5
juswysnipe 1uejun9 3710 19487
1ISU91UI 1377 POH
jueusn{pe уполо Вылир (3
HISU91Ul 937 рец! ywoge-s=|
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Serial communication
Serial communication between the module and the frame is
done by RS485 type bus whose buffers get their supply
voltage (+5 VDC) from the Frame and in the isolation section
get the supply voltage (+5 V) from the isolated power
supply.

The buffers of the serial communication are controlled also

by Reset-signal so that when the Reset is active, the buffer
does not transfer data.

Reset is also RS485 type and additionally, there is an

auxiliary logic power reset, which keeps the reset active for
about 500 ms despite the state of reset in the module bus.
Time constant determines the power-up reset time. There are
components to prevent the module from sending data
during reset.

Data transmission rate is 500 kbit/s.

5 Receive data <? >

8 Send data, RS485 =
© . ・ ' TR Driver ет
の steve data : < > ss
o Send data 」 ' < NData で 2
a senderen, Opto isolation: Send/receive = 2
5 < Rese , < の で
> Resetin © ©
8 Rs485 TTT о Е
Е = 5 Reset | Driver LNResetmn =
o Så
© Es

Figure6 Serial Communication and Opto Isolation

 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Isolated section
There are two opto isolators. Signal is processed on logical
high-low level even though the outputs of the opto isolators
are analog signals in the isolated section.

Reset line is an open collector type with a pull-up resistor.

Thus the processor is able to use its internal watch-dog
function.

Power supply section

Isolated supply voltage of the module is developed from +15
Vdirty voltage from the Central Unit. Power supply is a
switched-mode circuit, where FET transistor switch is
controlled by an oscillator using bipolar timer. The
frequency of the oscillator is about 30 kHz and pulse ratio 50
%. Controlling of the FET switch is slowed to suppress
spurious interference.

A special pulse transformer is used in the circuit. In the

secondary circuit normal linear regulators are used except
for +5 V (low drop type linear regulator).

Input:
+15 Vdirty = +15 V +0.5 V; 0.3 А

Isolated outputs:
+5 Vref = +5 V +0.1 V; 100 mA max
+5 V = +5 V 40.2 V; 100 mA max
+12 V = +12 V +0.3 V; 70 mA max
-12 V=-12 V +0.3 V; 70 mA max
-5 V=-5V +0.2 V; 20 mA max (STP board only)

Total power:
About 3.5 W
All the voltages are regulated. Isolation
primary /secondary 5 kV.

Part II-ESTPR-19
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Test points:

There are test pin blocks identical both in STP and ECG
boards. Pins and voltages are as follows:

Voltages

X11 pinl +5 Vref

pin2 +5V
pin 3 +12 V
pin 4 Gnd
pin5 -12V
X12 pini -5 V (STP board only)
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

2.2.2 ECG Board

Patient signals are connected to overload protection circuits (resistors and
gas-filled surge arresters) and analog switches to instrumentation
amplifiers. Then the signals are amplified by 480 and limited by slew rate.
Then they are A/D-converted, analyzed and transferred to module bus in
digital form.

OVERLOAD PROTECTION
R L F C N

ANALOG SWITCHES LEAD SELECTION LOGIC

Controlled by ECG lead
(rrr |

YYい
selection signals from uP

SLEW- ISLEW- SLEW- SLEW- 31 kHz from uP

RATE RATE RATE RATE

|
[ DETECTOR Г DETECTOR |ㅣ DETECTOR Г [DETECTOR]
P up uP
HP
TE
HP
| [Filter Г Filter | wwr
uP uP, up 1 uP,

ーー
Sync. Rectifier]
ANTI- ANTI ANTE ANTI-
ALIAS ALIAS ALIAS ALIAS
Τ
Amplifier

AID
MICRO-
PROCESSOR

SUPPLY (oP)
MM
(7777 |
POWER ¡OPTO- DIRECT
SOURCE COUPLER| ECG
ISOLATION “pp PELO 22
POWER DPTO- DIRECT
SOURCE COUPLER ECG

MODULE BUS

Figure 7 ECG Measurement Block Diagram

Part II-ESTPR-21
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Analog ECG section

ECG cable is connected to connector pins E1 to E6 on the
input board which contains an overload protection circuit.

Leads are connected to amplifiers via analog switches. State

of the switches depend on the cable type.

Lead-off, noise and pacemaker are detected by a slew rate

detector.

Cut-off freguency is determined in high pass (HP) filter 0.5

Hz (monitor bandwidth) or 0.05 Hz (diagnostic or ST-
bandwidth).

ECG Filtering
The AS/3 monitors have three ECG filtering modes:

MONITORING | 0.5 - 30 Hz (-3 dB with 50 Hz reject filter)

0.5 - 40 Hz (-3 dB with 60 Hz reject filter)

DIAGNOSTIC 0.05 - 100 Hz

ST FILTER 0.05 - 30 Hz (with 50 Hz reject filter)

0.05 - 40 Hz (with 60 Hz reject filter)

The purpose of filtering is to reduce high frequency noise

and low frequency (e.g. respiratory) movement artifacts.

Monitor filter is used in normal monitoring. Diagnostic filter

is used if more accurate diagnostic information is needed. ST
filter gives more accurate information of ST segment, but
reduces high frequency noise.

The high-pass filters 0.5 Hz and 0.05 Hz are done with

hardware. The monitor sends a command to the ESTP(R)
module determining which of the corner frequencies 0.5 Hz
or 0.05 Hz is to be used.

The 50 Hz and 60 Hz reject filters are both low-pass (notch

type) filters with zero at 50 Hz or 60 Hz correspondingly and
they are done with software. They are for the mains supply
filtering. When notch filters are used, 3 dB value for low-pass
filter is 30 Hz or 40 Hz.
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

In diagnostic mode software (notch) filters are not used.

Then the upper frequency is limited by hardware and the 3
dB frequency is 100 Hz.

Respiration section
The analog switches control the current supply source of the
impedance respiration measurement, and the lead selection
for the 3-lead cable can be seen from the following table:

Selected lead | Current source between | Signal measured from

I R-L N
II R-N L
I L-N R

When the 5-lead cable is used, the current source is between

L-F and the signal is measured from the N, independently on
the lead selection.

The respiration amplifier consist of the operational

amplifiers, and the components around them. There is a
analog switch for controlling the gain of the first stage of the
preamplifier.

Synchronous rectifier consist of the analog switches, which

are used for detecting the respiration signal from 31 kHz
amplitude modulated raw signal.

The amplifier stage consist of the differential amplifier and

the last amplifier. The differential amplifier consist of the
operational amplifiers and the components around them.
This stage is AC-coupled on both sides for minimising the
offset voltages.

The last amplifier is used for amplifying the signal derived

from differential amplifier stage.

The respiration signal is zeroed at the beginning of the

measurement. Zeroing is also used for fast recovering the
measurement after the motion artefact. This is done in
amplifier section.

Part II-ESTPR-23
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Microprocessor section
Microprocessor contains RAM and EPROM memories. The
processor uses external EEPROM memory. The
microprocessor's internal 8-channel A/D-converter converts
the ECG-signals to digital form.

Serial communication
Communication with the module bus is made through RXD
and TXD pins. See the serial communication section in STP
board description.

Isolated section
The patient isolation of ECG is 5 kV in M-ESTPR rev. 01 and
M-ESTR/ETPR rev. 01 modules.
NOTE: The isolation has been changed from the earlier
revisions.

WARNING: Do not touch battery operated monitor during

defibrillation procedure.

See the isolated section in STP board description.

Power supply section

See the power supply section in STP board description.

There is a test connector (x20) on the board for voltages + 5

VREF, +5V, +12V, GND and -12V.
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

2.2.3 Module Bus Connector Configuration

Rear panel 25-pin female D-connector (X1)

Pin No Vo Signal
1 RESET RS485*
2 -15 VDC
3 +15 VDIRTY*
4 +15 VDC
5 I/O | -DATA_RS485*
6 I/O | DATA_RS485*
7 Ground & Shield*
8 I -RESET_RS485*
9 I CTSB
10 ο RTSB
11 I RXDB
12 ο TXDB
13 Ground & Shield*
14 I +32 VDIRTY
15 I GroundDIRTY*
16 I CTSC
17 O RISC
18 I RXDC
19 о TXDC
20 ON/STANDBY
21 o PWM, ECG
22 RXDD RS232
23 TXDD_RS232
24 I +5 VDC*
25 I +5 VDC*
* Used in the ESTPR, ESTR, and ETPR modules

Part H-ESTPR-25
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

2.2.4 Front Panel Connectors

The pin assignment on the ECG connectors

Signal

oZ
5
Right arm electrode (R)
HR
D
Left arm electrode (L)
Right leg electrode (RL)
©

Left leg electrode (F)

A

Chest electrode (C)

G

Cable shield
G

Not connected
3/5 lead identification
の

Lead connection check

つのどの

Ground

The pin assignment on the SpO2 Connector:

Signal
ova
y
3

Feedback resistor
F

Ground
ひい G BON

Not Connected
DO, Cable shield + probe identification ground
Doo?
つぐ

Probe identification
996
LED drive ground
LED drive current
Input signal current
Ground
Ground

The pin assignment on the Invasive pressure connector:

Pin No Signal
Pressure +
» -

Pressure -
Polarisation - (ground)
& ϱ

Polarisation +
のつぐ

Not connected
ひい G

Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Ground
Cable detection
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES

3.1 General Service Information

Usually field service is limited to replacing the faulty circuit
boards or mechanical parts. The boards are then returned to
Datex for repair.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide

the unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed
fault description.
CAUTION: Only trained personnel with appropriate
equipment shall perform the tests and repairs outlined in
this section. Unauthorized service may void warranty of the
unit.

3.2 Preventive Maintenance

Perform these checks after any service and at least once a
year to keep the ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR Module in good
condition.

1. Visual inspection

__: Ifthe module is disassembled, check that grounding

wires and all connectors are properly connected and
there is no loose object inside before attaching the
module box.

2. Functional checks

Module:

Insert the module into frame.

__: Tum the monitor on. Select SpO, and Temp to be

shown in digit fields. Within 15 seconds, SpO2 and
Temp windows should appear on the display. No
error message appears.

__: Pull out the module. The SpO2 and Temp windows
go blank within 15 seconds.

Part II-ESTPR-27
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

—: Reinsert the module while the power is still on. The

SpOz and Temp measurement data appear on the
windows again.

__ Connect a finger sensor to the module. The message

Probe off should appear on the display. No waveform
appears. Attach the sensor to your finger. The reading
of 95 to 99 and an SpO2 waveform should appear.
__: Goto ESTPR:ECG and ESTPR:STP/P Service Menus
(Path: Monitor Setup, Install /Service (password 16-4-
34), Service View (password 26-23-8), Modules) and
check the functions of cables and buttons (ON/OFF
test).

ECG Cables:

Check the cables visually, and replace if any damages

appear.
To test the cable:

Check that the following resistances are 4-6

kohm:

Clip to ECG connector pin

N/RL
Ww

L/LA
RN

R/RA
F/LL
oR

C/V
Check that the resistance from a lead to other leads
and to the shield (pin no 6) is > 1 Mohm.
If any of the tests fail, replace the cable.
ECG Cables together with Module:

__: Choose a field for ECG waveform (ECG1) in Monitor

setup menu. The text ‘Leads off’ appears. Connect
simulator to the module. The heart rate reading
appears and the heart symbol starts to blink within 15
seconds. No error messages appear. Press the ECG
LEAD key and try all Lead selections.

Part U-ESTPR-28
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

To test all the leads perform following tests:

1 Connect a 3-lead cable to the module.

2. Connect the leads together (e.g. to a screw driver).

3. Select one lead for display.

4. Detach a lead from the screw driver, and see that the
module responds as described in the table.
Connect the lead again.

Lead selection | Lead to be What appears on

detached the screen

Lead I L/LA L/LA Off

R/RA R/RA Off

F/LL Leads off

Lead II L/LA Leads off

R/RA R/RA Off

F/LL F/LL Off

Lead II L/LA L/LA Off

R/RA Leads Off

F/LL F/LL Off

Temperature:

—: Put a temperature test plug into T1 and T2 and make

sure that the measured values do not deviate more than +
0.1°C. If they do, perform the temperature calibration.

Part II-ESTPR-29
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Impedance Respiration

NOTE: The procedure described for the resp check apply to

the MedSim 300 patient simulator only.

_: To test impedance respiration

1. Press the ECG Lead key on the module. Confirm that the
ECG lead selection is displayed, and changes with each key
press. Then set the lead selection to Lead Il.

2. Press the Monitor Setup key and select Waveform Fields

to get into the corresponding menu. Make sure that the resp
waveform is configured to be displayed.

3. Adjust the patient simulator as follows.

* Lead selection to II/RL-LL

* Resp rate to 20

* Ohms to 1.0

4. Press the Others key and select Resp Setup to get into the
corresponding menu. Set the resp rate source to impedance.

5. Press the Normal Screen key. Confirm that the resp

waveform and the resp rate are displayed after a delay of
approximately 30 seconds.

—: To test apnea detection

1. Adjust the patient simulator as follows:

* Select resp by pushing the F2 key of the patient simulator

* Select the apnea from the patient simulator menu (to get
more menu push the arrow key right)

2. Select cont from the patient simulator menu, APNEA

alarm should be displayed on the monitor screen after a
delay of approximately 30 seconds.
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly

Disassemble the ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR module in the
following way. See Figure for the exploded view of the
module.

a) Remove the two screws from the back of the module.

b) Pull the module box slowly rearwards and detach it

from the main body. Be careful with loose latch and
spring pin for locking.

Two main PC boards will appear. The ECG board is

on top of the STP board. The ECG board will be
detached by removing four screws one in each corner,
disconnecting 9-pin ribbon cable that is connected to
the STP board and 2-pin ribbon cable from the front
panel. Slide the board rearward to disconnect the
fixed 10-pin connector of ECG input board.

d) The STP board can be removed by detaching two

screws on the solder side of the board near the front
panel and disconnecting the two connectors from the
SP input board. The T-input connector cables must be
disconnected as well.

CAUTION: When reassembling the module, make sure that

the cables are reconnected properly.

Part II-ESTPR-31
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

3.4 Adjustments and Calibrations

Temperature calibration
NOTE: For the temperature calibration, separate, accurate
test plugs (25°C and 45°C) are needed. A test set of two plugs
is available from Datex, order code 884515

Calibrate temperature when measured test values deviate

more than +0.1°C from the given value, and always after STP
board replacement.

1. Go to ESTPR: STP service page (see Service Menu;

Path: Monitor Setup, Install/Service (password 16-4-
34), Service View (password 26-23-8), Modules).
Go to Calibrations page.
Press in the protect button at the bottom of the
の

module and choose OFF in Protect mode. Release the

button.
Choose Calibrate T1/Calibrate T2.
R

Insert calibration plug (25°C) into T1/T2 connector.

S

Push the ComWheel two times.

の

Insert calibration plug (45°C) into T1/T2 connector.

NR

Push the ComWheel two times.

oo

Press in the protect button at the bottom of the

©

module and choose ON in Protect mode. Release the

button.
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Pressure calibration (M-ESTPR/ETPR)

Calibrate pressure when pressure transducer (probe) is
teplaced by another type, and when STP board is replaced.

1. Go to ESTPR: the STP service page (Path: Monitor

Setup, Install/Service, Service View, Modules).
2. Go to Calibrations page.
Connect a pressure transducer with a pressure
manometer to the front panel P1/P2 receptacle.
Choose Calibrate P1 or Calibrate P2. Leave the
transducer to room air pressure.
4. Push the ComWheel. The zeroing takes place.
Supply pressure of 100 mmHg to 300 mmHg to the
transducer. Recommended pressure is 200 mmHg.
6. Set the pressure on the display with the ComWheel to
match the pressure reading on the manometer and
push the ComWheel. Tolerance of +1 mmHg is
allowed.
7. The text “calibrated' will appear on the display.

Part II-ESTPR-33
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

4 TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 Troubleshooting Charts

See also the Operator's Manual for more troubleshooting
procedures.

ECG

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

HR numerical display No heart rate available. If no ECG waveform,

shows '—' check LEADS OFF
message and connect the
leads.

If ECG waveform exists,

check heart rate source
e.g. in the ECG Setup
menu behind ECG key.
Unacceptable ECG Poor electrode or poor Electrodes from different
waveform electrode skin contact. manufacturers are used. /
Too much/little gel is
used.
Poor electrode condition. Electrodes are dried out.

Improper site of electrodes. ¡ Check that electrodes are

not placed over bones,
active muscles, layers of
fat.

Improper skin preparation. | Remove body hair.

Clean attachment site
carefully with alcohol.

Improper bandwidth filter. | Check filter.

No ECG trace Waveform not selected on Press the Monitor Setup
screen. key and make
adjustments.
Module not plugged in Plug in.
correctly.

Noise-message High frequency or 50/60 Hz] Isolate noise source.

noise.
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

InvBP

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

Abnormally low pressure} Transducer wrongly Check mid-heart level

positioned. and reposition
transducer.

No pressure Defective transducer. Check transducer.

No pressure module plugged Check the module.

in.

No waveform selected on Check selected pressure

screen. waveforms by pressing
Monitor Setup key and
selecting modify
waveforms.

Check that pressure

transducer open to
patient.

Wrong configuration setting Check the configuration

setting from the
ESTPR:STP /Calibrations
menu (Monitor Setup /
Install /Service / Service
View / Modules)

Not zeroed-message Measurement on, channel not Zero the channel.

zeroed.

Zeroing failed-message Unsuccessful zeroing of P1 Possibly due to pulsating

/P2 (number field). pressure waveform.
Open the transducer to
air and zero the channel.

Offset is > 150 mmHg.

Open the transducer to
air and zero the channel.

Defective transducer.
Replace it and zero the
channel.

Part II-ESTPR-35
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

InvBP (continued)

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

Calibration failed- Unsuccessful calibrating of Turn the transducer to

message P1/P2 (number field), © sphygmomanometer and
possibly due to pulsating try again (zeroing takes
waveform place first).

Gain is beyond the limits

(+20 % of the default
gain). Replace the
transducer.

Out of range < 40 mmHg| Measurement pressure is Check transducer level.

beyond measurement range. | Zero the channel.

Out of range > 320 Measurement pressure is Check transducer level.

mmHg beyond measurement range. | Zero the channel. The
patient may also have
high pressure.

Zero adj. > 100 mmHg Offset when zeroing is > 100 Check transducer. The
mmHg (but < 150 mmHg) waveform may hit the
from the absolute zero of the top and the numeric
module (with default gain). display not shown.

Out of range Measured pressure is beyond The waveform hits the

the internal measurement top and the numeric
range of the module. display not shown. Check
transducer and its level.
Zero the channel.

Part IL-ESTPR-36
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Temp

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

Message Faulty calibration. Perform calibration. If it

does not help, check that
"TEMPERATURE front panel connector is
ERROR' properly connected to
STP board. Check front
panel, SP-input board, or
STP board.

No temperature Wrong type of probe. Use correct probe.

displayed
Temperature out of The range is between 10
measurable range. and 45°C.

With German monitor

software, check that
Protection is set to ON in
the Service Menu.

Part II-ESTPR-37
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

5602

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

Message NO PROBE' 1. No probe connected to 1. Check probe connections.

the monitor.
2. Probe faulty. 2. Change the probe.

Message PROBE OFF 1. Unsuitable site. 1. Try another place.

2. Probe faulty. 2. Try another probe.
though probe properly 3. Probe connection cable | 3. Connect the cable to
attached to the patien not connected to probe. | probe.
Finger probe falls off 1. Probe is slippery. 1. Wipe with 70 % isopropyl
alcohol and allow to dry.
2. Finger is too thin or 2. Try other fingers, or other
thick. probe types.
Weak signal artifacts 1. Poor perfusion. Try another place.
2. Movement artifacts.
3. Shivering.
Message 'NO PULSE' Pulse search > 20 sec. and | Try other fingers.
low SpOz or low pulse
rate.

Message 'ARTIFACT' Pulse modulation exceeds Try another place or another

the present scale. probe.

Message 'CHECK DC value not in balance. | Try another probe.

PROBE'
Message POOR SIGNAL] Modulation (Red or Ired) | Patient may be cold.
< 0.25 %.
Message ‘FAULTY Probe is faulty. Change the probe.
PROBE’

No SpO, No waveform selected on | Check selected SpO,

screen. waveforms by pressing
Monitor Setup key and
selecting modify waveforms
Wrong configuration Check the configuration
setting setting from the
ESTPR:STP/ Calibrations
menu (Monitor Setup /
Install /Service / Service
View / Modules)
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Impedance Respiration

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

No resp trace Waveform not selected on Press the Monitor Setup key
the screen and make adjustments
Module not plugged in Plug in
correctly

Unacceptable resp Poor electrode or poor Electrodes from different

waveform electrode skin contact manufacturers are used. Too
much/little gel is used.

Poor electrode condition Electrodes are dried out.

Improper site of Check that electrodes are

electrodes not placed over bones,
active muscles, layers of fat.

Improper skin Remove body hair. Clean

preparation attachment site carefully
with alcohol.

Message: SMALL RESP Respiration signal is very With 3-lead cable try
CURVE small another lead connection I, II,
II or try 5-lead cable.

Message: APNEA Respiration source is CO, Check respiration source

ALARM, and respiration and change it to correct one.
waveform normal

Part II-ESTPR-39
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Possibly faulty
ESTPR module

* NO
|
Select the correct
configuration

y YES
Remove all
modules from
the frame

insert ESTPR module

and turn power on

Does fault Fault notin

still appear? ESTPR module

İ YES
Y

Enter the Replace

Service menu STP board
A

Does
another Remove
module ID module 1D
module work ECG board
on screen? YES on screen?
in same
slot?
YES

Replace
ECG ECG board
module ID
on screen? NO 7

YES
Check front panel
key functions in
Service menu
\

Do HasECG NNO / Has STP Has invBP measurement

ΝΟ
A
Has SpO2
measurement
they work? measurement >= board failed? measurement failed? failed?
failed? failed?

YES YES
\ NO У Y し у
Check front panel unit, Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace
ECG board, and STP beard | ECG board STP board STP board STPboard | STP board
to find culprit. Replace if
necessary.

ESTPR Module Troubleshooting Chart

 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

5 SERVICE MENU
Monitor Setup
Monitor Setup Install/Service
Waveform Fields Units
Digit Fields 100 Service View | 26 108
Select Mode Save Modes
Set Time and Date Interfacing
Instali/Service[ie 4nalog Outputs
Normal Screen Monitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu

G 0

Give password. Give password.

To enter Service Menu during normal operation:

1. Press the MONITOR SETUP key.

The Setup menu appears.

2. Turn ComWheel to highlight Install/Service and

push.

3. Give the password by turning the ComWheel to

display each password number and confirm the
number by pushing the ComWheel. Password
numbers are 16 - 4 - 34. The Install/Service menu
appears.

4. Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and

push.

5. Give the password by turning the ComWheel to

display each password number and confirm the
number by pushing the ComWheel. Password
numbers are 26 - 23 - 8.

6. Turn the ComWheel to highlight Modules and push.

7. Turn the ComWheel to highlight the right module

and push.

Part II-ESTPR-41
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

5.1 ECG Service Menu

ECG Module Service Data

- Filter low 0.50 Hz high 30 Hz

Filter Low Cable type 3 lead
Quick zero ON OFF GFF
Filter High Cable FF
Electrode RA Lê LL RL
Previous Menu OFF OFF OFF OFF GFF
Pacer count 2
Button OFF
Resp
Available GN
Measurement BN
Amp Zero OFF
Value U

Tineouts G RAM OK
Bad checksums G ROM OK
Bad c-s by moc O EEPROM OK

1. Set power frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz).

2. Set filter low frequency (0.05 Hz/0.5 Hz).
3. Set filter high frequency
(30 Hz (40 Hz if power freq is 60 Hz) /100 Hz).

4. Return to previous menu.

SERVICE DATA Detailed Description

Power freq, and Cable type show the values chosen or
detected, Filter low and high defines the selected filter
(Monitor/Diagnostic/ST).

Quick zero is ON when the signal in any of the three internal

amplifier goes beyond scale, and therefore, a capacitor
connected to the related channel discharges overvoltage. At
least one of Quick zero values is OFF when 3-lead cable is
used. All three values are OFF when 5-lead cable is used.
Quick zero also takes place when lead is changed in 3-lead
measurement.

Cable shows ON when an ECG cable is connected.

Electrode shows ON when each of these electrodes are

connected.
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Pacer count is a running number for pacemaker users.

The front panel ECG key function is confirmed by pressing

the key and observing OFF turns to ON at Button.

Resp Available indicates that ECG hardware is capable of

measuring impedance respiration.

Measurement shows ON when the respriration

measurement is on.

Amp zero shows ON when zeroing of the respiration

amplifier takes place.
Waveform VALUE will be updated in one second interval.

Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many

times the module has not responded to the monitor's
inquiry. Bad checksums is a cumulative number that
indicates how many times communication from the module
to monitor broke down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how
many communication errors the module has detected.
The AS/3 Monitor starts counting these items at power up
and resets to zero at power off. The nonzero values do not
indicate a failure, but the continuous counting (more than 50
per minute) indicates either serial communication failure, or
module not in place. Also other modules can cause
communication errors that cause these numbers rise.

RAM indicates the state of the external RAM memory.

ROM indicates whether the checksum at the EPROM is in
accordance with the one the software has calculated.
EEPROM indicates if the values stored in the permanent
memory are valid.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place or a
communication error).

Part II-ESTPR-43
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

5.2 STP Service Menu

ESTP Hodule Service Data
: ; pi 的 T2
Calibrations Gain 20900 20878 13725 12697
Zero -6 4 85 88
Record Data Cable OFF OFF ON BFF
Probe OFF OFF ON OFF
Previous Menu Yalue — -— 2 —
Buttons OFF OFF OFF
5602 --- Ired int. 65
eder ーー Red int. &
Cable ON sain
Probe ON
Probe oft
Temp error OFF OFF as

Protect key DEF

Protect mode ON
Configuration STP
Timeouts 9 RAM UK
Bad checksums 1 ROH Ok
Bad c-s by mod O. EEPROM OK

1. Enter calibration menu

2. Record Data prints out the service data and board

information (id, serial number and sw id)

2. Return to previous menu

SERVICE DATA Detailed Description

Gain is a coefficient to compensate gain error. Usually the .
values for P1 and P2 are between 17000 and 25000 and for T1 Ee
and T2 between 13000 and 14300. Zero indicates offset
compensation value of each parameter in A/D converter.
Typically the values for P1 and P2 are within +1000 and for
T1 and T2 between -150 and +300. Calibrate if zero and/or
gain value is outside the ranges.

Cable shows ON when a corresponding cable is connected to

the front panel and Probe shows ON when a corresponding
probe is connected to the cable.

Under Value the measured numeric values are displayed |ー

simultaneously. Pressure values are real time values and
shown in mmHg. Temperature values are shown in
Centigrade.

Part II-ESTPR-44
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

SpO» shows measured beat-to-beat SpO?2 value. Modpr is a

modulation % that indicates DC/ AC ratio in the measured
signal. Hr is a pulse rate calculated from every beat.

Cable and Probe can be either OFF or ON, and these indicate
the state PROBE OFF.
Under them there is a message field for SpO». It can OK,
PULSE SEARCH, NO PROBE, PROBE OFF, NO PULSE,
ARTEFACT, POOR SIGNAL, or CHECK PROBE.

Balance between leds adjusted by the modules could be done

by changing the intensity of red /infrared. Intensity of
infrared (Ired int.) is in the range of 40..255 and red intensity
(red int.)is in the range of 40..255.

DC gain shows the gain of DC signal adjusted by the

module.

The front panel STP keys functions are confirmed by

pressing each key and observing OFF turns to ON at Button.

Temp error shows the status of the temperature test. No

erros found shows the status (OFF) and errors found (ON).

Protect key shows normally OFF but turns to ON when the

button at the bottom of the module is pressed.

Protect mode is normally ON. It turns to OFF when Protect

is switched to OFF for the temperature calibration in
Calibration Menu.
Configuration shows the chosen module configuration: TP,
ST, or STP.

Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many

times the module has not responded to the monitor's
inquiry. Bad checksums is a cumulative number that
indicates how many times communication from the module
to monitor broke down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how
many communication errors the module has detected.
The AS/3 Monitor starts counting these items at power up
and resets to zero at power off. The nonzero values do not
indicate a failure, but the continuous counting (more than 50

Part II-ESTPR-45
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

per second) indicates either serial communication failure, or

module not in place. Also other modules can cause
communication errors that cause these numbers rise.

RAM indicates the state of the external RAM memory.

ROM indicates whether the checksum at the EPROM is in
accordance with the one the software has calculated.
EEPROM indicates if the values stored in the permanent
memory are valid.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place or a
communication error).

Part II-ESTPR-46
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

5.2.1 Calibration Menu

Calibrations
Protection OFF
Set Config STP
Ealibrate Ti
Calibrate T2
Calibrate PL
Calibrate P2
Previous Menu

Calibrate temperatures
with calibration plugs
for 25 °C and 45 °C.

Protection can be set to ON or OFF only when protect button

at the bottom of the module is pressed. Set Config, Calibrate
T1, and Calibrate T2 selections are available only when
protect mode is off. Calibrate P1 and Calibrate P2 are
available when pressure transducer is connected to the
receptacle on the front panel.

For calibration instructions, please see Chapter 3.4

Adjustments and Calibrations.

Part H-ESTPR-47
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS

6.1 Spare Parts List

NOTE: Only changed part numbers are listed under later
revisions. To find the desired part: check first the list of the
revision that corresponds your device. If the part is not listed
there, check the previous revision, etc. until you find the
right number.

NOTE: Accessories are listed in the booklet AS/3 Supplies

and Accessories.

Item numbers refer to the exploded view in chapter 6.2.

M-ESTP Rev. OI, M-ETP Rev. 00, M-EST Rev. 00

Item Item description Order No.

STP board, M-ESTP (Rev. 01), M-P (Rev. 00-01) *880339

ECG board, M-ESTP (Rev. 01) *880338
Front panel unit, M-ESTP (Rev. 01) 880337
Front panel unit, M-ETP (Rev. 00) 880941
Front panel unit, M-EST (Rev. 00) 880946
Membrane keypad 879374
Front panel sticker, M-ESTP (Rev. 01) (Eng) 879481
Front panel sticker, M-ESTP (Rev. 01) (Fre) 880158
Front panel sticker, M-ESTP (Rev. 01) (Ger) 880552
Front panel sticker, M-ETP (Rev. 00) (Eng) 880428
Front panel sticker, M-ETP (Rev. 00) (Fre) 880429
Front panel sticker, M-ETP (Rev. 00) (Ger) 880560
Front panel sticker, M-EST (Rev. 00) (Eng) 880138
Front panel sticker, M-EST (Rev. 00) (Fre) 880140
Front panel sticker, M-EST (Rev. 00) (Ger) 880453
Module box (wide) 886168
Latch 879181
Spring pin 879182
Metal frame 879184
Cross recess screw M3x8 black 616215
Cross cylinder-head screw M3x6 61721
Cross cylinder-head screw M3x12 628700

Part I-ESTPR-48
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

M-ESTP Rev. 02, M-ETP Rev. Ol, M-EST Rev. Ol

Item Item description Order No.

6 STP board, M-ESTP (Rev. 02) *(882130) Use 882627

” 883367
ECG board, M-ESTP (Rev. 02) *(882025) Use 886748
? 883806
Front panel unit, M-ESTP (Rev. 02-03) 882127
Front panel unit, M-ETP (Rev. 01-02) 882128
Front panel unit, M-EST (Rev. 01-02) 882129
T-input board, M-ESTP (Rev. 02-03) *882090
Front panel sticker, M-ESTP (Rev. 02-03) (Eng) 881953
Front panel sticker, M-ESTP (Rev. 02-03) (Fre) 881954
Front panel sticker, M-ESTP (Rev. 02-03) (Ger) 881955
Front panel sticker, M-ETP (Rev. 01-02) (Eng) 881956
Front panel sticker, M-ETP (Rev. 01-02) (Fre) 881957
Front panel sticker, M-ETP (Rev. 01-02) (Ger) 881958
Front panel sticker, M-EST (Rev. 01-02) (Eng) 881959
Front panel sticker, M-EST (Rev. 01-02) (Fre) 881960
Front panel sticker, M-EST (Rev. 01-02) (Ger) 881961

M-ESTP Rev. 03, M-ETP Rev. 02, M-EST Rev. 02

Item Item description Order No.

STP board, M-ESTP (Rev. 03-04), M-P (Rev. 02) *882627

*883367
go

STP software
EMC plate : 884099
ECG board, M-ESTP (Rev. 03) *(883119) Use 886748
2 883806
10 Front panel sticker, M-ESTP (Rev. 03-04) (Spa) 884200
10 Front panel sticker, M-ESTP (Rev. 03-04) (Swe) 885857
10 Front panel sticker, M-ESTP (Rev. 03-04) (Dut) 886044
10 Front panel sticker, M-ESTP (Rev. 03-04) (Ita) 886753
10 Front panel sticker, M-ETP (Rev. 02-03) (Spa) 885043
10 Front panel sticker, M-ETP (Rev. 02-03) (Swe) 885856
10 Front panel sticker, M-ETP (Rev. 02-03) (Dut) 886046
10 Front panel sticker, M-ETP (Rev. 02-03) (Ita) 886754
10 Front panel sticker, M-EST (Rev. 02-03) (Spa) 885044
10 Front panel sticker, M-EST (Rev. 02-03) (Swe) 885859
10 Front panel sticker, M-EST (Rev. 02-03) (Dut) 886045
10 Front panel sticker, M-EST (Rev. 02-03) (Ita) 886755

Part II-ESTPR-49
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

M-ESTP Rev. 04, M-ETP Rev. 03, M-EST Rev. 03

Item Item description Order No.

ECG board, M-ESTP (Rev. 04) *886748

M

ECG software *883806

Front panel unit, M-ESTP (Rev. 04) 887153
>

Front panel unit, M-ETP (Rev. 03) 887154

на на ны ны

Front panel unit, M-EST (Rev. 03) 887155

5 T-input connectors, M-ESTP (Rev. 04) *887152
6 EMC cover 884099

A front panel unit includes all the connectors and input boards.

* = the part is recommended for stock

2 NOTE: The STP board 882627 can be used as a replacement only with STP software
883367.

2 NOTE: The ECG board 886478 can be used as a replacement only with ECG
software 883806 |

M-ESTPR Rev. 01, M-ETPR Rev. Ol, M-ESTR Rev. Ol

Item Item description Order No.

STP board, M-ESTP (Rev. 03-04), M-P (Rev. 02) *882627
EMC cover 884099
ECG/RESP board, M-ESTPR (Rev. 01) *884609
EMC cover 886818
Front panel unit, M-ESTPR (Rev. 01) 887153
Front panel unit, M-ETPR (Rev. 01) 887154
Front panel unit, M-ESTR (Rev. 01) 887155
Membrane keypad 879374
T-input connectors, M-ESTP (Rev. 04) *887152
Front panel sticker, M-ESTPR (Rev. 01) (Eng) 886603
Front panel sticker, M-ESTPR (Rev. 01) (Ger) 886966
Front panel sticker, M-ESTPR (Rev. 01) (Fre) 886963
Front panel sticker, M-ESTPR (Rev. 01) (Esp) 886943
Front panel sticker, M-ESTPR (Rev. 01) (Swe) 886928
Front panel sticker, M-ESTPR (Rev. 01) (Dut) 886937
Front panel sticker, M-ESTPR (Rev. 01) (Ita) 886925
Front panel sticker, M-ESTPR (Rev. 01) (Fin) 888868
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

10 Front panel sticker, M-ETPR (Rev. 01) (Eng) 886604

10 Front panel sticker, M-ETPR (Rev. 01) (Ger) 886967
10 Front panel sticker, M-ETPR (Rev. 01) (Fre) 886965
10 Front panel sticker, M-ETPR (Rev. 01) (Esp) 886944
10 Front panel sticker, M-ETPR (Rev. 01) (Swe) 886929
10 Front panel sticker, M-ETPR (Rev. 01) (Dut) 886938
10 Front pane! sticker, M-ETPR (Rev. 01) (Ita) 886926
10 Front panel sticker, M-ETPR (Rev. 01) (Fin) 888869
10 Front panel sticker, M-ESTR (Rev. 01) (Eng) 886605
10 Front panel sticker, M-ESTR (Rev. 01) (Ger) 886968
10 Front panel sticker, M-ESTR (Rev. 01) (Fre) 886964
10 Front panel sticker, M-ESTR (Rev. 01) (Esp) 886945
10 Front panel sticker, M-ESTR (Rev. 01) (Swe) 886930
10 Front panel sticker, M-ESTR (Rev. 01) (Dut) 886939
10 Front panel sticker, M-ESTR (Rev. 01) (Ita) 886927
10 Front panel sticker, M-ESTR (Rev. 01) (Fin) 888870
1 Module box (wide) 886168
3 Latch 879181
2 Spring pin 879182
11 Metal frame 879183
5 Cross recess screw M3x8 black 616215
13 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x6 61721
14 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x12 628700

A front panel unit includes all the connectors and input boards.

* = the part is recommended for stock '

Part II-ESTPR-51
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

6.2 Exploded View

Figure8 Exploded View of Module Box

Part II-ESTPR-52
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

Figure9 Exploded View of Module

Part II-ESTPR-53
 Datex AS/3 M-ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
For service information on the earlier revisions, please refer
to:

ESTP Module revision 01 Service Manual p/n 880850

ETP Module revision 00 ーー

ESTP Module revision 02 Service Manual p/n 882580

ETP and EST Modules revision 01 ーー

ESTP Module revision 03-04, and ETP and EST Modules

revision 02-03 are supported by this manual too.

Part I-ESTPR-54
 Cardiac Output Module, M-COP (Rev. 02)

Cardiac Output and SvO, Module, M-COPSv (Rev. 00)

„u

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 889881

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION I

| SPECIFICATIONS 2
1.1 General Specifications ses rss eres erkende 2
1.2 Typical Performance... ss e eee Re Ren ete 2
1.3 Technical Specifications... sise 4
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 5
2.1 Measurement Principle A 5
2.2 Main Components and Block Diagram............................................. 9
2.2.1 COP Board
2.2.2 COPSv Board e eee ermenin
2.3 Connectors and signals…...….................................. sn
2.3.1 Module Bus Connector Configuration. ...
2.3.2 Front Panel Connectors.......... μμ μμ μϱ-ϱϐϱϐϱϐϱἛϱἛ-----.
SERVICE PROCEDURES 19
3.1 General Service Informatio 이 아 나 아 나 다 어 나 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 마 다 아 아 아 아 마 아 이 마 아 아 아 다 아 아 아 어 마 아 아 이 19
3.2 Preventive Maintenance Checks. … 20
3.3 Disassembly and Reassembiy..... „2
3.4 Adjustments and Calibrations ....................
rire rien 22
TROUBLESHOOTING 24
SERVICE MENU 29
5.1 COP Service Men ee 30
SPARE PARTS - 33
6.1 Spare Parfs Es e een 33
¡ISS AAA nee ne 36
EARLIER REVISIONS 39
Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
Datex AS/3 Cardiac Output Modules, M-COP and M-
COPSv are single width plug-in modules for use with the
Anaesthesia and Compact Monitors. Both modules provide
cardiac output (C.O.), right ventricular ejection fraction
(REF) and invasive pressure measurement. Additionally the
COPSv module provides venous oxygen saturation (SvO,)
measurement.

NOTE: Do not use identical modules in the same monitoring

system. The COP and COPSv modules are considered as
identical modules.

Part II-COP-1
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

I SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 General Specifications

Module size (W x D x H) 37 x 180 x 112 mm
15x7.1x44in

Module weight 0.35 kg / 0.8 Ibs

Power consumption, M-COP About 3.5 W
Power consumption, M-COPSv About 5W

1.2 Typical Performance

с.о.
Measurement range 0.1 to 20 1/min
Display resolution 0.01 1/min

Repeatability > +2 % or +0.02 1/min

(measured from electrically
generated flow curves)

Max. change in blood temp 2.99°C

Injectate temp range (with Edward's compatible probes)

0 to 25.5°C +0.3°С
25.5 40 27.0°С +0.5°C

Blood temp range (with Edward's compatible catheters)

17.5 to 30.9°C +0.5°C
31.0 to 43.0°C +0.3°C

Protection against electric shock type CF defibrillation proof

REF

Repeatability +2%
(Measuring range 10-60 %)

Part П-СОР-2
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

5νο 3

Accuracy +2%
(Measuring range 30-95 %)
Equals to standard deviation when using in vivo calibration

InvBP
Measurement range -40 to 320 mmHg
Zero adjustment range +150 mmHg
Calibration range +20 %

Scales Upper limit is adjustable

between 10 and 300 mmHg
in steps of 10. Lower limit
is 10 % of selected upper
limit below zero.

Sweep speed 12.5, 25, 50 mm/s

DIGITAL DISPLAY:
Range -40 to 320 mmHg
Resolution +1 mmHg

WAVEFORM DISPLAY:
Range -30 to 300 mmHg

PULSE RATE:
Measurement range 30 to 250 bpm
Resolution 1 bpm
Accuracy +5 bpm
Respiration artefact rejection

Part Ii-COP-3
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

1.3 Technical Specifications

Digital display averaged over 5 seconds and updated at 5
seconds intervals.

Error +5 % or +2 mmHg

Transducer and 5uV/V/mmHg, 5 VDC

input sensitivity 20 mA max current

Input resistance 1019 Q

Zero drift <0.1 mmHg/°C

Nonlinearity <1 %, 0 to 200 mmHg

<2 %, -40 to 0 and 200 to
320 mmHg

Gain drift <0.05 %f.s./°C

Filter 0 to 20 Hz(-3 dB)
Zero set accuracy +1 mmHg
Calibration resolution +1 mmHg
Zero time less than 5 sec

Protection against electric shock type CF defibrillation proof

NOTE: The accuracy of the measurement may be different

from the specified accuracy, depending on the
transducer /probe used. Please check the transducer/probe
specification.

Part II-COP-4
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Measurement Principle

Cardiac Output and REF

Cardiac output measurement is made by principle of
thermodilution. In measurement the catheter lies in the heart
with an injection port in the right atrium (RA) and a
thermistor, which is to monitor blood temperature, in the
pulmonary artery (PA). A small, known amount of thermal
indicator is injected into the RA and is mixed with the blood
on its way to the PA. The catheter thermistor measures the
decrease in blood temperature as the blood flows past the
thermistor in the PA.

The information is stored in the module and cardiac output

is calculated from the area beneath the thermal curve.

The area under the time-temperature curve is inversely

proportional to the flow rate which corresponds to cardiac
output.

Cardiac output is calculated from the equation:

1.08 Cr 60 Vi (Ty - Ti)

where:

C.O.= cardiac output in liters/minute

1.08 = factor comparing density and specific heat of 5%

dextrose solution in water to ones of blood.

Cr= correction factor for the injectate temperature

rise as it passes through the catheter and its dead space

60 = seconds/minute

V,= injectate volume in liters

Part II-COP-5
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

T= baseline blood temperature (°C)

T= injectate temperature

Tgdt =area under thermodilution curve between time o and

x, where x is the time when the curve has dropped to
30% of its peak value.

area beneath thermodilution curve between x and end

of the curve.

©
で -T
9 Α area A

È 100% | start of meas.

o 80% |------ end of meas.

bo
a area C
점 30%
v
된

58 0% |
8
9 >
a tms. 180% tso% t
E Time
の
F

Figure 1 Cardiac Output Measurement Curve

A =. area derived by integration of the time temperature

thermodilution curve

C= area beneath the thermodilution curve between t39%

and end of the curve. Computation based upon an
exponential fit to the curve between tgg% of the peak
and 39%.

Part II-COP-6
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

REF (right ventricular ejection fraction) measurement is a

part of the thermodilution cardiac output measurement.
Ejection fraction is determined using an exponential
technique by synchronizing sensed R-waves with points of
temperature changes on the thermodilution curve. Once
ejection fraction, cardiac output, and heart rate are known,
right ventricular volumes may be calculated. The
measurement requires BAXTER Edwards fast response
thermistor catheter and also ECG-module to synchronise R-
wave detection to the thermodilution curves.

SvO, Measurement (COPSv module only)

The COPSv module measures SvO, when coupled with
Baxter-Edwards OM-2E optical module and Swan-Ganz
oximetry catheter. To measure SvO,, the system utilizes a
spectrophotometric technique involving the use of light-
emitting diodes (LEDs) that produce red (660 nm) and
infrared (810 nm) light. The light is transmitted to the blood
through a single plastic optical fiber in the oximetry catheter
and reflected back through a separate optical fiber to a
photodetector in the optical module. The light is electrically
transmitted to the COPSv module and analyzed to
determine SvO,.

The oximetry portion of the system measures SvO2 in the

pulmonary artery by detecting colour changes in the red
blood cells. When pulses of red and infrared light are
transmitted through the oximetry catheter, the light is
reflected from the red blood cells and transmitted back
through the catheter to the optical module. The amount of
light reflected at each wavelength depends primarily on the
colour of the blood and the number of red blood celis. Since
the number of red blood cells in the blood affects the amount
of reflected light, the differences are compensated when the
patient's total haemoglobin value is entered. The optical
module stores and transfers SvO, calibration data. SvO,
values can be affected by the presence of methemeglobin or
carboxyhaemoglobin which imitate the absorption
characteristics of HbO,. Large concentrations of
methemeglobin or carboxyhaemoglobin could then cause a
falsely elevated SvO,. In cases where dysfunctional

Part II-COP-7
 Datex A5/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

haemoglobins are suspected, SvO, should be interpreted

with caution.

Invasive Biood Pressure Measurement

To measure invasive blood pressure, a catheter is inserted
into an artery or vein. The invasive pressure setup,
consisting of connecting tubing, pressure transducer, an
intravenous bag of normal saline all connected together by
stopcocks, is attached to the catheter. The transducer is
placed level with the heart, and electrically zeroed.

The transducer is a piezo-resistive device that converts the

pressure signal to a voltage. The monitor interprets the
voltage signal so that pressure data and pressure waveforms
can be displayed.

Part Ii-COP-8
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

2.2 Main Components and Block Diagram

The COP module consist of the COP board and two input
boards, the CO input board and the P input board, attached
to the front panel. (The front panel components are shown in
figure 2.)

The COPSv module consist of the COPSv board and three

input boards, the CO input board, the SvO, input board and
the P input board, attached to the front panel. The front
panel components are shown in figure 2.

M-COP M-COPSv

oo
©
Figure 2 Front Panel Components

(1) Key for pressure zeroing (zero P4)

(2) Key for cardiac output measurement (Start C.O.)
(3) Connector for invasive pressure measurement (P4)
(4) Connector for C.O. self test
(5) Connector for C.O. measurement (C.O.)
(6) Connector for SvO, measurement (SvO,)

Part II-COP-9
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

2.2.1 COP Board

The COP board consists of the following functional sections.
e Processor section
» Cardiac output measurement section
e Cardiac output self test
« Invasive BP measurement section
+ Serial communication
e Isolated section
e Power supply section

Processor section
As the processor, Intel's 80C196KC-16 is used. There are
external memories, an 8-bit data bus, a 16 MHz oscillator,
and a watchdog timer. Three A/D-converters within the
processor are used. The processor's internal UART
communicates with the host monitor.

Cardiac output measurement section

The catheter and the probe contain NTC-resistor that reacts
to temperature change.
Temperature dependent voltage over the NTC-resistor is
amplified and offset value is added to it, then regulated into
+5 V range in voltage slicing and sent to A/D converter.
Because the temperature measurements are calibrated
digitally and non-linearity of catheter/probe is compensated
by software, ambient temperature change after calibration is
the only factor that may have influence upon the
measurement.

Cardiac output self test

There is a connector for C.O. test on the module front panel
to find out whether the fault is in the catheter or in the
module.
When the cable is connected to the self-test connector,
processor starts the test program automatically. First, the
processor measures 30°C. Then, it activates test circuits and
measures 37°C and then 41°C.

Part II-COP-10
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

If the measured values are correct (‘Cable OK’ message is

displayed) the fault is in the catheter, and if not correct
(‘Cable fault’ is displayed), the fault is either in the module
or in the catheter connecting cable.

Module Module Power for 」 Power for

data reset communication
module

86486
DRIVER DRIVER POWER
FOR FOR POWER NON-
DATA MODULE RESET ISOLATION
RESET SECTION

OPTO
ISOLATION

Reset IMICROPROCESSOR
NON- RAM internal 256 POWER
external 16K
VOLATILE ¡Module bus data EPROM 48K ISOLATION
MEMORY RS COMMUNICATION SECTION

Serial device
communication AD-
CONVERTER
8 chn
12 bit

SvO2 AD co. co. | Press AD

OM-2 control control AD

SvO2 C.O. En И ЗОНЕ FRONT

MEASURING MEASURING MEASURING PANEL
UNIT UNIT UNIT KEYS
| | |
To optical module

Figure 3 COPSv Board Block Diagram, in COP Board

the SvO, Section is Excluded

Part II-COP-11
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

Invasive BP measurement section

Isolated +5 V voltage is supplied to the pressure transducer.
From the bridge connection a differential voltage, which
depends on pressure and supplied voltage, is calculated (see
the formula below).

Uout = Uin x Pressure x 5 V

where Uin=5 V

Uout = 25 V x Pressure [mmHg]

Pressure amplification is realized in the instrumentation

amplifier. Gain of the amplifier is set so that the level of the
signal transferred to A/D converter stays within the
measurement range even when there are circumstantial
offsets or offsets caused by the transducer. There is a filter
before the amplifier to attenuate high frequency disturbances.

There is also FET switch, which, by cutting the measurement

current, detects the existence of the transducer. The existence
of the transducer is also checked binary by the jumper
beside the connector.

Pressure
transducer
instrumentation
amplifier

Input
Filter ¢ >>
to AD converter

Figure 4 Pressure Transducer Working Principle

Part II-COP-12
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

Serial communication
Serial communication between the module and the frame is
done by RS485 type bus whose buffers get their supply
voltage (+5 VDC) from the Central Unit and in the isolation
section get the supply voltage (+5 V) from the isolated
power supply.

The buffers of the serial communication are controlled also

by Reset-signal , when the Reset is active, the buffer does not
transfer data.

Reset is also RS485 type and additionally, there is an

auxiliary logic power reset, which keeps the reset active for
about 500 ms despite the state of reset in the module bus.
Time constant determines the power-up reset time. There are
components to prevent the module from sending data
during reset.

Data transmission rate is 500 kbit/s.

Le5 i data
Receive Data

a Send data, RS485 < ? =

の Driver =n
a < > 5 5
o “—— NData — 2
es —— > AM ©
©- send/receive L | Opto isolation. send/receive = 2
2 Reset ; 5 o
Resetin © O
© Rs485 长。 一 =
2 Driver 22
E - 5 Reset NResetin
o sö
© as

Figure 5 Serial Communication and Opto Isolation

Part II-COP-13
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

Isolated section
Signal is processed on logical high-low level even though the
output of the opto isolators is analog signal in the isolated
section.

Reset line is an open collector type with a pull-up resistor.

Thus the processor is able to use its internal watch-dog
function.

Power supply section

Isolated supply voltage of the module is developed from +15
Vdirty voltage from the host monitor.

Power supply is a switched-mode circuit, where a FET

transistor switch is controlled by an oscillator using bipolar
timer. Controlling of the FET switch is slowed to suppress
spurious interference. A special pulse transformer is used in
the circuit. In the secondary circuit normal linear regulators
are used except for +5 V (low drop type linear regulator).

2.2.2 COPSv Board

The COPSv board consists of the same functional sections as
the COP board, except for the cardiac output self test section.
Additionally the COPSv board consists of the SvO,
measurement section.

SVO, Measurement Section

The SvO, algorithm is a part of the COPSv module software.

The algorithm consists of five different parts; initialization,
calibrations, signal processing and SvO, calculation,
automatic gain control, and signal quality analysis.

Initialization

When the optical module is connected to the COPSv module,

a number of start-up procedures are performed prior to
normal operation. These procedures include transfer of
calibration factors from the optical module to the COPSv
module and initialization of LED currents.

Part Y-COP-14
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

Calibration

The system is calibrated according to either in-vitro or in-

vivo calibration. In-vitro calibration is performed before the
oximetry catheter is removed from the package with the
catheter tip still inside the calibration cup. The resulting
calibration factor is calculated on the basis of the measured
ratio of red and infrared signals and the ideal ratio for the
calibration cup. In-vivo calibration is performed when the
catheter is inserted into the patient’s pulmonary artery. The
resulting calibration factor is based on the measured ratio of
red and infrared signal and the Hgb and SvO, values
measured in a laboratory. If the calibration is skipped, the
result of an old calibration is used instead and “Not
calibrated”-message is displayed in the SVO, number field.

Signal Processing and SvO, Calculation

The reflected red and infrared signals transferred from the

optical module to the COPSv module are filtered, and SvO,
is calculated on the basis of the ratio of the signals.

Automatic Gain Control

The intensity of the red and infrared signals can be

amplified by four different gains. The gain is selected
automatically to achieve optimal signal levels.

Signal Quality

The reflected red and infrared signals are checked for wall
contact artefacts, pulsatility and intensity shifts. An index is
calculated to indicate the signal quality. 0 indicates a normal
signal, 1 indicates an intermediate signal, 2 indicates a poor
signal, and 3 indicates an unacceptable signal. Please refer to
the service menu section for more information.

Part II-COP-15
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

2.3 Connectors and signals

2.3.1 Module Bus Connector Configuration

Rear panel 25-pin female D-connector (X1)

Pin 1/0 Signal

13 0000000000000] 1 1 I RESET_RS485*
25 000000000000 [44
2 I -15 VDC*
3 I +15 VDIRTY*
4 I +15 VDC*
5 1/0 -DATA RS485*
6 1/0 DATA RS485*
7 - Ground & Shield*
8 I ~RESET_RS485*
9 I CTSB
10 ο RTSB
11 I RXDB
12 0 TXDB
13 - Ground & Shield*
14 I +32 VDIRTY
15 I GroundDIRTY*
16 I CTSC
17 ο RTSC
18 I RXDC
19 0 TXDC
20 ~ ON/STANDBY
21 - BITOIN
2 - RXDD RS232
23 - TXDD RS232
24 I +5 VDC*
25 I +5 VDC*

* Used in COP module

Part II-COP-16
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

2.3.2 Front Panel Connectors

The pin assignment on the Invasive pressure connector:

Pin Signal
Pressure 4 +

H
Pressure 4 -
ND
© Polarisation - (ground)
Polarisation +
Not connected
O1

Not connected
© “JO

Not connected
Not connected
Ground
0

Cable detection
Ὁ

The pin assignment on the cardiac output connector:

Pin Signal
1 BAB
2 THB
3 BAC
4 Not connected
5 Shield
6 Not connected
7 THD
8 THA
9 THC
10 BAA
11 Not connected
12 Not connected
13 Not connected
14 FL
15 Not connected
16 Not connected
17 Not connected

Part 11-COP-17
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

The pin assignment on the C.O. Self Test connector:

Pin Signal
1 CTC
2 CTA
3 CTB
4 CTD

The pin assignment on the SVO, connector

Pin Signal
1 IR CATHODE
2 CE
3 SK
4 DATA OUT
5 CHASSIS GND
6 SVO2 GND
7 HEATER RTN
8 REMOTE OUT
9 +V OPT
10 TEMP SENSOR
11 HEATER HI
12 LOCAL. OUT
13 REF RTN
14 LED_ANODE
15 RED CATHODE
16 DATA IN
17 -V OPT

Part II-COP-18
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES

3.1 General Service Information

Field service of the COP and COPSv modules is limited to
replacing faulty mechanical parts. In all other cases, return
the faulty module to Datex for repair. The COP board or the
COPSv board cannot be replaced, and all calibrations can be
done at the factory only.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide

the unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed
fault description.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with the appropriate

tools and equipment shall perform the tests and repairs
outlined in this section. Unauthorized service may void
warranty of the unit.

Part II-COP-19
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

3.2 Preventive Maintenance Checks

We recommend you to perform these checks at least once a
year and after any service.

1. Visual inspection

_ . Ifthe module is disassembled, check that all

connectors are properly connected and there is no
loose object inside the module before attaching the
module box.

2. Functional checks

a Insert the module into monitor frame.

—: Tumthe power on by STBY-switch. COP window

should appear on the display if selected for display.
No error message should appear.

_; Pull out the module. The COP window goes blank

within 15 seconds.

== Reinsert the module while the power is still on. The

COP measurement data appear on the window again.

o: Go to Service Menu, Service View, Modules, COP and

check the functions of cable and probes. Check
buttons (ON/OFF test).

Part II-COP-20
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly

The COP and COPSv modules are disassembled in the
following way. See the exploded view of the module.

a) Remove the two screws from the back of the module.

b) Pull the module box slowly rearward and detach it from

main body. Be careful with loose latch and spring pin for
locking.

CAUTION: When reassembling the module, make sure that

the cables are reconnected properly.

Part H-COP-21
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

3.4 Adjustments and Calibrations

Adjustments
There are no adjustments in COP module.

Pressure calibration
Pressure calibration is recommended to be done whenever
pressure transducer (probe) is replaced with another type.

1. - Goto COP service page. (see chapter 5 Service Menu;

Path: Monitor Setup, Install /Service (password 16-4-34),
Service View (password 26-23-8), Modules)

2. Go to Calibrations.

3. Connect pressure transducer with a pressure

manometer to the front panel P4 receptacle. Choose
‘Calibrate P4’. Leave the transducer to room air
pressure.

Calibrations
Calibrate Pd
Previous Menu

Calibrate transducer with

nanometer. Press wheel to
start zeroing.

4. Push the ComWheel. The zeroing takes place.

5. Supply pressure of 100 mmHg to 300 mmHg to the

transducer. Recommended pressure is 200 mmHg.

Part II-COP-22
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

6. Set the pressure on the display with the ComWheel to

match the pressure reading on manometer and push the
ComWheel. Tolerance of +1 mmHg is allowed.

7. The text ‘calibrated’ will appear on the display.

Cardiac output calibration

The cardiac output calibration is done only at the factory.

Part H-COP-23
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

4 TROUBLESHOOTING

Cardiac Output

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

NO CATHETER- Catheter or cable not Connect catheter (cable).
message connected.
Catheter or cable faulty. Check by self-test. Change
catheter or cable.
Blood temp out of range. Blood temp should be within
the range.
Tinj OFF-message No injectate temp probe. Connect probe.
Probe faulty. Change probe.
Probe wrong type. Use Baxter compatible inj. temp
probe.
Temp out of range. Blood temp should be within
range.

Part II-COP-24
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

SVO,
TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT
Faulty cable Factory calibration of the | Replace optical module.
optical module corrupted.
Red or infrared transmit
error, currents cannot be
adjusted to factory
defaults.
No cabie No optical module Connect optical module.
connected.
Insufficient signal Loose catheter connection. | Check connection
Optical module failure. Replace optical module.
Catheter kinked or In vivo calibrate or replace
damaged. catheter if needed.
Warming up Temperature of the Please wait. If it takes longer
optical module has not than 20 minutes replace optical
yet reached the optimal module or COPSv module.
value or optical module
failure or COPSv module
failure.
Poor SvO2 signal Signal pulsatility, wall Check number field message
contact or intensity shift | which problem “Check catheter
signal quality level at 3. position” or “Intensity shift”

Part II-COP-25
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

Invasive BP
TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT
Abnormally low Transducer wrongly Check mid-heart level and
pressure positioned. reposition transducer.
No pressure Defective transducer. Check transducer.
No pressure module Check the module.
plugged in.
No waveform selected on To select the desired pressure
screen. waveforms press Monitor Setup
key and select modify
waveforms.
Check that pressure transducer
is open to patient.
Not zeroed-message Measurement on, channel Zero the channel.
not zeroed.
Zeroing failed-message Unsuccessful zeroing of Possibly due to pulsating
Pi (number field). pressure waveform. Open the
transducer to air and zero the
channel.
Offset is > 150 mmHg. Open
the transducer to room air and
zero the channel.
Defective transducer. Replace it
and zero the channel.
Calibration failed- Unsuccessful calibrating Pulsating waveform. Turn the
message of P4 (number field). transducer to
sphygmomanometer and try
again (zeroing takes place first).
Gain is beyond the limits (+20
% of the default gain) of the
module. Replace the
transducer.
Out of range < 40 Measurement pressure is Check transducer level. Zero
mmHg beyond measurement the channel.
range.

Part II-COP-26
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

Out of range > 320 Measurement pressure is | Check transducer level. Zero
mmHg beyond measurement the channel. The patient may
range. also have high pressure.
Zero adj. > 100 mmHg Offset when zeroing is > Check transducer. The
100 mmHg (but < 150 waveform may hit the top and
mmHg) from the absolute the numeric display not shown.
zero of the module (with
default gain).
Out of range Measured pressure is The waveform hits the top and
beyond the internal the numeric display not shown.
measurement range of the Check transducer and its level.
module. Zero the channel.

See also the Troubleshooting chart on the next page.

Part II-COP-27
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

Possibly faulty
COP module

Y
Take all modules out
ofthe Frame

Y
Insert M-COP and tum
power on

Does fault No
> Fault not in COP
still appear?
module

No

Enter the Service menu

Does another
Module-ID module work
on screen? in the same slo

Retum module to factory

Check front panel key for repair
functions in Service
menu

Do they work?

Check front panel unit

and COP board to
find culprit. Replace if
necessary

Part II-COP-28
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSu
Service Manual

5 SERVICE MENU
Monitor Setup
Monitor Setup . Install/Service
Waveform Fields Units
Digit Fields 100 Service View | 26 100
Select Mode Save Modes
Set Time and Date Interfacing
Instat i/Service | 16 analog Outputs
Normal Screen Monitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu
a 8

Give password. Give password.

To enter COP Service Menu during normal operation:

1. Press the MONITOR SETUP key. The Setup menu

appears.
Turn ComWheel to highlight Install /Service and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 16 - 4 -
34. The Install /Service menu appears.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and

push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 26 - 23 -
8.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Modules and push.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight COP module and

push.

Part II-COP-29
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSu
Service Manual

5.1 COP Service Menu

cor Service Data

4
Calibrations
[Ej | Gain 209 어
- Zero -13 CO. 0
Previous Menu Cable OFF Catheter Ini.
Probe OFF OM OFF
Yalue ー- 33,53 —

5402
Heas. state Normal OM fail Ok
Value — ето. 0
Gain. 3 Pulse SQL 0/3
Red int 32 Clipp. SOLU
TRed int 59 Int. SQT 0/3
Loc red 371
Loc irec 330

På C.0.
Button OFF OFF

Timeouts O RAM DK
Bad checksums a ROM OK
Bad c-s by mod O EEPROM OK

Selectable menu items:

1. Enter P4 calibration.

2. Return to previous menu.

SERVICE DATA Detailed Description

Zero indicates offset compensation value of each parameter
in A/D converter. Usually the value is within +1000. Gain is
a coefficient to compensate gain error. Typically the value is
between 17000 and 25000. Calibrate if zero and/or gain
value is outside the ranges.

Cable shows ON when the corresponding cable is connected

to the front panel and Probe shows ON when the
corresponding probe is connected to the cable.

Under Value the measured numeric values are displayed

simultaneously. Pressure value is a real time value and
shown in mmHg.

Part II-COP-30
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

At the Probe items Catheter (ON/OFF) and Inj. (FT, BATH,

or OFF) indicate connections and Value indicates measured
temperature at 1/100th degrees of Centigrade.

Meas. state: Measurement status: No optical module (No

OM) connected, initializing the optical module (Init OM),
normal measurement state (Normal) and failed module (OM
fail).

Value is a measured SvO, value.

Gain is a gain of the remote red and infrared signals (0,1,2

or 3)

Red int: Reflected red intensity

Ired int: Reflected infrared intensity

Loc red: Local red intensity

Loc ired: Local infrared intensity

OM fail: Reason why initialization OK (OK), can’t read

EEPROM of the optical module correctly (EEPROM), can’t
adjust led current to get local signal as wanted (Transmit).

OM temp: Temperature of the optical module OK (OK),

temp under 43 °C (Under), temp over 47 °C (Over).

Pulse SQI: Signal quality index for pulsing (low pulse/high

pulse). 0 indicates a normal signal, 1 indicates an
intermediate signal, 2 indicates a poor signal, and 3 indicates
an unacceptable signal.

Clipp. SQI: Signal quality index for wall artefact. 0 indicates

a normal signal, 1 indicates an intermediate signal, 2 |
indicates a poor signal, and 3 indicates an unacceptable
signal.

Int. SQI: Signal quality index for intensity shift from

previous calibration or Hgb update (intensity
decreased /increased) 0 indicates a normal signal, 1 indicates
an intermediate signal, 2 indicates a poor signal, and 3
indicates an unacceptable signal.

Part II-COP-31
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

The front panel key function is confirmed by pressing the

key and observing OFF turns to ON at Button.

Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many

times the module has not responded to the monitor's
inquiry.
Bad checksums is also a cumulative number that indicates
how many times communication from the module to
monitor broke down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how
many communication errors the module has detected.
The monitor starts counting these items at power up and
resets to Zero at power off. The nonzero values do not
indicate a failure, but the continuous counting (more than 50
per second) during the normal operation indicates either
serial communication failure or module not in place.

RAM indicates the state of the external RAM memory.

ROM indicates whether the checksum at the EPROM is in
accordance with the one the software has calculated.
EEPROM indicates if the values stored in the permanent
memory are valid.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place ora
communication error).

Part II-COP-32
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS

6.1 Spare Parts List

NOTE: Only changed part numbers are listed under later
revisions. To find the desired part: check first the list of the
revision that corresponds your device. If the part is not listed
there, check the previous revision, etc. until you find the
right number.

NOTE: Accessories are listed in the booklet AS/3 Supplies

and Accessories.

item numbers refer to the exploded view in chapter 6.2.

Part II-COP-33
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

Cardiac Output Module, M-COP

Rev. 00

Item Item description Order No.

4 Front panel unit, M-COP (Rev. 00-02) 881191

Membrane keypad 880101
22 C.O. Test connector, M-COP 546215
10 Front panel sticker, M-COP (Eng) 880770
10 Front panel sticker, M-COP (Pre) 881271
10 Front panel sticker, M-COP (Ger) 880978
1 Module box (single width) 886167
3 Latch 879181
2 Spring pin 879182
11 Metal frame 879184
5 Cross recess screw M3x8 black 616215
13 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x6 61721
14 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x12 628700
15 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x16 628710
16 Star washer 63611

Item Item description Order No.

10 Front panel sticker, M-COP (Spa) 884387

10 Front panel sticker, M-COP (Swe) 885871
10 Front panel sticker, M-COP (Dut) 886064
10 Front panel sticker, M-COP (Ita) 886757
10 Front panel sticker, M-COP (Fin) 888871
19 EMC plate 884099
20 Protection plate 883946
21 Insulation plate for 883946 884121

Rev. 02

No new spare parts released.

A front panel unit includes all the connectors and input boards.

* = the part is recommended for stock

Part II-COP-34
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

Cardiac Output and SvO, Module, M-COPSv

Rev. 00

Item Item description Order No.

5 Front panel unit, M-COPSv (Rev. 00) 888540

11 Membrane keypad 880101
12 Front panel sticker, M-COPSv (Rev. 00) (Eng) 887376
12 Front panel sticker, M-COPSv (Rev. 00) (Fre) 889551
12 Front panel sticker, M-COPSv (Rev. 00) (Ger) 389550
12 Front panel sticker, M-COPSv (Rev. 00) (Spa) 889555
12 Front panel sticker, M-COPSv (Rev. 00) (Swe) 889553
12 Front panel sticker, M-COPSv (Rev. 00) (Dut) 889552
12 Front panel sticker, M-COPSv (Rev. 00) (Ita) 889556
12 Front panel sticker, M-COPSv (Rev. 00) (Fin) 889554
9 SVO2 cable 888546
8 EMC plate 884099
1 Module box (single width) 886167
2 Latch 879181
3 Spring pin 879182
7 Metal frame 879184
4 Cross recess screw M3x8 black 616215
6 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x6 61721
10 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x12 628700

The front panel unit includes all the connectors and input boards.

* = the part is recommended for stock

Part 1-COP-35
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

6.2 Exploded View

Figure 6 Exploded View of Module Box

Part II-COP-36
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

Gm
16
が
ЛИ
/ |

Figure 6 Exploded View of COP Module

Part II-COP-37
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

Figure 8 Exploded View of COPSv Module

Part II-COP-38
 Datex AS/3 M-COP, M-COPSv
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
This manual supports all earlier module revisions.

Part II-COP-39
 Pressure Module, M-P (Rev. 03)

Pressure Temp Module, M-PT (Rev. 00)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 885935-2

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION 1

I SPECIFICATIONS 2
1.1 General Specifications iii 2
1.2 Typical Performance ーー
13 Technical Specifications........................
eee eee eee rear a eee eee n 3
2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 5
2.1 Measurement Principle issues 5
2.2 Main components and block diagrams.…...........................................
2.3 Connectors and Signals sun
2.3.1 Connectors on the board... ce
2.3.2 Front Panel ConnectoYS users anne 12
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES 13
3.1 General Service Information... eee onde aneta tea anne aaa onen nné 13
3.2 Preventive Maintenance.......... 14
3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly.... „1
3.4 Adjustments and Calibrations eee tn 16
4 TROUBLESHOOTING 18

5 SERVICE MENU 19
6 SPARE PARTS
6.1 Spare Parts Lists
6.2 Exploded View... seen
7 EARLIER REVISIONS | 28
Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
Modules M-P and M-PT are single width plug-in modules for
use with the AS/3 Anaesthesia and Compact Monitors. Modules
provide the third invasive pressure, and M-PT also temperature
channels T3 and TA.

Additionally, the PT-module has a connector for direct ECG and

pressure signal output.

NOTE: The modules M-PT and M-P cannot be used

simultaneously in the same AS/3 monitor.

Part Il Pressure-1
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

I SPECIFICATIONS

I.1 General Specifications

Module size W x D x H: 37 x 180 x 112 mm
15x7.1x44in

Module weight: 0.35 kg / 0.8 Ibs

Power consumption: About 3.5 W

1.2 Typical Performance

InvBP
MEASUREMENT RANGE: -40 to 320 mmHg
Accuracy 15 % or +2 mmHg
Zero adjustment range +150 mmHg
Calibration range +20 %
Scales Upper limit is adjustable
between 10 and 300 mmHg
in steps of 10. Lower limit
is 10 % of selected upper
limit below zero.
Sweep speed 12.5, 25, 50 mm/s

DIGITAL DISPLAY:
Range -40 to 320 mmHg
Resolution +1 mmHg

WAVEFORM DISPLAY:
Range -30 to 300 mmHg

HEART RATE FROM ARTERIAL PRESSURE:

Measurement range 30 to 250 bpm
Resolution 1bpm
Accuracy +5 bpm or +5 bpm,
whichever is greater

Part II Pressure-2
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

Temperature
Measurement range 10 to 45 °C (50 to 113 °F)
Display resolution 0.1 °C (0.1 °F)
Temperature test Automatic (every 10 min.)

YSI 400 probe compatible

Signal Output
ECG out 1V/mV
Pressure P3 out 1V/100 mHg (0...300
mmHg)

1.3 Technical Specifications

InvBP
DIGITAL DISPLAY AVERAGING
Digital displays Art and P1 are averaged over 5 seconds and
updated at 5 seconds intervals. All other pressures have
respiration artifact rejection.

Error +5 % or +2 mmHg
Transducer and
input sensitivity 5 uV/V/mmHg, 5 VDC
20 mA max current
Input resistance 10% ohms
Zero drift <0.1 mmHg/°C
Nonlinearity <1 %, 0 to 200 mmHg
<2 %, -40 to 0 and 200 to 320 mmHg
Gain drift <0.05 %f.s./°C
Filter 0 to 4- 22 Hz adjustable
Zero set accuracy +1 mmHg
Calibration resolution +1 mmHg
Zero time less than 5 sec

Protection against Type CF defibrillation proof

electrical shock

Part II Pressure-3
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

NOTE: The accuracy of the measurement may be different from

the specified, depending on transducer/probe used. Please
check the transducer/probe specification.

Temperature
Measurement accuracy +0.1 °C (25.0 to 45.0 °C)
+0.2 °C (10.0 to 24.9 °C)

Amplifier accuracy 20.1 °C (25.0 to 45.0 °C)

+0.2 °C (10.0 to 24.9 °C)

Sensor accuracy +0.1 °C (25 to 45 °C)

+0.2 °C (10.0 to 25.0)

Protection against Type CF

electrical shock

NOTE: The accuracy of the measurement may be different from

the specified, depending on transducer/probe used. Please
check the transducer /probe specification.

Signal out
Max. delay: ECG1 15 ms
Pressure P3 25 ms
(0.300 mmHg)
Pressure offset error max. 10 mmHg

Part IT Pressure-4
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Measurement Principle

Invasive Blood Pressure

To measure invasive blood pressure, a catheter is inserted into
an artery or vein. The invasive pressure setup, consisting of
connecting tubing, pressure transducer, an intravenous bag of
normal saline all connected together by stopcocks, is attached to
the catheter. The transducer is placed level with the heart, and
electrically zeroed.

The transducer is a piezo-resistive device that converts the

pressure signal to a voltage. The monitor interprets the voltage
signal so that pressure data and pressure waveforms can be
displayed.

Temperature
The temperature is measured by a probe whose resistance
varies when the temperature changes, called Negative
Temperature Coefficient (NTC) resistor.

The resistance can be measured by two complementary

methods:

1. Applying a constant voltage across the resistor and

measuring the current that flows through it.

2. Applying a constant current to flow through the resistor

and measuring the voltage that is generated across it.

In AS/3 module the two methods are combined in a form of a

voltage divider. The NTC-resistor is connected in series with a
normal resistor and a constant voltage is applied across them.
The temperature dependent voltage can be detected at the
junction of the resistors, thus producing the temperature signal
from the patient. The signal is amplified by analog amplifiers
and further processed by digital electronics.

Part Ii Pressure-5
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

2.2 Main components and block diagrams

The M-PT module consists of the following main parts:

PT board

Two connectors for YSI 400 series temperature probes;

temperature channels T3 and T4.

Nicolay-type connector for an invasive blood pressure

sensor; invasive blood pressure channel P3.

Key for pressure zeroing.

DIN-type connector for two direct ECG output signals

and pressure 3.

NOTE: These output-signals are non-floating

The M-P module consists of the following main parts:

PT board

Nicolay-type connector for an invasive blood pressure

sensor; invasive blood pressure channel P3.

Key for pressure zeroing.

Communication between the module and the AS/3 central unit

is established through RS485 serial interface.

The power supply voltages to the module are generated in the

power supply section of the monitor’s Central Unit. All
electrical connections between the module and the Central Unit
are established via 25-pin D-type connector on the backside of
the module.

Part II Pressure-6
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

Module bus connector, D25

RS485 driver RS485 driver Power-up Power,

for data for module r reset non-isolated
reset section

ECG OUT
ECG SYNC OUT
PRESSURE

to output connector
Opto Isoiation -
Isolation transformer
| | Patient Isolation 圖

Power,
isolated
Microprocessor section
ees, SECİİON

non-volatile A/D converter

memory

INV. pressure Temperature Keyboard

measuring measuring
unit unit

to pressure to temperature
sensor sensors

Figure 1 PT and P Module Block Diagram

Part II Pressure-7
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

ECG and pressure signal prosessing

The PT-module has the Signal Out connector, for output of
analog ECG and pressure signals.

The analog ECG-output signals are made by detecting the

pulse-width modulated (PWM) ECG signal of the AS/3 module
bus. The module detects the presence of the pacemaker pulses
by following the ECG module. Every time the pacer pulse has
been detected, the microprocessor of the M-PT module
generates a 2,5 ms pacer pulse which is added to the analog
ECG signal.

The PRESSURE OUT signal is generated from the P3 invasive

pressure signal of the M-PT module. The P3 signal is
transmitted as a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal over the
patient isolation. The analog signal is generated by low-pass
filtering the PWM signal.

Part II Pressure-8
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

2.3 Connectors and Signals

2.3.1 Connectors on the board

The following connectors on the board are used, when the
board is configured to M-PT or M-P:

The module bus 25-pin female D-connector (X1):

Pin No Vo Signal
1 I RESET RS485*
2 -15 VDC*
3 +15 VDIRTY*
4 +15 Vin*
5 I/O |NDATA RS485*
6 I/O |DATA RS485*
7 Ground*
8 I NRESET RS485*
9 I CTSB
10 O RTSB
11 I RXDB
12 O TXDB
13 Ground*
14 I +32 VDIRTY
15 I GroundDIRTY*
16 I CTSC
17 ο RISC
18 I RXDC
19 o TXDC
20 ON/STANDBY
21 ο PWM_ECG*
22 RXDD_RS232
23 TXDD_RS232
24 I +5 VDCin*
25 I +5 VDC*
* Used in the M-PT modules

Part II Pressure-9
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

X3, Keyboard connector:

Pin No | Signal Notes

1 N/C Not connected
2 COSWITCH Not used
3 PSWITCH for zeroing of P3
4 fGND Floating GND
5 fGND Floating GND

X4, Pressure sensor connector:

Pin No | Pin No | Signal Notes

board | fr.panel
1 0 PCABEL 5V if cable not
connected
2 4 PCURRENTPulse
d supply to sensor
3 3,9 P1- Signal from
the sensor
4 1 P1+ Signal from
the sensor
5 2 fGND Floating GND
When the board is configured to be M-PT, there are the
following connectors connected on the board in addition to X1
and X4,.

X5, Output connector (Signal out connector on the panel):

Pin No | PinNo | Signal Notes
board | fr.panel
1 ECG OUT | ECG to (e.g.)IABP
2 N/C Not connected
3 4 GND +5VDCin GND
4 1 ECG OUT | ECG to (e.g.)defib.
5 N/C Not connected
6 3 ECG OUT | ECG to (e.g.)IABP
7 2 P OUT P3 to (e.g.) IABP
8 GND | GND +5VDCin GND

Part II Pressure-10
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

X8, connector for temperature probes:

Pin No | Signal Notes

1 T3
2 T4
3 fGND Floating GND
4 CON Low if PT
5 fGND Floating GND
6 GND Floating GND

Part Il Pressure-11
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

2.3.2 Front Panel Connectors

Pressure Connector

Pin No Signal

Pressure 3 +
Ha

Pressure 3 -
~©
Qi

Polarisation - (ground)
009 Polarisation +
GTA

Not connected
Not connected
GV

Not connected
Not connected
oo

Ground
Fa NO

Cable detection

Signal Out Connector

Pin No Signal

ECG out, 1 V/ 1 mV
Pressure out, 1 V/ 100 mmHg
ona

ECG out, 1 V/ 1 mV
Ground

NOTE: To get the ECG signal out from the Signal out connector,
there must be one of the following modules in use: M-ESTPR,
M-ESTR, M-ETPR, M-ESTP rev. 02 or later, M-ETP/M-EST rev.
01 or later.

Part II Pressure-12
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES

3.1 General Service Information

Usually field service is limited to replacing the faulty circuit
boards or mechanical parts. The boards are then returned to
Datex for repair.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide the

unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed fault
description.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with appropriate

equipment shall perform the tests and repairs outlined in this
section. Unauthorized service may void warranty of the unit.

Part I Pressure-13
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

3.2 Preventive Maintenance

We recommend you to perform these checks at least once a year
and after any service.

1. Visual inspection

— Ifthe module is disassembled, check that grounding

wires and all connectors are properly connected and
there is no loose object inside before attaching the module
box.

2. Functional checks

o: Insert the module into frame.

o Turn the power on by ON/STBY-switch. Within 15

seconds, Temp and P3 windows should appear on the
display if selected for display. No error message appears.

—: Pull out the module. The windows go blank within 15

seconds.

_: Reinsert the module while the power is still on. The

measurement data appear on the windows again.

od Go to Service Menu (Path: Monitor Setup, Install /Service,

Service View, Modules) and check the functions of cables
and buttons (ON/OFF test).

—: Put temperature test plug into T3 and T4 and make sure

that the measured values do not deviate more than +
0.1°C. If they do, perform the temperature calibration.

Part II Pressure-14
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly

Disassemble the module in the following way. See Figure for
the exploded view of the module.

a) Remove the two screws from the back of the module.

b) Pull the module box slowly backwards and detach it

from main body. Be careful with loose latch and spring
pin for locking.

c) The PT board will appear. The board is now removed by

detaching two screws on the folio side of the board near
the front panel and disconnecting the two ribbon cables
coming from the front panel.

CAUTION: When reassembling the module, make sure that the

cables are reconnected properly.

Part Il Pressure-15
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

3.4 Adjustments and Calibrations

Pressure calibration
Perform pressure calibration whenever pressure transducer
(probe) is replaced with another type. The pressure calibration
is performed in Service Menu:

1. Go to P/PT service page (See chapter 5 Service Menu;

path: Monitor Setup, Install /Service, Service View,
Modules).

Go to Calibrations page.

Connect pressure transducer with a pressure manometer

to the front panel P3/P4 receptacle. Choose Calibrate P3.
Leave the transducer to room air pressure.

Calibrations
Protection OFF
Set Config BP
Calibrate T3
Calibrate TA
Calibrate P3
Previous Menu

Calibrate temperatures
with calibration plugs
for 25 °C and 45 °C.

Push the ComWheel. The zeroing takes place.

Supply pressure of 100 mmHg to 300 mmHg to the

transducer. Recommended pressure is 200 mmHg.

Set the pressure on the display with the ComWheel to

match the pressure reading on manometer and push the
ComWheel. Tolerance of +1 mmHg is allowed.

Part II Pressure-16
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

The text ‘calibrated’ will appear on the display.

Temperature calibration (M-PT)

Temperature calibration is performed whenever the measured
values deviate more than +0.1°C when temperature test plug is
inserted into T3 and T4 receptacle. The temperature calibration
is performed in Service Menu:

NOTE: For the temperature calibration, separate test plugs

(25°C and 45°C) are necessary. A test set of two plugs is
available from Datex, order code 884515.

1. Go to P service page ( See chapter 5 Service Menu; Path:

Monitor Setup, Install /Service (password “10”), Service
View (password ‘1’), Modules).

Go to Calibrations page.

Press in the protect button at the bottom of the module

and choose OFF in Protect mode. Release the button.

Choose Calibrate T3/Calibrate T4.

Insert calibration plug (25°C) into T3/T4 connector.

Push the ComWheel two times.

Insert calibration plug (45°C) into T3/T4 connector.

Push the ComWheel two times.

Press in the protect button at the bottom of the module

and choose ON in Protect mode. Release the button.

Part II Pressure-17
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

4 TROUBLESHOOTING
See also the Operator's Manual for more troubleshooting
procedures.

Possibly faulty
M-P/PT module

Y
Take all modules out
of the Frame

у i

insert M-P/PT and tum

the power on

Does fault No
still appear? —— —> Fault not in M-P/PT
module

\
Enter the Service menu

Does another
Module-ID module work
on screen?, in the same slot?

Check front panel key

functions in Service
menu Send the failed module
to factory for repair

Y
Ba they work? Has EEPROM Exchange the
failed PT board

Check front panel unit Has Temp

and PT board to measurement Recatibrate the temp,
find culprit. Replace if channels
necessary
V No

Yes
measurement Exchange
failed the PT board

Part II Pressure-18
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

5 SERVICE MENU
Monitor Setup
Monitor Setup Install /Service
Waveform Fields Units
Digit Fields 100 Service View | 26 100
Select Node Save Nodes
Set Time and Date Interfacing
Install/Service | 16 Analog Outputs
Normal Screen Monitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu
0 0

Give password. Give password.

To enter Service Menu during normal operation:

1 Press the MONITOR SETUP key.

The Setup menu appears.

Turn ComWheel to highlight Install/Service and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 16 - 4 - 34.
The Install/Service menu appears.
Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 26 - 23 - 8.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Modules and push.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight P module and push.

Part Il Pressure-19
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

P Service Data
> 7 P3 T3 Ta
Calibrations Gain 21066 13716 13763
zero 1 88 89
Record Data Cable ON OFF OFF
Probe ON OFF OFF
Previous Menu Yalue 8.10 — —

Button OFF
Tenp error OFF DFF

Protect key OFF

Protect mode ON
Configuration Fi
Timeouts O RAM OK
Bad checksums O ROH OK
Bad c-s by mod G EEPROM OK

Selectable menu items:

1. Enter P3 calibration.

2. Return to previous menu.

For calibration instruction, please see chapter 3.4 Adjustments

and Calibrations. :

Part II Pressure-20
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

SERVICE DATA Detailed Description

Gain is a coefficient to compensate gain error. Usually the
values for P1 and P2 are between 17000 and 25000 and for T1
and T2 between 13000 and 14300. Zero indicates offset
compensation value of each parameter in A/D converter.
Typically the values for P1 and P2 are within +1000 and for T1
and T2 between -150 and +300. Calibrate if zero and/or gain
value is outside the ranges.

Cable shows ON when the corresponding cable is connected to

the front panel and Probe shows ON when the corresponding
probe is connected to the cable.
Under Value the measured numeric values are displayed
simultaneously. Pressure value is a real time value and shown
in mmHg.

The front panel key function is confirmed by pressing the key

and observing OFF turns to ON at Button.

Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many

times the module has not responded to the monitor's inquiry.
Bad checksums is also a cumulative number that indicates how
many times communication from the module to monitor broke
down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how
many communication errors the module has detected.
The monitor starts counting these items at power up and resets
to zero at power off. The nonzero values do not indicate a
failure, but the continuous counting (more than 50 per second)
during the normal operation indicates either serial
communication failure or module not in place.

RAM indicates the state of the external RAM memory.

ROM indicates whether the checksum in the EPROM is in
accordance with the one the software has calculated.
EEPROM indicates if the values stored in the permanent
memory are valid.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place or a
communication error).

Temp error shows whether the calibration of the temperature

was successful or not.

Part II Pressure-21
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

Protect key shows normally OFF but turns to ON when the

button at the bottom of the module is pressed.

Protect mode is normally ON. It turns to OFF when Protect is

switched to OFF for the temperature calibration in Calibration
Menu.

Configuration shows the chosen module configuration: BP or

PT.

Part II Pressure-22
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS

6.1 Spare Parts Lists

NOTE: Only changed part numbers are listed under later
revisions. To find the desired part: check first the list of the
revision that corresponds your device. If the part is not listed
there, check the previous revision, etc. until you find the right
number.

NOTE: Accessories are listed in the booklet AS/3 Supplies and

Accessories.

Item numbers refer to the exploded view in chapter 6.2.

Pressure Module, M-P

Rev. 00/01

Item Item description Order No.

6 STP board, M-ESTP (Rev. 01), M-P (Rev. 00-01) (880339)
Use 885697
4 Front panel unit, M-P 880044
Membrane keypad 880101
10 Front panel sticker, M-P (Eng) 880139
10 Front panel sticker, M-P (Fre 880130
10 Front panel sticker, M-P (Ger) 880488
1 Module box (single width) 886167
3 Latch 879181
2 Spring pin 879182
11 Metal frame 879184
5 Cross recess screw M3x8 black 616215
13 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x6 61721
14 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x12 628700
15 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x16 628710
16 Star washer 63611

Rev. 02

Item Item description Order No.

6 STP board, M-ESTP (Rev. 03-04), M-P (Rev. 02) *(882627) Use 885697

Part II Pressure-23
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

Rev. 03
Item Item description Order No.

6 PT board, M-PT (Rev. 00), M-P (Rev. 03) *885697

10 Front panel sticker, M-P (Spa) 884201
10 Front panel sticker, M-P (Swe) 885847
10 Front panel sticker, M-P (Dut) 886063
10 Front panel sticker, M-P (Ita) 886756
10 Front panel sticker, M-P (Fin) 888863
19 EMC plate 884099
20 Protection plate 883946
21 Insulation plate for 883946 884121

The front panel unit includes all the connectors and input boards.
* = the part is recommended for stock

Pressure Temp Module, M-PT

Rev. 00
Item Item description Order No.

6 PT board, M-PT (Rev. 00), M-P (Rev.03) *885697

7 Signal out connector, M-PT 884316
8 T-input connectors 884315
9 P-input connector 884314
17 Membrane keypad 880101
18 Front panel frame, M-PT 883801
10 Front panel sticker, M-PT (Eng) 884004
10 Front panel sticker, M-PT (Ger) 885035
10 Front panel sticker, M-PT (Fre) 885033
10 Front panel sticker, M-PT (Spa) 886193
10 Front panel sticker, M-PT (Swe) 885845
10 Front panel sticker, M-PT (Dut) 886330
10 Front panel sticker, M-PT (Ita) 886758
10 Front panel sticker, M-PT (Fin) 888864
19 EMC plate 884099
20 Protection plate 883946
21 Insulation plate for 883946 884121
1 Module box (single width) 866167
3 Latch. 879181
2 Spring pin 879182
11 etal frame 879184
5 Cross recess screw M3x8 black 616215
13 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x6 61721
14 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x12 628700
15 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x16 628710
16 Star washer 63611

* = the part is recommended for stock

Part II Pressure-24
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

6.2 Exploded View

GA

Figure 2 Exploded View of Module Box

Part II Pressure-25
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

11

Figure 3 Exploded View of M-P Module

Part Il Pressure-26
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

14À17À18 )(10

Figure 4 Exploded View of M-PT Module

Part Ii Pressure-27
 Datex AS/3 M-P, M-PT
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
This manual also supports M-P revision 02.

For service information on the earlier revisions, please refer to:

P Module revision 00 Service Manual p/n 880850

P Module revision 01 © Service Manual p/n 882580

Part II Pressure-28
NIBP Module, M-NIBP (Rev. 03)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 885936-2

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

ος
 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION 1

I SPECIFICATIONS 2
1.1 General Specifications..................... iii 2
1.2 Typical Performance ..
1.3 Technical Specifications ss... sein 3
2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 4
21 Меазиите рипар............ ели алии ишииинииинитиитититлитиилитиичиння 4
2.2 Main Components.... „5
2.2.1 NIBP Board eee „5
2.3 Module Bus Connector Configuration.................. eee 9
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES 10
3.1 General Service Information... ss 10
3.2 PreventiveMaintenanceChecks................................. eee 11
3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly mu
ЗА Adjustments and Calibrations te nné 14
4 TROUBLESHOOTING 18
41 Module Troubleshooting..…......….................. ns 18
4.2 Troubleshooting Chart.... . 19
4.3 Error Code Explanaton nn nné 21
5 SERVICE MENU
5.1 NIBP Service Menu cc ei sene
5.1.1 NIBP Calibration Menu... siennes
5.1.2 NIBP Safety Valve Menu... nn
5.1.3 NIBP Pulse Valve Menu...
5.1.4 NIBP Buttons/Leds Menu
6.1.5 NIBP Pneumatics Menu.
6.1.6 NIBP Watchdog Menu
6 SPARE PARTS
6.1 Spare Part List..........................
6.2 Exploded View of Module
7. EARLIER REVISIONS
Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION -
The Non-Invasive Blood Pressure Module, M-NIBP, is a double
width module that provides non-invasive blood pressure
measurement in the AS/3 monitors.

Part II- NIBP- 1

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

I SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 General Specifications

Module size W x D x H:75 x 180 x 112 mm
3.0x71x44in

Module weight: 0.9 kg / 2.0 Ibs

Power consumption: about4 W

1.2 Typical Performance

Oscillometric measurement principle

Measurement range
adult 25 to 260 mmHg
child 25 to 195 mmHg
infant 15 to 145 mmHg

Accepted HR 30 to 250 bpm

Measurement interval from continuous to 60 min.

Measurement time, adult 23s

typical infant 20s

Initial inflation pressure

adult 185 + 10 mmHg
child 150 + 10 mmHg
infant 120 + 10 mmHg

Venous stasis
adult 80 + 10 mmHg / 2 min.
child 60 + 10 mmHg / 2 min.
infant 40 +10 mmHg / 1 min.

Cuff widths Tall adult 15 cm

Standard adult 12 cm
Small adult 9 cm
Child 6cm
Infant 5cm
Infant 3cm

Part If- NIBP- 2

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

1.3 Technical Specifications

Deflation rate, HR dep. 5 to 13 mmHg/sec

Inflation rate, typical 25 to 35 mmHig/sec

(20 to 100 mmHg, adult cuff)

Automatic software control, max. inflation pressure:

adult 280 + 10 mmHg
child 200 + 10 mmHg
infant 150 + 10 mmHg

Over pressure limit, stops measurement after 2 seconds:

adult 320 mmHg
child 220 mmHg
infant 165 mmHg

Mechanical safety valve limits the maximum cuff pressure to

330 mmHg. Independent timing circuit limits pressurizing (>15
mmHg) time to 2 minutes maximum in adult/child mode, and
1 minute in infant mode.

Zeroing to ambient pressure is done automatically.

Inflation pressure is adjusted according to the previous systolic

pressure, typically 40 mmHg above. If the systolic pressure is
not found, inflation pressure is increased typically 50 mmHg.

Max. measurement time:

adult 2 min.
child 2 min.
infant 1 min.

Pressure transducer accuracy is better than +3 mmHg or +2 %

(whichever is greater). Max. error +4 mmHg.

Protection against Type BF defibrillation proof

electrical shock

Part II- NIBP- 3

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Measuring principle

NIBP (Non-Invasive-Blood-Pressure) is an indirect method for
measuring blood pressure.

The NIBP measurement uses the oscillometric measuring

principle. The cuff is inflated with a pressure slightly higher
than the presumed systolic pressure, then deflated at a speed
based on the patient's heart rate, collecting data from the
oscillations caused by the pulsating artery. Based on these
oscillations, the module calculates values for systolic, mean, and
diastolic pressures.

The NIBP measuring module is a fully automatic, self-contained

non-invasive blood pressure measuring system which
communicates with the main CPU via an asynchronous RS-485
serial channel. All NIBP functions are controlled by the NIBP's
CPU in the NIBP board.

The following parts are necessary for NIBP measurement:

- NIBP module
- Twin hose (Adult or Infant model)
- Blood pressure cuffs (different sizes)

Part II- NIBP- 4

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

2.2 Main Components

In general

The NIBP module contains the following main parts:

- NIBP board
- Pneumatics and hosing
- NIBP air pump
~ Safety (Over pressure) valve
- Check valve
- Bleed valve
- Exhaust valves (2)
- Pressure transducers (2)
- Module keyboard and status indicator LEDs

Most of the electronic components inside the NIBP module,

such as microprocessor, software, and pressure transducers, are
on PC board. Pneumatic valves and pump are placed inside the
module body.

All connections are established via 25-pin connector (D-type,

female). The module needs +5 V, +15 V, and -15 V power
supply to operate. The pump and the valves use separate +15
VD (dirty) power line. The supply voltages are generated in the
power supply section of the AS/3 Monitor.

Communication between the module and the monitor CPU

board is established through RS485 serial interface at 500 kbit/s
data transfer rate.

2.2.1 NIBP Board

Pressure transducer

The module contains two pressure transducers. They are of

piezoresistive type. One is used for measuring the pressure of
the blood pressure cuff and the pressure fluctuations caused by
arterial wall movement. The other is used as a second source to
measure the pressure of the cuff. This measured value is not
used for the actual blood pressure calculation, but for detection
of cuff hose type, cuff loose and cuff occlusion situations etc.

Part II- NIBP- 5

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

The transducers are internally temperature compensated. They

are supplied by a constant voltage and their output voltage
changes up to 40 mV max. (50 kPa, 375 mmHg).

Signal processing

Two signals from the pressure transducers are amplified and

sent to A/D converter. After the converter, digitized signals are
sent to microprocessor for data processing. Before the converter,
one of the signals is used to adjust the offset to the pressure
safety level.

The NIBP module is controlled with 80C51FA microprocessor

which uses 16 MHz oscillator frequency.

Memory

NIBP program memory (EPROM) size is 128k x 8. RAM size is

32k x 8 bit and it stores variable values in NIBP measurement.
EEPROM is size 64 x 16 bit and is used to store the calibration
values for the pressure transducers, the pulse valve constants
gained during measurements, the PC board identification, and
module serial number.

Control

Software controls valves, pump and LEDs. In addition to the

individual on/off signals for each component there is a
common power switch for the valves and the pump that can be
used at pump/valve failures.

In addition to external RS485 reset line the microprocessor

system is equipped with its own power-up reset.

Safety circuit

The NIBP module is equipped with software independent

safety circuit to disconnect supply voltages from the pump and
the valves if the cuff has been pressurized longer than preset
time. Pressure limit is specified to 15 mmHg. As soon as the cuff
pressure rises over 15 mmHg, timer starts counting. The timer is
adjusted to stop the pump and open the valves in 2 minutes 10
seconds in adult/child mode and in 1 minute 5 seconds in
infant mode.

Part IT- NIBP- 6

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

Pressure safety level check

Pressure safety level detection is checked in Service Menu.

When pressure (generated by external pump with manometer)
inside module exceeds safety level (adjusted to 14 mmHg) the
sign of the signal at AD5 on the NIBP Menu/Pneumatics
Service Menu changes from negative to positive value. If the
change doesn't occur within 14 + 5 mmHg, adjust it (see the
Chapter 4.3).

NIBP tubing lengths

There are two different tubes inside the module. They are
silicon tubes 1.7 x 1 (part number 73373) and 3.18 x 6.35 (73375).
When ordering, specify the part number and length(s) required.

Part II- NIBP- 7

 Service Manual
Datex AS/3 M-NIBP

49148 19910Jd 34从

snavlva

FRAME
(ereg
V

M-NIBP Functional Block Diagram

uote
ἴ it JL IL || -queo)
MOHd ヨ ヨ

MONITOR
TOHLNO SAAM
auv TANYd MOHd ヨ MVH
“140 1NOHA "3HALNÍ

to/from
9954
430093
9931064

Part II- NIBP- 8

13534
ヨAO
rd
Υ4 9908
8037 nd9
sna ssaucdy
H3LHIA
ЦА 91+ -NO9-dY
у Pern
| 一 | BoaHolvym

Figure 1
ヨ Hd
ヨ HnSS
HIAIHO
AKIVA
H ヨ WVHO
ΘΝΙΝΙΟΡ 3309
1 ヨ ATVA 1STIVHX ヨ "
ョ ATVA AUNSSAHdHAAO
 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

2.3 Module Bus Connector Configuration

Module rear panel 25-pin female D-connector (X1)

Pin No VO | Signal
I | RESET RS485*

5 © @œ 1 @ UT 1 UN mi
I | -15 VDC
I | +15 VDIRTY*
1 | +15 VDC
1/0 | -DATA_RS485*
DATA_RS485*

ООН SG
Ground & Shield*
-RESET RS485*
CTSB
RISB
11 RXDB
12 TXDB
13 Ground & Shield*
14 +32 VDIRTY
нь

15 GroundDIRTY*
16 CTSC
17 RTSC
ОНО

18 RXDC
19 TXDC
20 ON/STANDBY
г

21 BITOIN
22 RXDD_RS232
23 TXDD_RS232
24 +5 VDC*
me

25 +5 VDC*

* Used in NIBP module

Part II- NIBP- 9

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES

3.1 General Service Information

Field service of the NIBP module is limited to replacing the
faulty circuit boards or mechanical parts. Return the boards to
Datex for repair.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide the

unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed fault
description.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with the appropriate tools

and equipment shall perform the tests and repairs outlined in
this section. Unauthorized service may void warranty of the
unit.

Part II- NIBP- 10

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

3.2 Preventive Maintenance Checks

Perform these checks after any service and at least once a year
to keep the AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor NIBP Module in good
condition.

1. Visual inspection

_: Ifthe module is disassembled, check that grounding

wires and all connectors are properly connected and
there is no loose object inside the module. Check also that
tubes are not pinched and there is no sharp bend before
attaching the module box.

2. Functional checks

od Go to Service Menu, NIBP module, and Buttons/LEDs

test. Check that all the LEDs can be lit and the keys
operate normally.

—: Connect a manometer to the NIBP connector. Go to

Service Menu, NIBP module, Calibrations, and choose
Active leak test. The module automatically pumps a
pressure of about 265 mmHg and the pump stops. Wait
for 15 seconds for the pressure to stabilize. Then check
that the pressure does not go down more than 5 mmHg
per minute. Release the pressure.

og Go to Service Menu, NIBP module, Calibrations, and

Calibration check. Check first zero offsets (z.o.) of both
channels, B1 and B2, and write down the values when
NIBP connector is open to ambient air. The values should
be within + 10 mmHg.

Connect the manometer to the connector. Check the following

pressures.

Manometer Allowed values on

display
100 mmHg 100 + z.0. +2 mmHg
200 mmHg 200 + z.o. +3 mmHg
260 mmHg 260 + z.0. +4 mmHg

Calibrate if not within specification:

Part IT- NIBP- 11

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

Go to Service Menu, NIBP module, and Watchdogs.

Perform both Adult and Infant watchdog time tests.

Go to Service Menu, NIBP module, and Pneumatics.

Pump reference pressure (14 mmHg) slowly to the
chamber. Check that the value at AD5 toggles from
negative to positive value at 14 mmHg +5 mmHg. A
beep sounds to indicate when the pressure crosses this
level.

NOTE: Make sure the manometer you are using can be

used to measure pressures over 300 mmHg.

Go to Service Menu, NIBP module, Pneumatics, and Start

pump. The opening pressure of Safety valve is displayed
at B1 and B2. It should be between 280 and 330 mmFig.
Repeat the test for more accurate result.

Go to Service Menu, NIBP module, Pneumatics, and Start

pump. Let the pressure rise over 250 mmHg then stop
the pump. Select Open exh1 and observe the pressure
drops to zero within 10 seconds. Select close exh1. Repeat
the procedure and select Open exh2. The pressure should
drop to zero within 10 seconds.

Connect a normal adult cuff to the connector and wrap it

around a pipe. Select VENOUS STASIS ON and start the
test. The cuff holds a pressure of 70 to 85 mmHg for two
minutes and the pump does not start within that time.

Wrap the cuff around your arm. Make one measurement.

Check that the message ADULT appears at start of the
measurement for about 5 seconds in NIBP field on the
display. Check that the measurement result also appears.

If an Infant cuff hose (white) is available, connect it and

the infant cuff and wrap the cuff around a pipe. Check in
NIBP Setup Menu that the inflation limit is set to Auto.
Start a measurement and check that the message
INFANT appears at start of the measurement for about 5
seconds in NIBP field on the display.

Part II- NIBP- 12

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly

Disassemble the NIBP module in the following way. See the
exploded view of the module:

a) Remove the two screws from the back of the module.

b) Pull the module box slowly rearward and detach it from

main body. Be careful with loose latch and spring pin for
locking.

Remove the four corner screws from the back of NIBP

board. The NIBP board and the front panel can be
detached.

To free the front panel and the NIBP board, disconnect

tubes and connectors.

Remove the five screws and lift off the plastic pump
cover. NIBP pump, safety (over pressure) valve, and
valve unit which includes two valves, wires and a
connector will be exposed. Remove them.

f) Pull out pulse valve from the bottom of the NIBP frame.

8) Reassemble by reversing what was described above.

CAUTION: Before reattaching the module box, make sure that

the tubes are not pinched between the NIBP frame and the PC
board.

NOTE: Take care that the connectors and especially the tubes
are reconnected properly and to the right ports.

Part II- NIBP- 13

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

3.4 Adjustments and Calibrations

Adjustment

Pressure safety level detection "OFFSET"

Remove two screws at the rear of the module. Take the module
box away. Connect first the service cable (e.g. a long Gas
Interface Cable) to the module connector inside the monitor
frame and then to the rear connector of the module. Go to the
NIBP Service Menu and select "Pneumatics". Pump reference
pressure (14 mmHg) into the module. Adjust the trimmer R12
so that AD5 signal sign changes from negative to positive at 14
mmHg.

Calibrations

Pressure measurement calibration

The electronics of NIBP pressure measurement is calibrated at

the factory. Pressure zero is automatically maintained by the
processor. If the zero point of the pressure transducer drifts
more than specified, an error message is given and the NIBP
board needs to be recalibrated or replaced.

The calibration can be checked and, when necessary, .

recalibrated in the NIBP Service Menu.

The calibration of the primary pressure channel can also be

checked in NIBP Set-up menu by selecting NIBP, NIBP Setup,
and Calibration Check. In this case the auto zeroing is
performed at start - remove hose before entering to ensure
atmospheric pressure to the pressure transducers - the primary
pressure is displayed. The zero-offset value should then be
zero.

1. Calibration check

For how to reach the Calibration menu, see chapter 5, Service

Menu.

1. Enter Calibration menu.

Part Ii- NIBP- 14

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

Calibration
active Leak Test | OFF
Calibration Check OFF
Protection OFF
Calibration
Previous Menu

2. Select "Calibration Check" and press the ComWheel.

3. Connect external precision manometer to the module.

4, Pump the following pressures to manometer and check

the difference between the manometer and monitor
pressure display:

Pressure Max. error Example

0 mmHg +9 mmHg (=zero offset) -2
100 mmHg 100 + zero offset +2 mmHg 98 +2
200 mmHg 200 + zero offset+3mmHg 19842

If the error of pressure channel B1 is larger than specified

above, the module needs to be re calibrated. The error of B2 is
allowed to be even twice as large because it has no effect on
blood pressure measurement accuracy. However, it is
recommended to re calibrate the module also when the error of
B2 is larger than specified above to ensure best possible
operation.

Part H- NIBP- 15
 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

2. Calibration

For how to reach the Calibration menu, see chapter 5, Service

Menu.

1. Enter "Calibration" in NIBP Service Menu.

2. Remove hoses from front panel connector to enable

proper zeroing.

Select "Calibration". If it is not available, perform the

steps A,B, and C.

NOTE: Do not pull off the NIBP module from the monitor
frame. The module must be in the frame during the
whole procedure.

A. Turn the toggle switch at the bottom of the NIBP

module to enable the calibration. Turn the switch
to the right by, for example, a sharp pencil. This
enables menu selection "Protection". the message
"Calibration switch ON!" appears.

B. Select Protection OFF in the Calibration menu and

push the ComWheel.

C. Return the toggle switch to the left. Menuselection

"Calibration" is now enabled, and "Protection" is
disabled. When the calibration is enabled, a
message "Calibration not protected" appears.

Start Calibration by pushing the ComWheel. Messages

"ZEROING" and "ZEROED" will appear in the NIBP
message field. After this a pressure bar will appear.

Connect an external mercury manometer with pump to

module through the both tubes of the hose - both
transducers B1 and B2 must be calibrated
simultaneously. Pump up to a pressure about 200 mmHg
according to the manometer. Calibration is possible in
the range 150 to 300 mmHg.

Verify that both pressure values in the prompt field

match the manometer reading. If not, adjust by turning

Part II- NIBP- 16

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
一 Service Manual

the ComWheel. When the values of the pressure bar and

the manometer are equal, press the ComWheel to
confirm the calibration. The message "Calibrating" will
appear onto the NIBP digit field. After a few seconds it is
followed by "Calibrated", which means that the
calibration has succeeded, and the new calibration data
has been saved into EEPROM.

To set the protection on:

Turn the toggle switch to the right. Select "Protection"
ON and push the ComWheel. Then turn the toggle
switch back to the left.

6. Remove the module from the frame and plug it back

again. Then perform Calibration Check (see the
preceding page) to verify the new calibration.

Part II- NIBP- 17

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual a

4.1 Module Troubleshooting

START > Possible fault
in NIBP module.

Insert NIBP module Remove all

and turn power on. modules from ]
C. Monitor Frame Replace
NIBP module.

Does fault Fault not in NO

still appear? NIBP module.

NO
Does

Module ID の due
module wor! k renin
replace ane Check and
on screen? YES | NIBP board. replace
NIBP board.
NO

Error LED check Replace

message on jn Service Menu LED board. OK?
creen? OK?

See error code expianation

in Service Manual and Check keyboard
fix it, connector. If OK,
change front panel.

Do
they work?
y Check pump
in Service Menu connector. If OK,
change pump.
Check tubes and
connectors. Find leak and
fix it.

NO Leak test

Figure2 NIBP Module Troubleshooting Flow Chart

Part II- NIBP- 18

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

4.2 Troubleshooting Chart

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT
INo NIBP value INot selected on screen. Press Monitor Setup key and
displayed select MODIFY NUMBERS.

INIBP menu fading INo NIBP module or module [Plug in the module.
Inot properly connected.

|Artifacts-message [Unsuccessful measurement

due to patient movements or
shivering.

Weak pulsation-messageWeak or unstable oscillation (Check patient condition. Retry.

pulses due to:
| artifacts (accurate diastolic Check any leaks and retry.
pressure difficult to
measure). [Use proper size cuff. Check
+ marked arrhythmia. attachment.
| marked drop in diastolic
pressure.
| diastolic pressure difficult
to measure.
| improper cuff position or
attachment.
+ too few pulses detected.
r- weak or unusual blood
circulation.
- may give systolic value.

¡Call service. INIBP hardware error. X= See the description of the error
(Error X-message error number message codes, their causes and
solutions listed in the next
chapter.

(Cuff 1oose-message (a) Hose and/or cuff (a) Connect them.

detached.
(b) - tighten the cuff.
(b) Hose and cuff connected. - replace cuff/hose.
Reason: + check internal tubing and air
| cuff loosely wrapped, large chamber, and fix if necessary.
volume. + check pump connector. If OK,
- leakage in cuff or hose. replace pump.
+ leakage inside module. | check cuff positioning.
- pump does not work.
+ no pulses during the last
three measurements.

Part II- NIBP- 19

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

¡Air leakage-message |(a) Hose or cuff leaking. (a) - replace cuff.
Reason: + replace cuff connector (if the
| cuff damaged. fault is in hose connector, replace
+ cuff connector damaged. hose). - replace O-ring.
+ O-ring damaged or missing
+ hose double connector (b) - connect or replace tube.
damaged. O-ring damaged + replace the whole tubing.
jor missing. - fix connections. Replace
(b) Hose and cuff OK. valve(s).
Reason:
| leakage inside the module.
- tube disconnected or
damaged.
- air chamber leaking.
| tubes disconnected from
valve(s) or valve(s) damaged

(Unable to measure Sys- Systolic blood pressure [Automatic retrial with increased
message probably higher than the pressure.
maximum inflation pressure.

Cuff occlusion-message (a) Cuff and/or hose (a) - straighten tube.

occluded. + remove occlusion.
Reason: (b) - replace the NIBP board.
- cuff tube kinked. - check calibration. Re calibrate.
- tube inside module kinked.
+ occlusion inside/outside
module.
(b) Cuff, hose, and tubes OK.
Reason:
- fault in pressure transducer
- fault in A/D converter.
- faulty calibration.
- missing voltages.

(Calibration switch on - IEEPROM protection switch Enables setting the protection

Imessage at the bottom of the module OFF in the Calibration menu.
turn switch to left if you are not
is turned to right.
going to calibrate.

Calibration not Calibration protection is set

¡protected -message. [to OFF.

Part II- NIBP- 20

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

4.3 Error Code Explanation

CODE EXPLANATION

0 RAM failure
Memory failure. Change NIBP board.
ROM checksum error
Memory failure, Change NIBP board.
+15V failure
Check short circuits. Change NIBP board.
-15V failure
Check short circuits. Change NIBP board.
EEPROM protection switch error. (only with S-STD93)
Turn the toggle switch to the left at the bottom of the module.
Calibration not protected. (only with S-STD93)
Protect calibration by selecting Protection ON in the NIBP
calibration menu. °
ADC error
ADC circuit failure. Change NIBP board.
Watchdog time too short
Change NIBP board.
Watchdog time too long
Change NIBP board.
Watchdog activated
Change NIBP board.
10 EEPROM checksum error
Memory failure. Change NIBP board.
11 Auto zero range exceeded
Calibrate NIBP.
12 Communication break
Temporal break down of communication from monitor
detected. Automatic recovery.

Part II- NIBP- 21

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

Monitor Setup
Monitor Setup Install/Service
Waveform Fields Units
Digit Fields 100 Service View | 26 100
Select Mode Save Modes
Set Time and Date Interfacing
Install/Service | 16 Analog Outputs
Normal. Screen Monitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu
0 8

Give password. Give password,

To enter Service Menu during normal operation:

1. 1. Press the MONITOR SETUP key.

The Setup menu appears.

2. Turn ComWheel to highlight Install/Service and push.

3. Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 16 - 4 - 34.
The Install/Service menu appears.

4. Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and push.

5. Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 26 - 23 - 8.

6. Turn the ComWheel to highlight Modules and push.

7. Turn the ComWheel to highlight NIBP module and push.

Part Ii- NIBP- 22

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

5.1 NIBP Service Menu

NIBP Module Service Data

B B2
Calibrations Pressure A 一一
Zero 一~ —
Safety Yalye AD0
Pulse Yalve apt ーーー

Buttons/Leds 203 ーー
i = Protect handle OFF ADS ---
Preunatics Calibr. prot. Е A6 —
Watchdog +15 ¥ power OFF AD? —

Previous Menu

Timeouts 65535 RAW ?

Bad checksums 65535 ROM 3
Bad c-s by mod 0 FEPROM ?

Calibration functions.
PSN F

Safety Valve functions.

Pulse Valve service functions.

Buttons/Leds service functions.

Pneumatics service functions.

di

Watchdog functions.
o

7. Return to previous menu.

SERVICE DATA Detailed Description

Pressure shows measured pressure multiplied by 10.

Zero shows pressure at auto zeroing multiplied by 10 and
changes between +20 and -20 mmHg. Absolute pressure is the
sum of Pressure and Zero.

Protect handle indicates hardware protection for EEPROM

memory. It should be ON all the time in normal operation. If it
is OFF data can not be read from or written to EEPROM, only

Part II- NIBP- 23

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

the calibration protection can be set or reset by software. It can

be turned to OFF by turning the toggle switch to the right at the
bottom of the module, which also enables Protection ON/OFF'
menu selection in the calibration menu.
Calibr. prot. shows software calibration protection and should
be OFF to enable calibration.

+15 V power indicates the condition of the supply voltage +15

Vdirty for the pump and valves. It exists (ON) or not (OFF)
depending on service menu function.

ADO to AD7 show the values of each eight channels of A/D

converter.

Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many

times the module has not responded to the monitor's inguiry.
Bad checksums is a cumulative number that indicates how
many times communication from the module to monitor broke
down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how
many communication errors the module has detected.
The AS/3 Monitor starts counting these items at power up and
resets to zero at power off. The nonzero values do not indicate a
failure, but the continuous counting (more than 50 per second)
indicates either serial communication failure, or module not in
place. Also other modules can cause communication errors that
cause these numbers rise.

RAM indicates the state of the external RAM memory.

ROM indicates whether the checksum in the EPROM is in
accordance with the one the software has calculated.
EEPROM indicates if the values stored in the permanent
memory are valid.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place or a
communication error).

Part II- NIBP- 24

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

5.1.1 NIBP Calibration Menu

Calibration
Active Leak Test | OFF
Calibration Check OFF
Protection OFF
Calibration
Previous Menu

1 Active leak test selection (ON/OFF)

2. Calibration check selection (ON/OFF)

3. Software calibration protection (ON/OFF). Select OFF

when calibrating. Protection can be set to ON or OFF
only when the toggle switch at the bottom of the module
is set to the right.

4. Calibration. Calibration selection is available only when

protection is OFF.

5. Return to previous menu.

Part II- NIBP- 25

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

Active Leak Test

Wrap an adult cuff around a pipe and connect the cuff to the
module. Select the active leak test (ON). The module
automatically pumps a pressure of 260 mmHg into the cuff.
Wait for several seconds until the pressure stabilizes. Then
check that the pressure reading does not drop more than 5
mmHg per minute. If it does, leaking point(s) should be
detected and fixed. Cancel the test by selecting Active leak test
OFF.

Calibration Check

After the calibration check is selected (ON), manually pump

pressure into the module and make sure that the same pressure
values are shown both on the display and on manometer.
Pressure of both pressure channels B1 and B2 are shown. Note
that if the display shows +2 mmHg at zero pressure and if you
pumped +200 mmHg into the module, the display should show
+202 mmHg.

Calibration

NIBP calibration can be performed in the NIBP Service menu as

follows:

NOTE : Both channels B1 and B2 must be calibrated

simultaneously.

1. If Protection is ON change it to OFF by first turning the

toggle switch to the right at the bottom of the module,
which enables the Protection selection. Then turn the
toggle switch to the left to enable Calibration.

NOTE : Do not disconnect the module from the frame when

turning the switch. The module must be in the frame during the
whole procedure.

NOTE: When the switch is at the right, the NIBP field shows an
error message "Calibration switch on!".

NOTE: When calibration is enabled, a message ‘Calibration not

protected’ appears.

Part If- NIBP- 26

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

For proper zeroing to take place, remove the hose from

the front panel connector. Select Calibration and push
the ComWheel. Messages "ZEROING" and "ZEROED"
will appear in the NIBP message field. After this a
pressure bar will appear beside the menu.

Connect an external mercury manometer with pump to

module through the both tubes of the hose. Pump up to
about 200 mmHg pressure (range of 150 to 300 mmHg
allowed) according to the manometer. Verify that both
pressure values in the prompt field match the manometer
reading. If not, adjust by turning the ComWheel.

When the values are equal, push the ComWheel to

confirm the calibration. First the message "Calibrating"
will appear followed after a few seconds "Calibrated”,
which means that the calibration data has now been
saved.

Use the bottom switch to enable Protection setting and

set it ON, and finally disable Protection setting.

Part 11- NIBP- 27

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

5.1.2 NIBP Safety Valve Menu

Safety Valve Safety Valve Data

BL B2
Start Test Pressure 000000 000000
- Zero 000095000088
Previous Henu
ADO -31
А 10
ADZ 45
ADI 1167
ada 5
Protect handle ON AD5 -1825
Calibr. prot. EN AD6 53
+15 Y power ON AD? -1153

BL B2
Max press 303 302
2s after stop 290 289

Timeouts 0 RAH OK
Bad checksums 0 ROM Ok
Bad c-s by mod 0 EEPROM OK

1. Start test is for starting and Stop test is for stopping the
Safety Valve test.

2. Return to previous menu.

NOTE: Parameter values in Service Data are for reference only.

SAFETY VALVE DATA Detailed Description

See NIBP Service menu in chapter 5.1 for information

on
general items Pressure, Zero, Protect handle, Calibr. prot., +15
V power, ADO to AD7 as well as Timeouts etc.

Max. press and 2 s after stop show the measured values at

Safety Valve test.

Safety Valve Test:

Wrap an adult cuff around a pipe and connect the cuff to the
module. Highlight Start test and give the ComWheel a push.
The test ends automatically or when Stop test (appears in place
of Start test) is pushed.

Max. press indicates the pressure at which the safety valve

opens and is normally 315 +15 mmHg. 2 s after stop indicates
the pressure at 2 seconds after the pump has stopped and is
normally > 280 mmHg. If the value is less, check leakage by the .
active leak test (page 27).

Part II- NIBP- 28

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

5.1.3 NIBP Pulse Valve Menu

Pulse Valve Pulse Valve Data

Bl B2
Stop Test Pressure 001730 01710
Zero 000000 080000
Set Valve
. ADO 450
Previous Menu ADI -376
AD2 -410
203 2167
ADA 1
Protect handie ON ADS 1817
Calibr. prot. ON ADE 523
+15 ¥ power ON AD? -1153

Pulse
Valve
50
Interval 240 mmHg -> 50 mmHg 3 s

Timeouts O RAM OK
Bad checksums D ROM pis
Bad c-s by mod G EEPROM OK

1. Start test is for starting and Stop test is for stopping the
test.

2. Set Valve lets you adjust the opening of the pulse valve.

3. Return to previous menu.

NOTE: Parameter values in Service Data are for reference only.

PULSE VALVE DATA Detailed Description

See NIBP Service menu in chapter 5.1 for information on

general items Pressure, Zero, Protect handle, Calibr. prot., +15
V power, ADO to AD7 as well as Timeouts etc.

Part Ii- NIBP- 29

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

Pulse Valve Checking:

Wrap an adult cuff around a pipe and connect the cuff to the
module. Select the Start test and push the ComWheel. The
pressure rises beyond 240 mmHg and stops. The pulse valve
opens. The module counts the time it takes for the pressure to
go down from 240 mmHg to 50 mmHg and displays it. The test
can be manually stopped by selecting Stop test.

The valve can be adjusted between 0 and 255 (0 for fully closed
and 255 for fully open). First select Set Valve and push the
ComWheel. See the pulse valve value and adjust it by turning
the ComWheel. Then push the ComWheel to confirm the value.

The "Interval 240 mmHg -> 50 mmHg" time should be less than
60 seconds when the valve is '50' and less than 10 when fully
opened (255). When fully closed (0), the system should be
airtight and the pressure does not drop. Depending on an
individual, the pulse valve may remain closed up to approx.
value 45.

If the measured time deviates much from those above, then the
pulse valve or its tubes are faulty.

Part II- NIBP- 30

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

5.1.4 NIBP Buttons/Leds Menu

Buttons/Leds Buttons/Leds Data

Bi B2
auto = ON Pressure 000000 000000
Zero 0D00000 — 080000
Manual OFF
ADO -31
STAT ON ADI 10
802 -45
Heasur. ON 20% 116
Previous Menu Protect handle ON ADS -1825
Calibr. prot, ON a6 53
+15 Y power ON AD7 -1153

tuto Set STAT Start

би tele On/Off Cancel
OFF OFF ON OFF

Timeouts D RAM OK
Bad checksums 2° ROM OK
Bad c-s by mod 1 EEPROM OK

1to 4. Auto, Manual, Stat, and Measuring Led selectors. Select

ON and push the ComWheel to light the Led in question.
5. Return to previous menu

NOTE: Parameter values in Service Data are for reference only.

BUTTONS/LEDS DATA Detailed Description

See NIBP Service menu in chapter 5.1 for information on

general items Pressure, Zero, Protect handle, Calibr. prot., +15
V power, ADO to AD7 as well as Timeouts etc.

Buttons Checking:

The front panel keys function is confirmed by pressing the key

and observing OFF turns to ON at Auto On/Off, Set Cycle
Time, Stat On/Off, and Start Cancel.

LEDS Checking:

The front panel LEDS can be lit by selecting Auto, Manual,

Stat, or Measuring. ON and pushing the ComWheel.

Part II- NIBP- 31

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

6.1.5 NIBP Pneumatics Menu

Pneumatics Pneumatics Data
BL B2
Stop Pump Pressure 000570 001320
Zero 000000 890900
Open Exhl
#00 122
Close Exh2 ADI -1005
#02 -156
Set Valve #03 1162
ana 1
Reset Clock Protect handle GN ADS 1917
Calibr, prot. ON 206 381
Previous Menu +15 Y power ON AD7 -1153

Pump Exhl Exh2 Pulse

Valve Valve Valve
ON CLOSED OPEN 41
Interval 20 mmHg -> 185 mmHg 4

Timeouts 0 RAM DK
Bad checksums O ROM OK
Bad c-s by mod G. EEPROM OK

1. Start pump and Stop pump are for the pump.

2. Open Exh1 is for opening the exhaust valve 1.

3. Open Exh2 is for opening the exhaust valve 2.

4. With Set Valve, the opening of the pulse valve is

adjusted between O and 255 (0 for fully closed and 255
for fully open). First push the ComWheel, then turn it to
adjust the value on screen and finally push to set the
value.

5. Reset Clock will zero the time on the display .

6. Return to previous menu

NOTE: Parameter values in Service Data are for reference only.

Part II- NIBP- 32

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

PNEUMATICS DATA Detailed Description

See NIBP Service menu in chapter 5.1 for information on

general items Pressure, Zero, Protect handle, Calibr. prot., +15
V power, ADO to AD7 as well as Timeouts etc.

Pump, Exh1 Valve, and Exh2 Valve show their states.

Pulse Valve shows how much the valve is opened (0 to 255)

during Valve Setting.

Interval 20 mmHg -> 185 mmHg Checking:

Select the Start pump at different combinations of the valves

open/closed and push the ComWheel. The module counts the
time it takes for the pressure to go up from 20 mmHg to 185
mmHg and displays it. When all the valves are closed, the
pump should be able to pump the pressure in about 1 to 4
seconds into an adult cuff wrapped around a pipe. The pump
does not stop without selecting the STOP PUMP by pushing
the ComWheel.

Watchdog BEEP:

Connect manometer to the front panel and pump pressure into

the module. When the AD5 value changes from negative to
positive value (at about 15 to 20 mmHg) a beep is heard. This is
the watchdog threshold pressure. Beyond this pressure the
watchdog is active and cut pressures at about 2 min. (adult).

Part Ii- NIBP- 33

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

6.1.6 NIBP Watchdog Menu i

Watchdog Watchdog Data i

BI B2 Eos
Test ADULT Pressure 000900 000000
Zero 000000 000000 a:
Test INFANT
ADO -31
Stop Test 部1 10

Previous Menu Dá ue
DA EIS

Protect handle ON ADS -1825

Calibr, prot. ON ADO 53
+15 Y power OFF #07 -1153

Watchdog Interval 131 s

Timeouts Q RAN BK
Bad checksuns O ROM Ok
Bad c-s by mod D EEPROH ÚK

1. Test ADULT is to test watchdog timer in adult mode

(120 to 140 seconds).

2. Test INFANT is to test watchdog timer in infant mode

(about 60 to 70 seconds).

3. Stop Test is for stopping the test.

4. Return to previous menu

NOTE: Parameter values in Service Data are for reference only.

WATCHDOG DATA Detailed Description

See NIBP Service menu in chapter 5.1 for information on

general items Pressure, Zero, Protect handle, Calibr. prot., +15
V power, ADO to AD7 as well as Timeouts etc.

Watchdog Interval shows the time the +15 Vdirty stays on

during the test.

Adult watchdog time testing:

Select Test ADULT and push the ComWheel. Watchdog interval

starts counting up seconds and keeps on counting as long as the
+15 Vdirty is on. The time should be 120 to 140 seconds.

Part II- NIBP- 34

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

Infant watchdog time testing:

Select Test INFANT and push the ComWheel. Watchdog

interval starts counting up seconds and keeps on counting as
long as the +15 Vdirty is on. The time should be 60 to 70
seconds.

Part II- NIBP- 35

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS

6.1 Spare Part List

NOTE: Only changed part numbers are listed under later
revisions. To find the desired part: check first the list of the
revision that corresponds your device. If the part is not listed
there, check the previous revision, etc. until you find the right
number.

NOTE: Accessories are listed in the booklet AS/3 Supplies and

Accessories.

Item numbers refer to the exploded view in chapter 6.2.

NIBP Module, M-NIBP

Rev. 01

Item | Item description Order No.

8 NIBP board, M-NIBP (Rev. 01) *(880359) Use 883011

? 883902
11 NIBP frame, M-NIBP 880427
15 Plastic pump cover, M-NIBP 879176
14 NIBP pump, M-NIBP (Rev. 01-02) *(880363) Use 883346
22 Pulse valve *880365
21 Magnetic valve *58534
20 Port plug for magnetic valve 58535
13 Safety valve (overpressure valve) 877109
4 Front panel unit, M-NIBP 881335
Membrane keypad 879374
16 Front panel sticker, M-NIBP (Eng) 879482
16 Front panel sticker, M-NIBP (Fre) 880159
16 Front panel sticker, M-NIBP (Ger) 880476
17 LED board, M-NIBP 880361
18 Hose connector 64654
1 Module box (wide) 886168
3 Latch 879181
2 Spring pin 879182
5 Cross recess screw M3x8 black 628706
10 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x10 628703
9 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x20 628709
19 Cross cylinder-head screw M2.5x6 628700

Part IT- NIBP- 36

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

Rev. 02

Item Item description Order No.

8 NIBP board, M-NIBP (Rev. 02) *(882418) Use 883011

3883902
23 Check valve 58542

Rev. 03

Item Item description Order No.

8 NIBP board, M-NIBP (Rev. 03) *883011

NIBP software *883902
14 NIBP pump, M-NIBP (Rev. 03) *883346
16 Front panel sticker, M-NIBP (Spa) 884386
16 Front panel sticker, M-NIBP (Swe) 885870
16 Front panel sticker, M-NIBP (Dut) 886124
16 Front panel sticker, M-NIBP (Ita) 886752
16 Front panel sticker, M-NIBP (Fin) 888872

The front panel unit includes all the connectors and input boards.

* = the part is recommended for stock

” The NIBP board 883011 can be used as a replacement only with NIBP software 883902.

Part 11- NIBP- 37

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

6.2 Exploded View of Module

Figure 3 Exploded View of Module Box

Part II- NIBP- 38

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

(10

Figure 4 Exploded View of NIBP Module A 73373 / 1.7

8 73375 / 3,18x 6,35

Part II- NIBP- 39

 Datex AS/3 M-NIBP
Service Manual

7. EARLIER REVISIONS
For service information on the earlier revisions, please refer to:

NIBP Module revision 01 Service Manual p/n 880850

NIBP Module revision 02 Service Manual p/n 882580

トレ ンジ

Part II- NIBP- 40

Recorder Module, M-REC (Rev. 02)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 885937-3

May, 1996

Datex-Engstrom Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Until Oct. 11th, 1996 Tel. +358 0 39411, Fax +358 0 146 3310
After Oct. 12th, 1996 Tel. +358 9 39411, Fax +358 9 146 3310
Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION I
I SPECIFICATIONS 2

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 3
2.1 Recorder Board rei 3
2.2 Module Bus Connector Configuration... iii 5
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES 6
3.1 General Service Information...................... . ee 6
3.2 Preventive Maintenance Checks ... „7
3.3 Disassembly and Reassembiy ten een enter een een nenene 8
4 TROUBLESHOOTING 9
4.1 Troubleshooting chart... rei iii 9
4.2 Messages ーー EE EEE E RE RAP RER Ret 10
5 SERVICE MENU il

6 SPARE PARTS 12
6.1 Spare Parts List... sn 12
6.2 Exploded View of Module nn 14
7 EARLIER REVISIONS 16
Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
The AS/3 Recorder Module, M-REC, and the built-in Recorder,
of the AS/3 Compact Monitor, F-CMREC, provide real time
printing of waveform and numerical data, and also trend data.

The Recorder module and the built-in Recorder are technically

the same, the only difference is that the M-REC is placed in a
module box, and the F-CMREC is placed in the AS/3 Compact
Monitor frame. In the following they both are referred to as the
recorder.

NOTES:

* Printings on thermal paper may be destroyed when

exposed to light, heat, alcohol etc. Take a photocopy for
archive.

The Recorder module cannot be used in the Extension

Frame, F-EXT4.

II-REC-1
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

I SPECIFICATIONS
Module size 75x 180 x 112 mm
WxDxH 3.0x7.1x44in

Module weight 0.9 kg/ 2 Ibs

Power consumption 3W
Principle Thermal array

Print resolution:
Vertical 8 dots/mm (200 dots/inch)
Horizontal 32 dots/mm (800 dots/inch) at speed of
25 mm/s and slower

Paper width 50 mm, printing width 48 mm

Traces Selectable 1, 2, or 3 traces

Print speed 1, 6.25, 12.5, 25 mm/s

II-REC-2
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Recorder Board

In general

The task of the Recorder board inside the Recorder is to connect

it to the module bus. Additionally, three front panel keys are
connected through the board io the recorder.

In the module the recorder and the Recorder board are

connected together with a small connector board and 12-pin fex-
strip cable.

External communication

Communication with the host processor takes place in +5 V

CMOS-level serial communication B-channel and with RS485-
reset.

Reset

Differential RS485-reset from the module bus is transferred to

mod-bus-reset signal in the board. Besides, the board has its
own power-up-reset, whose time constant is about 0.1 seconds.
The RESET-signal is active when either the mod-bus-reset or the
power-up-reset is active.

+5 V priority

The recorder supply voltage of +15 VREC is switched on after

+5 V is present.

Front panel keys

The recorder can read up to three keys and pass their status on
to the host processor in serial communication.

For protecting the key switch signals from static discharges,

there are zener diodes and series resistance option. Pull-up
resistor is not needed because there are pull-up resistors
connecting the key switch signal inputs and +5 V together inside
the recorder.

II-REC-3
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual -

Recorder Board i

Power-up Reset
reset logic Reseti

; RS-485-Reset ; Recorder
Module ¡Serial interface i
mother i :
board i+15V TT + 15УВЕС i

+5V

Front :
panel i Switches
membrane i
switch

Figure 1 Recorder Board Block Diagram

II-REC-4
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

2.2 Module Bus Connector Configuration

Rear panel 25-pin female D-connector in the M-REC

PinNo {YO | Signal

1 I RESET_RS485
2 Not connected
3 I +15 VDIRTY*
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 Not connected
7 Ground & Shield
8 I -RESET_RS485
9 ο CTSB
10 I RTSB
11 O RXDB
12 I TXDB
13 Ground & Shield
14 Not connected
15 I GroundDIRTY
16 Not connected
17 Not connected
18 Not connected
19 Not connected
20 Not connected
21 Not connected
22 Not connected
23 Not connected
24 I +5 VDC
25 I +5 VDC
I = in, O =out of the Recorder

II-REC-5
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES

3.1 General Service Information

Usually field service of the Recorder is limited to replacing the
faulty circuit boards or mechanical parts. The boards are then
returned to Datex-Engstrom for repair.

Datex-Engstrom is always available for service advice. Please

provide the unit serial number, full type designation, and a
detailed fault description.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with appropriate equipment

shall perform the tests and repairs outlined in this section.
Unauthorized service may void warranty of the unit.
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

3.2 Preventive Maintenance Checks

Perform these checks after any service and at least once a year to
keep the Recorder in good condition.

1. Visual inspection of the module

If the module is disassembled, check that grounding

wires and all connectors are properly connected and
there is no loose object inside the module before attaching
the module box.

2. Functional checks (for F-CMREC only steps that are

applicable)

Insert the module into Frame where there is at least

ESTP/EST/ETP module. Turn the power on. No error
message appears.

Check the functions of the Record Wave and Stop keys.

Pull out the module. Reinsert the module while the
power is still on. Check the functions of the Record Wave
and Stop keys again.

Press Recorder and Recorder Setup keys. Choose 20

seconds as recording length and 6.25 mm/s as paper
speed. Start printing by Record Wave key. The length of
printout should be 12.5 + 1 cm.

Change paper speed to 12.5. The length should be 37.5 +

3 em.
Change paper speed to 25. The length should be 75 + 6
cm.

Press Recorder key and set up the following with the

ComWheel:

Waveform 1 ECG1
Waveform 2 OFF
Waveform 3 OFF

Press Record Wave key. The printout should fill the

paper and lines should be unbroken.

TI-REC-7
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly

Disassemble the Recorder module in the following way. See the
exploded view of the module:

a) Remove the two screws from the back of the module.

b) Pull the module box slowly rearward and detach it from

main body. Be careful with loose latch and spring pin for
locking.

c) Open paper loading hatch of the recorder. With a long

blade screwdriver loosen the two screws at the bottom of
the recorder housing.

d) Disconnect 50-pin connector from the back of the

recorder and 5-pin ribbon connector of keypad from the
Recorder board.

Now the recorder and front panel frame can be pulled out of the
main body. The front panel frame is slipped out of the recorder
by pulling rearward.

The Recorder board is attached to the metal chassis with four

screws.

CAUTION: In the M-REC the Recorder board is fixed to the

metal chassis at the factory in a position that gives best contact
of the D-connectors. The board and the chassis must not be
separated.

Before disassembling the F-CMREC the AS/3 Compact Monitor

Frame must be opened, see the corresponding service manual.

Н-ВЕС-8
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

4 TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 Troubleshooting chart

PROBLEM CAUSE TREATMENT
Module not responding to | Membrane switch cable Check the cable. Replace
front panel keys, but loose or broken. the front panel if
operates through Recorder necessary.
menu. M-REC: Flex-strip cable
broken. Check the cable. Replace
if necessary.
M-REC: Bad contact on
connector board. Check contact.
Recorder will not start. M-REC: Module not Reinsert the Module
No error messages shown. | properly inserted. properly.

M-REC: Flex-strip cable Check the cable. Replace

broken. if necessary.

M-REC: Connector board Check connector board

loose. connections.

Recorder board faulty. Replace the board.

Recorder faulty. Replace the Recorder.

Recorder works but nothing | Active side of the paper Turn the paper roll.
appears on the paper. downwards.*

Recorder faulty. Replace the Recorder.

To test which side is active: Place the paper on a hard
surface and draw a line with a finger nail. On the active
(thermal) side appears a dark line.

II-REC-9
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

4.2 Messages
MESSAGE EXPLANATION

Recorder: out of paper Release paper jam or insert a roll of paper into the
recorder.

Recorder: cover open Close the recorder cover correctly.

Recorder: thermal array Recorder overheated. Stop using and cool it down.
overheat

Recorder: input voltage low +15 Vrec is too low. Check flex-strip cable and
connector board.

Recorder: input voltage high +15 Vrec is too high. Check flex-strip cable and
connector board.

Recorder system error System error. Remove the Recorder Module and reinsert
1,2,3 it.

Recorder: module Insert the Recorder Module into the Central Unit.
removed

TI-REC-10
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

5 SERVICE MENU
There is no service menu for the Recorder module.

II-REC-11
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS

6.1 Spare Parts List

NOTE: Only changed part numbers are listed under later
revisions. To find the desired part: check first the list of the
revision that corresponds your device. If the part is not listed
there, check the previous revision, etc. until you find the right
number.

NOTE: Accessories are listed in the booklet AS/3 Supplies and

Accessories.

Item numbers refer to the exploded view in chapter 6.2.

Recorder Module, M-REC

Rev. 00

Item Item description Order No.

6 Recorder board, M-REC (Rev.00) *(880313) Use 883384
7 Recorder *90350
8 50-pin connector cable, M-REC 879362
4 Front panel unit, M-REC 881328
Membrane keypad 879372
10 Front panel sticker, M-REC (Eng) 879483
10 Front panel sticker, M-REC (Ger) 880486
10 Front panel sticker, M-REC (Fre) 880172
1 Module box (wide) 886168
3 Latch 879181
2 Spring pin 879182
9 etal chassis (879179) Use 883384
5 Cross recess screw M3x8 black 616215
Rev. 01

Item Item description Order No.

9 Metal chassis with recorder board *(881964) Use
883384

II-REC-12
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

Rev. 02

Item Item description Order No.

9 Metal chassis with recorder board *883384

11 Metal cover plate, M-REC 885292
10 Front panel sticker, M-REC (Spa) 884388
10 Front panel sticker, M-REC (Swe) 885869
10 Front panel sticker, M-REC (Dut) 886066
10 Front panel sticker, M-REC (Ita) 886761
10 Front panel sticker, M-REC (Fin) 888875

* = the part is recommended for stock

IT-REC-13
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

6.2 Exploded View of Module

Figure 2 Exploded View of Module Box

T-REC-14
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual
on,

11

Figure 3 Exploded View of Recorder Module

II-REC-15
 Datex-Engstrom AS/3 M-REC
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
For service information on the earlier revisions, please refer to:

Recorder Module revision 00 Service Manual p/n 880850

Recorder Module revision 01 Service Manual p/n 882580

II-REC-16
Extension Frame, F-EXT4 (Rev. 01)

Extension Module, M-EXT (Rev. 00)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 885938-2

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

A
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION I
1 SPECIFICATIONS 2
2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
2.1 External Connector Configuration .............rrerererensesereserernecrerererecrererererecererarerarenane 5
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES 7
3.1 Disassembly and Reassembly ss 8
3.2 Changingthefuse...................................... eee erme erener 8
4 TROUBLESHOOTING 9
5 SERVICE MENU 10
6 SPARE PARTS LE
IA A 11
6.2 Exploded View of Extension Frame...
cr narnia nro 12
7 EARLIER REVISIONS 13
Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
The Extension Frame provides four additional module slots, and
enables taking the measuring modules near to the patient. The
Extension Frame is connected to the AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
with the Extension Module, which reserves one module slot.

NOTE:

* Only one F-EXT4 can be connected to the monitor at a

time.

* The Recorder Module, M-REC, and Memory Module, M-

MEM cannot be used in the Extension Frame.

Do not use identical modules simultaneously in the

Extension Frame and the monitor.

* When the Extension Frame is used with the AS/3

Anaesthesia Monitor the Central Unit must be of Rev. 03
(F-CU8-XX-03).

Part II-Extension-1
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

I SPECIFICATIONS
Frame size Wx DxH 160x205 x 137 mm
(w/module) 160 x 228 x 137 mm

Frame weight 13kg

Power consumption: 35 W (max at input voltage of +32 V)

with ESTP and NIBP modules inserted
and NIBP pump working.

Module size 37 x 180 x 112 mm

(WxDxH) 1.5х7.1х4.4ш

Part II-Extension-2
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The Extension Frame, F-EXT4, contains the Module mother
board, Power supply board, and space for four single-width or
two double-width AS/3 modules. See figure 1.

The electronic unit receives +32 V from the AS/3 monitor frame
and generates from it necessary operational voltages for the
inserted AS/3 modules.

The received +32 V is passed through fuse (F1) and filtered and
led to power supply components.
There is overvoltage and undervoltage protection for input
voltage, the input voltage is set so that it can vary between +18.5
V and +36.0 V.

The purpose of the soft start is to raise input voltage +32 V

slowly (about 1 second) to the maximum value so that
capacitors in power supply components’ circuits have time to
get charged. This enables E-EXT4 to be connected to AS/3
monitor frame during operation.

There is also overvoltage protection for outgoing supply

voltages. The overvoltage limits are +5.95 V (+5 V) and +17.50 V
(+15 Vd).

Signal routes

There are two connectors which are used for data

communications ( RS485), for supply voliages (+32 V, +15 Vd,
+15 Va, and +5 V), for grounds connections (GNDD,
GND&SHIELD) between the Power supply board and Module
mother board.

Part II-Extension-3
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

Four D-Connectors For AS/3 Modules

Module Mother Board

VERVOLTAGE

©
ROTECTION
+15 V SWITCHINGÝH 15 VA < my
OR OUTGOING
OLTAGES

+15 Va
+5 У

-15V
POWER SUPPLY

CONVERTER
DC/DC
+32 V

DATA
AND UNDERVOLTAGE

REMOTE ON/OFF
+32 VIOVERVOLTAGE
PROTECTION

CONTROL
START
SOFT

Monitor Frame

Figure 1 F-EXT Electronics Unit Block Diagram

Part IT-Extension-4
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

2.1 External Connector Configuration

Extension Frame Rear panel 12-pin male DIN-connector (X1)

Pin No ΠΟ | Signal
A I RESET_RS485
B I/O |-DATA RS485
c 1/0 | DATA RS485
D I -RESET RS485
E BITOIN
F N/C
G I +32 VDC
H I Gnd and Shield
J N/C
K N/C
L 1+32 VDC
M I GndD

Part M-Extension-5
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

Extension module rear panel 25-pin female D-connector (X1)

Pin No vO Signal
1 I RESET_RS485*
2 I -15 VDC*
3 I +15 VDIRTY*
4 I +15 VDC*
5 I/O |-DATA_RS485*
6 I/O ¡DATA_RS485*
7 Ground & Shield*
8 I -RESET_RS485*
9 I CTSB
10 O RTSB
11 I RXDB
12 ο TXDB
13 Ground & Shieid*
14 I +32 VDIRTY*
15 I GroundDIRTY*
16 I CTSC
17 0 RISC
18 I RXDC
19 O TXDC
20 ON/STANDBY*
21 BITOIN*
22 RXDD_RS232
23 TXDD_RS232
24 I +5 VDC*
25 I +5 VDC*
* Used in the Extension Frame and Module

Part IT-Extension-6
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES
Field service of the Extension Frame, F-EXT4, is limited to
replacing the faulty circuit boards or mechanical parts. Return
the faulty boards to Datex for repair.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide the

unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed fault
description.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with the appropriate tools

and equipment shall perform the tests and repairs outlined in
this section. Unauthorized service may void warranty of the
unit.

Part II-Extension-7
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

3.1 Disassembly and Reassembly

Disassemble the Extension Frame, F-EXT4 in the following way.
See the exploded view in chapter 6.2

a) Remove the four screws from the front of the frame. PC

boards’ block is detached.

b) Remove the four screws from Module mother board with

which it is attached to the rear frame.

c) Lift carefully Module mother board and Power supply

board attached to it and detach the two connectors under
the Power supply board.

3.2 Changing the Fuse

Disassemble as described above. Fuse is located on the Power
supply board.

Replace the fuse by the one with the same type and rating.

Part II-Extension-8
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

4 TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

F-EXT4 does not work. | Connector not connected Check connectors.
properly.
Cable /Extension module is | Check cable/module.
faulty.
F-EXT4 does not work. | Incoming voltage too high | Adjust the voltage to within
or too low. the range. See the voltage
limits in the text.

F-EXT4 does not work. | PC board(s) faulty. Check the fuse on the
Power supply board

Check the PC boards and

their connections.

Change Power supply

board.

Fuse on Power supply Short-circuit in output Change the fuse. Remove

board is blown voltages. AS/3 modules and turn
repeatedly. power on.
If works, AS/3 module is
faulty.
If not, check the PC boards.
Change Power supply
board.

Part II-Extension-9
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

5 SERVICE MENU
There is no service menu for Extension frame checking.

Part Il-Extension-10
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS

6.1 Spare Parts List

NOTE: Only changed part numbers are listed under later
revisions. To find the desired part: check first the list of the
revision that corresponds your device. If the part is not listed
there, check the previous revision, etc. until you find the right
number.

NOTE: Accessories are listed in the booklet AS/3 Supplies and

Accessories.

Item numbers refer to the exploded view in chapter 6.2.

4-Module Extension Frame, F-EXT4

Rev. 01

Item description Order No.

m
=
や
B

Module mother board, F-EXT4 884839

Power supply board, É-EXT4 *884840
TO

Frame with rubber pads 881233

Pad 65144
FA ES

Rear frame 881234

Fuse T2.5A fast *51118
Internal connector cable 884838
TON

Cross cylinder-head screw M3x6 61721

Cross cylinder-head screw M3x12 61736
OO NO

Nut bushing M3x9 640455

Extension Module, M-EXT

Item Item description Order No.

1 Module box (single width) 879095
3 Sone 879181

Cross:
2 879182
5 TOSS cess screw M3x8 black 616215

* = the part is recommended for stock

Part II-Extension-11
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

6.2 Exploded View of Extension Frame

Figure 2. Exploded View of the Extension Frame

Part II-Extension-12
 Datex AS/3 Extension Frame and Module
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
This manual fully supports earlier revision of F-EXT4.

Part H-Extension-13
Memory Module, M-MEM ( Rev. 01)

Memory Board, B-CMMEM (Rev. 01)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 885939-2

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION I
I SPECIFICATIONS 3
1.1 General Specifications iii 3
1.2 Technical Specifications sn 3
2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 4
2.1 Memory Module M-MEM........................... iii 5
2.1.1 Memory Module Board sn 5
212 LEDBoard......................... „7
2.2 Memory Board,B-CMMEM................. eee erer 7
2.2.1 B-CMMEM Board iii 7
2.2.2 Connector Board... 7
2.3 Connectors and Signals..…...............................
nn 8
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES 10
3.1 General Service Information en eeoee eee e nete tea nene 10
3.2 Preventive Maintenance Checks….…...............ssssss 1
3.3 ПАваззетЬу ап4 ВеаззетЬу .......... лилии 13
4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14
4.2 Troubleshooting Charts... sn 14
5 SERVICE MENU 15
51 ModuleStatus.................... een 16
5.2 COMMUNICATION... ri 18
6 SPARE PARTS
6.1 Spare Parts List... ss eeaereanenez
6.2 Exploded View of Module
7 EARLIER REVISIONS
Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
AS/3 Memory Module (M-MEM) is an optional data storage
module for AS/3 family monitors. It is used for storing patient
related physiological data, discrete record keeping events, menu
configurations and user defined monitor configurations in
removable PCMCIA! compatible memory cards.

Memory module can be utilized in the following applications:

1. As a backup media for patient related physiological and

record keeping data.

2. As a local menu server for the monitor it is attached to.

3. A Memory card with its previously recorded patient data

can be transported to a new monitor location with the
patient enabling continuous data collection.

4. To save and load user defined monitor configurations.

The memory module is available in two versions:

1. Single-width external plug-in Memory Module M-MEM for

AS/3 Monitors.

2. Internal memory board B-CMMEM for AS/3 Compact

Monitor.

The two versions share the same electronics and software.

However, because of the special space requirements of the
Compact Monitor, the internal version of the module has
different printed circuit board layout and mechanical design.

The internal version of the module will use one PC board slot in
the AS/3 Compact Monitor.

Memory module has two card slots, which use rewritable

PCMCIA-ATA specification compatible memory cards: Data
and Menu MemCards.

The Data card is used for storing patient related data and record
keeping events, and the Menu card is used as a storage media
for pre-recorded menu configurations and user defined monitor

Part H-Memory-1
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

configuration. If the module is used only for data backup and

transportation, the Menu card is not necessarily required.
Similarly, if only record keeping configurations are needed,
Data card does not have to be present. In the latter case,
however, no physiological or event data can be stored ina
memory card.

Module software runs under MS-DOS’ compatible operating

system provided by Datalight’ . The files created in Data and
Menu MemCards are MS-DOS compatible.

The communication between the monitor CPU and the Memory

module is performed through high-speed internal TTL level RS-
232 serial interface. Data transfer rate is 76.8 kbits/second.

1 Personal Computer Memory Card International Association

2 MS-DOS is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation
3 Datalight is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.

NOTE: Memory Module, M-MEM, cannot be used in the

Extension Frame, F-EXTA.

NOTE: The M-MEM rev. 00 uses Microsoft Dos Flash File

System (FFS) compatible cards only.

NOTE: S-STD95/S-ARK95 and later main software revisions

support only PCMCIA-ATA cards (used in the M-MEM rev. 01)
not Flash File cards.

S-STD94/S-ARK94 software supports Flash File cards ( used in

M-MEM rev. 00) not PCMCIA-ATA cards.

Part U-Memory-2
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

| SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 General Specifications

M-MEM
Module size: 37 x 180 x 112 mm
(WxDxH) 15x71x44in

Module weight: 0.4 kg / 1.0 lbs

Total power: 2W maximum

B-CMMEM

Module size: 30 x 170 x 108 mm

(WxDxH) 1.2 х 6.7 х 4.3 шт

Module weight: 0.3 kg / 0.6 Ibs

Total power: 2W maximum

1.2 Technical Specifications

MemCard capacity: 5 Mbytes

Data storage capacity: 5 days of continuous

physiological data trends

Operating system: Datalight ROM-DOS

File system: MS-DOS compatible

MemCards: PCMCIA-ATA compatible

memory cards

Part П-Метоту-3
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The Memory Module M-MEM contains MEM PC board and a
small LED (light emitting diode) PC board attached to the front
panel.

The front panel has a dual PCMCIA card connector for two
Datex AS/3 MemCards. Above the card slots there are two push
buttons for removing the MemCards from the module, and two
memory card specific LEDs. The LEDs are on during memory
card read and write operations to notify the user not to remove
them until the operation is complete.

The internal module contains B-CMMEM PC board and a

connector to a PC board that connects the B-CMMEM to the
module bus.

B-CMMEM contains the same components as the MEM PC

board with the following differences:

1. B-CMMEM does not contain a module bus connector.

2. B-CMMEM contains a 14-pin connector to a separate

connector PC board that is connected directly to the AS/3 bus.

NOTE: Memory Module M-MEM (rev. 00) and B-CMMEM (rev.

00) requires support of Main Software S-STD94 or S-ARK94 and
cannot be used together with later main software versions.

Part II-Memory-4
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

2.1 Memory Module M-MEM

2.1.1 Memory Module Board

Processor Section
Basically, Memory module is a single board PC with
unnecessary I/O functions removed. The processor is Intel
80C186 compatible and the software runs under DOS operating
system. Operating frequency is 16 MHz. The board has 512
kbytes RAM, 448 kbytes ROM, 128 bytes EEPROM and
associated buffer circuits for memory operations.

Intel 82365SL compatible PC Card Interface Controller (PCIC)

provides all the functions needed in MemCard operations.
Serial communication, EEPROM read and write operations and
LED control is accomplished through a QUART circuit. In
addition, processor board contains circuitry to control reset
signals and MemCard programming voltages.

Memory module board block diagram is shown in Figure 1.

PCMCIA Card Interface

MEM has PCMCIA compatible card sockets for two MemCards.
Both sockets consist of 60 signal and 8 power connections.
MemCards are PCMCIA-ATA compatible, and their memory
capacity is 5 Mbytes.

NOTE: Memory Module M-MEM (rev. 00) and B-CMMEM (rev.

00) are not supporting use of PCMCIA-ATA MemCards.

All MemCard read and write operations as well as card power

management are controlled by PCIC interface controller.

Card removals and insertions are also detected by the interface

controller.

MemCard files are MS-DOS compatible and they can be copied

for archival with any MS-DOS compatible computer equipped
with PCMCIA-ATA specification compatible card drive.

Part II-Memory-5
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

» ADDRESS fret ADDRESS 『

PROCESSOR LATCHES ADDRESS/DA’ | RECORD
30C186X TUS $ CONTROL|LOGIC

+ —

GONTROL dara BUFFER

gus
DATA BUS
$— 05 MBSTATICRAM

SERIAL, D casks FLASH

EEPROM & LED MEMORY
CONTROL

SERIAL
COMMUNICATION

MODULE BU Г. 1
CONNECTOR! POWER &
RESET, +5V & RESET

= CONTROL

~ ~ J 1.
DATA
BUFFERS | ADDRESS BUFFER!

PCMCIA MEMORY CARD | i | |

CONTROLLER

MEMORY. 一 -ARD DATA

CARD ]
POWER
[CONTROL | CARDCONTROL

Γ DUAL SLOT PCMCIA MEMORY

CARD CONNECTOR
CARD
κ |
— 아아

Figure 1 Memory Module Block Diagram

Part Il-Memorv-6
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

Serial Communication
Serial communication between the module and host monitor is
done through module bus TTL-level RS-232 interface. Data
transfer rate is 76.8 kbits/second.

RS485 type monitor reset signal is converted to module reset by

an interface transceiver, and power reset is generated by a reset
circuit.

Power Supply
Module receives its power (+5V, +15V) from the host monitor.
PCMCIA card programming voltage + 12V is generated from
+15V by voltage regulators. Card programming voltage is
controlled by an interface controller. Otherwise, only +5V
power is used in the module. Maximum power consumption is
2 Watts.

2.1.2 LED Board

LED board contains only two yellow light emitting diodes and a
three-lead cable to the MEM PC board.

2.2 Memory Board, B-CMMEM

2.2.1 B-CMMEM Board

Differences between Memory Module Board and B-

CMMEM
Module signals are taken to B-CMMEM through a separate
connector board that is connected to the module bus. B-
CMMEM is connected to the connector board by a 14-lead
connector board cable.

Otherwise Memory module PC board and B-CMMEM PC board

have the same components.

2.2.2 Connector Board

B-CMMEM connector board connects B-CMMEM to the AS/3
bus. It contains only CPU bus connector that is connected to the

Part II-Memory-7
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

CPU Mother board, connector to B-CMMEM, and filtering

capacitors for +5V and +15V power supply lines.

2.3 Connectors and Signals

Module rear panel 25-pin female D-connector (X1)

Pin No | WO | Signal
1 I | RESET RS485*
2 1 | -15 VDC
3 I | +15 VDIRTY
4 Т | +15 VDC*
5 - |-DATA RS485
6 - |DATA RS485
7 - | Ground & Shield”
8 I |-RESET RS485*
9 I |CTSB
10 O |RTSB
11 I | RXDB
12 O | TXDB
13 - | Ground & Shield”
14 I |+32 VDIRTY
15 I |GroundDIRTY
16 O |CTSC*
17 I |RTSC*
18 O |RXDC*
19 I TXDC*
20 - | ON/STANDBY
21 - | BITOIN
22 - RXDD RS232
23 - | TXDD RS232
24 I +5 VDC*
25 T_1+5 VDC*

* Used in MEM module

LED board connector (X5)

Pin No ¡VO | Signal

1 O | +5V
2 O | LEDI control
3 O | LED? control

Part II-Memory-8
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

Connector board 14-pin connector (X1)

Pin No | WO | Signal
1 I | Ground & Shield”
2 I | Ground & Shield”
3 I |-RESET RS485*
4 1 | +15 VDC*
5 I | RESET RS485*
6 O | CTSC*
7 1 | RISC*
8 O | RXDC*
9 I | TXDC*
10 - | М/С
11 - | М/С
12 - | М/С
13 I | +5 VDC*
14 I |45VDG*

Part П-Метогу-9
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES

3.1 General Service Information

Field service for the Memory module is limited to replacing
faulty PC boards, MemCards or mechanical parts. The faulty PC
boards and MemCards are then returned to Datex for repair.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide the

unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed fault
description.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with the appropriate tools

and eguipment shall perform the tests and repairs outlined in
this section. Unauthorized service may void warranty of the
unit.

Part II-Memory-10
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

3.2 Preventive Maintenance Checks

We recommend you to perform these checks at least once a year
and after any service to keep the Memory Module in good
condition.

Items marked (M-MEM) are valid for external Memory Module,

M-MEM, only.

1. Visual inspection

o If the module is disassembled, check that all connectors

are properly connected and that there are no loose objects
inside the module before attaching the module box (M-
MEM).

2. Functional checks

Li Insert the module in the monitor frame (M-MEM).

o Turn the power on by ON/STBY-switch and wait until

the waveform fields appear on the screen.

o Insert MemCard labelled 'Menu' in the left hand side card

slot.

_: Confirm that the led above the menu card slot turns
briefly on (M-MEM).

_ Confirm that a text "Menu card inserted’ appears on the

message field of the monitor display.

—: Confirm that a white menu card symbol appears on the

upper right hand corner of the monitor display.(*

—: Insert MemCard labelled ‘Data’ in the right hand side slot

of the module.

—: Confirm that the led above the data card slot turns briefly
on (M-MEM).

-: Confirm that a text Data card inserted' appears on the

message field of the monitor display.

Part Ii-Memory-11
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

_ Confirm that a green Data card symbol appears on the

upper right hand corner of the monitor display.(*

—: Pull out the module. The card symbols disappear within

35 seconds, and a text Memory Module removed’
appears on the message field of the monitor display (M-
MEM).

i Reinsert the module while the power is still on. Memory

Module removed’ text disappears and card symbols
appear again on the display (M-MEM).

_: Go into Service Menu, Service View, Modules, Memory

Module, Communication and check the functions.

*NOTE: Battery symbol will override card symbols in Compact

Monitor.

Part II-Memory-12
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly

The Memory module is disassembled in the following way. See
section 6.2 for the exploded view of the module.

a) Remove the two screws from the back of the module.

b) Pull the module box slowly to detach it from main body. Be

careful with loose latch and spring pin for locking.

c) Remove the two screws that are located on the module bus
connector and the screws that connect the front panel frame
to the Memory board.

d) Disconnect the LED board cable and remove the front panel
frame.

e) Remove the EMC cover carefully from around the Memory

board.

f) Reassemble the module in reverse order.

CAUTION: When reassembling the module, make sure the

cables, especially the LED board cable, are reconnected
properly.

Part II-Memory-13
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

4 TROUBLESHOOTING

4.2 Troubleshooting Charts

Memory Module

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

Memory module Module removed from monitor | Insert module in the
removed -message frame. module frame.
Possible error in data Remove module briefly
communication between the from the monitor. Insert
module and the monitor. module back to monitor
frame.
Memory module error Module has detected an error If message persists, remove
-message condition. module for repair.

Memory module comm. | Module not properly attached Check module attachment.
error -message to monitor frame.

Memory cards

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

Two Data Cards in mem. | Two Data cards detected. Remove MemCard from the left
module -message hand side slot of the module.

Two Menu Cards in mem. | Two Menu cards detected. Remove MemCard from the
module -message right hand side slot of the
module.

No menus in Menu Card | There are no menus in the Insert a Menu card with valid
-message Menu card. menu configuration files in the
module.

Faulty Data Card - change | An error has occurred during | Change Data card.
card Data card read/write
operation

Faulty Menu Card - An error has occurred during | Change Menu card.
change card Menu card read/ write
operation

Part П-Метогу-14
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

5 SERVICE MENU

Monitor Setup Honitor Setup

Screen 1 Setup Install/Service
Screen 2 Setup 100 Units
Cardiac Bypass OFF Service View 25 1
Set Time and Date Save As Defaults
Instali/Service | 16 Interfacing
Normal Screen Analog Outputs
Power Frequency 50 Hz

Screen 2 HiRes
Previous Menu

Give password. -
| Give password.

To enter Service Menu during normal operation:

1. Press the MONITOR SETUP key.

The Setup menu appears.

Turn ComWheel to highlight Install/ Service and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 16 - 4 - 34.
The Install/Service menu appears.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 26 - 23 - 8.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Modules and push.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Memory Module and

push.

Part Ц-Метогу-15
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

5.1 Module Status

Memory Module Hodule Status
Module Status Module present YES
一 一 Hodule active YES
Communication
ROM OK
Previous Menu RAM OK
PEMCTA OK
EEPROM OK
SLOT SLOT2
Card type MENU DATA
File system ATA АТА
Card size 5074 kB 5074 kB
Card used 905 kB 16 kB
Card full № NG
Card empty NO NG
Nor of files 260 5
Oldest file 23 Dec 1994 8 Apr 1995
Newest file 6 Apr 1995 8 Apr 1995
Read error № NO
Write error NO NO

Detailed Description
Module present indicates whether the module is firmly
attached to the monitor. Possible values are YES and NO.

Module active indicates whether the module services are

available. Possible values are YES and NO.

ROM indicates the status of the ROM memory of the module.

Possible values are OK and ERR.

RAM indicates the status of the RAM memory of the module.

Possible values are OK and ERR.

PCMCIA indicates the status of the PCMCIA controller of the

module. Possible values are OK and ERR.

EEPROM indicates the status of the EEPROM memory of the

module. Possible values are OK and ERR.

SLOT1 and SLOT2 indicates the left hand slot and the right
hand slot , respectively.

Card type indicates whether the card is MENU or DATA card.

If duplicated card is inserted, type DUPL.

Part II-Memory-16
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

File system indicates the type of the used memory card. The
only supported file system is ATA. If a memory card using
another file system is used, the message UNKNOWN is shown.
If the card is poorly attached, the message LOOSE is shown.

Card size indicates the total amount of the disk space in the card
in kilobytes.

Card used indicates the total amount of the used disk space in
the card in kilobytes.

Card full indicates whether the all disc space in the card is used.
Possible values are YES and NO.

Card empty indicates the lack of menu files in the MENU card
or no files in the DATA card. Possible values are YES and NO.

Nbr of files tells the amount of the files stored in the card.

Oldest file tells the date of the oldest file in the card.

Newest file tells the date of the newest file in the card.

Read error indicates whether the reading from the card has
failed. Possible values are YES and NO.

Write error indicates whether the writing to the card has failed.
Possible values are YES and NO.

All values can be ‘- - -’ to indicate ‘No data available’.

NOTE: This menu is related to S-STD95/S-ARK95 Main

Software. If S-STD94/S-ARK94 Main Software is used, only
Communication menu is available (SERVICE
VIEW /MONITOR/COMMUNICATION /MEMORY
MODULE).

Part II-Memory-17
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

5.2 Communication
r
Memory Module Communication
Hoduie Status Inteface status ACTIVE

-
hessare tes
Record K 97
Ré 98
Previous Menu File Gp. 0 0
Service Ů 5
Modes 0 Ú
Module status 5 5
Packets total 102 103
Bytes total 6203 35142

Timeouts 0
Chksum err O
Length err 0
buplicated 0

Detailed Description
Interface status indicates the status of data link between the
monitor and memory module. If memory module is properly
attached, the status should always be on (‘ACTIVE’). If status
blinks between 'ACTIVE' and 'CLOSED’, a communications
error has occurred: remove module briefly, and insert it back to
the monitor frame to check if error disappears.

Message types indicates the type of data packets that have been
sent (Tx) and received (Rx) since last monitor start. Data types
are listed on the lines below 'Message types’ text.

Record K indicates the communication between the Monitor

and Record Keeper.

File Operation indicates the operations of Patient data.

Service indicates the Memory Module operations.

Modes indicates the User Mode operations.

Packets total indicates the total amount of data packets that

have been sent/received since last monitor start.

Part Н-Метогу-18
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

Bytes total indicates the total amount of data bytes that have
been sent/received since last monitor start.

The last four lines indicates transmission errors:

‧ Timeouts indicates the number of time-outs that have

occurred in memory module data transmission since last
monitor start.

‧ Chksum err indicates the number of checksum errors in

data packets from memory module since last monitor start.

e Lenght err indicates the number of data packets with

erroneous length from the memory module since last
monitor start.

・ Duplicated indicates the number of duplicate data packets

from the memory module since last monitor start.

Part II-Memory-19
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS

6.1 Spare Parts List

NOTE: Only changed part numbers are listed under later
revisions. To find the desired part: check first the list of the
revision that corresponds your device. If the part is not listed
there, check the previous revision, etc. until you find the right
number.

NOTE: Accessories are listed in the catalogue AS/3 Supplies

and Accessories.

Item numbers refer to the exploded view in chapter 6.2.

Memory Module, M-MEM

Rev. 00

Item Item description Order No.

Memory board, M-MEM *883509
N

Front panel sticker, M-MEM 884597

AAR

Front panel frame, M-MEM 883838

LED board, M-MEM 885252
Module box (single width) 886167
WRN

Latch 879181
Spring pin 879182
WOUON

etal frame 879184

Cross recess screw M3x8 black 616215
Cross cylinder-head screw M3x6 61721
Cross cylinder-head screw M3x12 628700
EMC cover, M-MEM 885860
Insulation plate, M-MEM 886656
Slotted cylinder-head screw 4-40 UNCx1/4 61371

Memory Card, Menu (Eng) *885195

Memory Card, Data (Eng *885196
Memory Card, Menu (Fre) *885552
Memory Card, Data (Fre) *885553

Part II-Memory-20
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

Rev. 01

‘Item description Order No.

Memory Card, Menu (Eng) *887044
Memory Card, Data (Eng *887045
Memory Card, Menu (Fre) *887046
Memory Card, Data (Fre) *887047

NOTE: The memory cards listed above require revision 01 module, and S-
STD95/ARK95 or later software.
Memory Board, B-CMMEM
Item description Order No.

Connection board, B-CMMEM 885680

Memory Card, Menu (Eng) *887044
Memory Card, Data (Eng) *887045
Memory Card, Menu (Fre) *887046
Memory Card, Data (Fre) *887047

* = the part is recommended for stock

Part II-Memory-21
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

6.2 Exploded View of Module

Figure 2 Exploded View of Module Box

Part IH-Memory-22
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

Figure 3 Exploded View of Memory Module, M-MEM

Part II-Memory-23
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

Figure 4 EMC cover

Part II-Memory-24
 Datex AS/3 M-MEM, B-CMMEM
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
All main differences of Memory Module, M-MEM (rev.00) , B-
CMMEM (rev.00) and M-MEM (rev.01) , B-CMMEM (rev.01) are
noted in this manual.

Part II-Memory-25
Nelicor Compatible Saturation Module, M-NSAT (Rev. Ol)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Doc. no. 885940-3

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION I

I SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 General Specifications
1.2 Typical Performance
2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 3
2.1 NSAT Interface board
2.1.1 ο πο seen
2.1.2 Power supply, non-isolated section...
2.1.3 Power supply, isolated section
214 Optoisolation....................... eee eeeeseememareseseeseaseeneaseenen
2.1.5 Microprocessor, UART, Non-volatile memory..
2.2 Connectors and Signals
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES 8
3.1 General Service Hmforrnato ses een 8
3.2 Visual inspection.....................
3.3 Functional checks
4. TROUBLESHOOTING 10
41Troubleshootingchart................................ een 11
5 SERVICE VIEW 12
5.1 M-NSAT Service ment eee тети ини нитииишииианетлнинияи 13
6 SPARE PARTS 15
6.1 Spare part ο σσ ου 15
6.2 Exploded μμ. sense 17
7 EARLIER REVISIONS 19
Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
The Datex AS/3 Nellcor Compatible Saturation Module is a
single width plug-in module for use with the AS/3 monitors.
The module utilizes Nellcor's pulse oximetry algorithm and is
designed to be used with Nellcor's pulse oximetry transducers
only. Only one pulse oximetry source at a time is allowed by the
AS/3 monitors. If M-ESTPR (or M-ESTR) and M-NSAT modules
are plugged in the monitor simultaneously, then M-NSAT
overrides M-ESTPR (or M-ESTR) as a pulse oximetry source.

Part II- NSAT-1

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

I SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 General Specifications

Module size: 37 x 180 x 112 mm
(WxDxH) 15x7.1x44in

Module weight: 0.4 kg / 1 lbs

Power consumption 3W

1.2 Typical Performance

SpOz:
Measurement range 40 to 100 %
Accuracy 100 to 80 %: +2 digits
(% +1 SD) *) 80 to 50 %: +3 digits
50 to 40 %: unspecified
Resolution 1 digit = 1 %
Display averaging 5...7 8
Pulse beep pitch Varies with SpO» level

The monitor is calibrated over the measurement range against

functional saturation SpOz(func)

HEART RATE FROM PLETH:

Measurement range 20 to 250 bpm -
Accuracy +3 bpm
Resolution 1 bpm
Display averaging 5..7 s
Adjustable pulse beep volume

PLETH WAVEFORM:
Scales Automatic scaling

*) 1 SD (standard deviation) = 68 % of all readings in the

specified range in stable conditions.

Protection against electrical shock Type BF

Part II- NSAT-2

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION -
The M-NSAT module contains the following main parts:

- SpO, sensor board

- Sensor connector cable
- Nellcor Pulse Oximeter Module MP-203
- NSAT interface board

Sensors can be plugged into the M-NSAT module either directly

or using sensor extension cables available from Nellcor. Sensors
are plugged into a 9-pin female connector (D-type) on the front
panel of the module. This connector is mounted on a small PC
board, which is connected by a flat cable to the MP-203.

The MP-203 is a surface mounted PC board manufactured by

Nellcor Incorporated. It contains the signal processing
electronics and software that are based on Nellcor's stand-alone
pulse oximeters. The MP-203 is used with an internal
preamplifier.

The measured SpO, and pulse rate values, as well as status

information, are transferred from the MP-203 to the NSAT
interface board. Communication between the MP-203 and NSAT
interface board is established through RS232C serial interface.
The NSAT interface board, in turn, transmits the measurement
information to the module bus of the AS/3.monitor through
RS485 serial interface.

The operation of NSAT interface board is illustrated in the block

diagram next page.

Part II- NSAT-3

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

2.1 NSAT Interface board

Module bus connector

RS485 RS485 Power-up Power;

Driver for Driver for reset non-isolated
data module reset section

[| Opto isolation Patient isolation isolation transformer |

Microprocessor, 488 byte internal RAM, 16kbyte Power;

internal ROM; 16MHz isolated
section

+5V,+15V,-15V
Non-volatile
supply voltages
UART memory
to Nellcor
oximeter module

Bidirectional asynchronous
serial communication to
Nellcor oximeter module

Figure 1 NSAT Interface Board Block Diagram

Part II- NSAT-4

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

2.1.1 RS485 drivers

There are drivers for data and for module reset functions.

These drivers are used for driving the RS485 type serial
communication bus between the module and the AS/3 Central
Unit. Data transmission speed of the bus is 500kbit/s.

In addition to RS485 bus RESET, there is a Power- up reset,

which keeps the RESET pin of the CPU active during power up
for about 500ms despite of the state at the RS485 bus RESET.
This is used to prevent the sending of RS485 data during the
RESET of the module.

2.1.2 Power supply, non-isolated section

Power supply is a half bridge type switched mode circuit, where
the driver FETs are controlled by a quartz oscillator. The load of
the half bridge is the primary of the isolation transformer. The
voltage, +15 Vdirty from the AS/3 Central Unit is used as the
supply voltage of the switched mode circuit.

2.1.3 Power supply, isolated section

The secondary voltages of the isolation transformer are rectified,
filtered and regulated. The voltages can be measured from the
test connector X11. See Chapter 2.2.

2.1.4 Opto isolation

The signals of the serial communication bus between the NSAT
module and the AS/3 Central Unit are transferred through the
patient isolation by the high speed optocouplers. |

2.1.5 Microprocessor, UART, Non-volatile memory

The microprocessor with on-chip memory have been used to
convert and transfer data from Nellcor pulse oximeter module
MP-203 to AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor.

The communication between MP-203 and the CPU of M-NSAT

is realized with the bidirectional asynchronous serial
communication via the UART.

Part II- NSAT-5

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

The non-volatile memory has been used to store identification

information like serial number, control number, date etc.

Part II- NSAT-6

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

2.2 Connectors and Signals

Module bus connector

Rear panel 25-pin female D-connector (X1):

Pin No | VO Signal
1 I RESET RS485*
2 I -15 VDC
3 I +15 VDIRTY*
4 I +15 VDC
5 I/O ¡-DATA RS485*
6 1/0 | DATA RS485*
7 - Ground & Shield*
8 I -RESET RS485*
9 I CTSB
10 О | RTSB
11 I RXDB
12 O | TXDB
13 - Ground & Shield*
14 I +32 VDIRTY
15 I GroundDIRTY*
16 I CTSC
17 O | RTSC
18 I RXDC
19 O TXDC
20 - ON/STANDBY
21 - BITOIN
22 - RXDD RS232
23 - TXDD RS232
24 I +5 VDC*
25 I +5 VDC
*Used in M-NSAT module

Test connector (X11):

Pin No |Voltage |Name Note

1 +5V +5VTEST |Supply voltage to NSAT-
board
2 +5V +5Vn Supply voltage to MP-203
board
3 +15V +15Vn Supply voltage to the MP-203
board
4 GND FGND
5 -15V -15Vn
6 N/C

Part II- NSAT-7

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES |

3.1 General Service Information

Usually field service is limited to replacing the faulty circuit
boards or mechanical parts. The boards are then returned to
Datex for repair.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide the

unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed fault
description.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with appropriate equipment

shall perform the tests and repairs outlined in this section.
Unauthorized service may void warranty of the unit.

3.2 Visual inspection

If the module is disassembled, check that grounding wires and
ail connectors are properly connected and there are no loose
objects inside the module before attaching the module box.

3.3 Functional checks

_: Insert the NSAT module into the monitor frame

_ Turn the power on by STBY switch. Within 25 seconds,

SpO, field should appear on the display or replace the SpO,
field of the plugged ESTPR (or ESTR) module. (If not, select
Module to be the SpO, source in Interfacing menu (Monitor
Setup - Install/ Service) and plug NSAT in again. Check
also that pleth is selected on the display.

_: No error message appears.

_ Pull out the module. The SpO, field disappears or is

replaced by the SpO2 field of the ESTPR (or ESTR) module
module within 25 seconds. A message ‘M-NSAT module
removed’ appears.

ー Reinsert the module while the power is still on. The SpO,
field appears on the display again.

Part II- NSAT-8

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

Connect a finger probe to the module. The message Pulse

search followed by Check probe in 20 seconds should
appear on the display. No waveform coming from NSAT
appears.

Attach the probe to your finger. A reading of 95 to 99 and

SpO, wave form should appear.

Part II- NSAT-9

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

4. TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM CAUSE TREATMENT
Message ‘No probe’ 1. No probe connected to 1. Check probe connections
the module 2. Change probe
2. Probe faulty 3. Change probe (see possible
3. Wrong type of probe probe types: Operator's Manual)
(not specified to be used
with this module)

Message ‘Check 1. No probe attached to 1. See that the probe is properly

probe' the patient attached to the patient
2. The extension cable not 2. Check that the probe is
connected to the probe connected to the cable
3. Unsuitable site 3. Try another place
4. Probe faulty 4. Change probe
5. Wrong type of probe 5. Change probe (see possible
(not specified to be used probe types: Operator's Manual)
with this module)

Finger probe falls 1. Probe is slippery 1. Follow Nellcor's instructions on

off 2. Finger is too thin or this matter
thick 2. Try other fingers or other probe
types

Weak signal 1. Poor perfusion Try another place

artifacts 2. Movement artifacts
3. Shivering

Message 'No pulse’ Acceptable pulses were „| Try other fingers

present but have now
ceased for 10 seconds

Part II- NSAT-10

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

4.1 Troubleshooting chart

Possibility faulty NSAT

module

i
Insert NSAT module and Take all modules out of the
turn power on Central Unit

Does fault Fault not in NSAT

still appear? module

EPROM
Error Replace the Interface
message on board
screen 3,

Does
another
Moduie-5D
on screen ?

MP-203 Replace Nelicor's

Error ? MP-203 board

Replace QUART on the

interface board

Check interface board.

Replace if necessary

Part II- NSAT-11

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

5 SERVICE VIEW
Monitor Setup
Monitor Setup Install/Service
Waveform Fields Units
Digit Fields 108 Service View | 26 100
Select Mode Save Modes
Set Time and Date Interfacing
Install/Service | 16 analog Outputs
Norma] Screen Monitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu
0 9

Give password. Give password.

To enter Service Menu during normal operation:

1. Press the MONITOR SETUP key.

The Setup menu appears.

Turn ComWheel to highlight Install /Service and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 16 - 4 - 34.
The Install/Service menu appears.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 26 - 23 - 8.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight the M-NSAT module and

push.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight the right module and

push.

Part II- NSAT-12

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

5.1 M-NSAT Service menu

H-NSAT NSAT Data

PR —
$р02% —

NoProbe 0
PulseSearch 0
NoPulse 0
CheckPrabe 1

MP-203 Error No
QUART Errar Ro
O Error No

Timeouts 0
Bad checksums D ROM Dk
Bad c-s by mod

PR shows the pulse rate value [bpm] calculated from pleth.

SpO,% shows the oxygen saturation value multiplied by 100.

Next are listed the messages that are sent from the module to
the monitor. Digit '0' means that the message is not active, '1' is
for the active one.

MP-203 Error is set as Yes if any error message is sent by the

Nellcor MP-203 board.

OUART Error displays Yes if an error is detected in the data

communications device OUART which is located in the
Interface board.

The status of I/O Error is Yes when an error occurs in the

communication between MP-203 and the Interface board.

Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many

times the module has not responded to the monitor's inguiry.
Bad checksums is a cumulative number that indicates how
many times communication from the module to monitor broke
down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how
many communication errors the module has detected.
The AS/3 Monitor starts counting these items at power up and
resets to zero at power off. The nonzero values do not indicate a

Part II- NSAT-13

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

failure, but the continuous counting (more than 50 per second)

indicates either serial communication failure, or module not in
place. Also other modules can cause communication errors that
cause these numbers rise.

ROM indicates whether the checksum in the EPROM is in

accordance with the one the software has calculated.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place or a
communication error).

Part H- NSAT-14
 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS

6.1 Spare part lists

NOTE: Only changed part numbers are listed under later
revisions. To find the desired part: check first the list of the
revision that corresponds your device. If the part is not listed
there, check the previous revision, etc. until you find the right
number.

NOTE: Accessories are listed in the booklet AS/3 Supplies and

Accessories.

Item numbers refer to the exploded view in chapter 6.2.

Nelicor Compatible Saturation Module, M-NSAT
Rev. 00

Item Item description Order No.

6 Interface board, M-NSAT “884383
7 SpO2 measuring board, M-NSAT *90310
8 Jumper 54091
9 Connector board, M-NSAT *884950
4 Front panel frame, M-NSAT (Rev. 00) 884012
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 00) (Eng) 884424
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 00) (Ger) 885779
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 00) (Fre) 885780
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 00) (Spa) 886192
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 00) (Swe) 886126
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 00) (Dut) 886125
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 00) (Ita) 886759
14 EMC-cover, M-NSAT 884701
12 Insulation plate 1., M-NSAT 884700
13 Insulation plate 2., M-NSAT 884705
1 Module box (single width) 886167
3 gatch 879181
2 ring pin 879182
11 Metal frame 879184
5 Cross recess screw M3x8 black 616215
13 Cross cylinder head screw M3x6 61721
14 Cross cylinder head screw M3x12 628700
15 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x8 628712
16 Bushing (640430)Use 63392

Part II- NSAT-15

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

Rev. Ol

Item Item description Order No.

4 Front panel frame, M-NSAT (Rev. 01) 887842

10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 01) (Eng) 888296
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 01) (Ger) 888297
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 01) (Fre) 888298
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 01) (Spa) 888299
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 01) (Swe) 888335
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 01) (Dut) 888336
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 01) (Ita) 888337
10 Front panel sticker, M-NSAT (Rev. 00) (Fin) 888874
16 Bushing 63392
17 Cable lock, M-NSAT 887706
* = the part is recommended for stock

Part H- NSAT-16
 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

6.2 Exploded View

Figure 2 Exploded View of Module Box

Part IT- NSAT-17

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

Figure 3 Exploded View of the M-NSAT Module

Part II- NSAT-18

 Datex AS/3 M-NSAT
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
This manual fully supports earlier revision of M-NSAT module.

Part II- NSAT-19

Network Board, B-NET (Rev. 00)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 885941-2

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION 1
I TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2
2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 3
2.1 Ge нитииитиининитилантвоиильн
2.2 Control LOGIC... i
2.3 Coding Element Interface...
24 Ethermetinterfaces....................... issus
2.5 Connectors and signals..................... iii
2.5.1 Extension Lead rire irene
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES に1

4 TROUBLESHOOTING 9

5 SERVICE VIEW 12

6 SPARE PARTS 15

7 EARLIER REVISIONS 16
Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
The Datex AS/3 Network Board enables connecting the AS/3
monitor to the network. For installing the board please refer to
the Installation Manual of your monitor.

Part II- B-NET-1

 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

I TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Meets IEEE802.3 specifications (10BASE-T)

Hospital grade approved data transformer

Coding element interface

64 Kbyte linear shared-memory /8x8Kbyte paged shared-

memory

Support xxx86 real/protected mode programming

Electrical reguirements +5 Vdc/400 mA

Part H- B-NET-2
 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 General
The B-NET board block diagram is shown in figure 2-1.

The network interface controller is basically the heart of the B-

NET board. The interface controller communicates with the
CPU board through the data and address buffering and
decoding block, or through the RAM. During the startup
sequence the CPU board loads the network communication
software into the RAM. The processor then executes the
communication software.

The network interface controller transmits data packets to the

AS/3 Network and receives data packets from the network
through the 10BASE-T transformer. The transformer filters and
transforms the data and also provides the isolation.

The Ethernet status LEDs indicate the status of the network

communication. The status LEDs are controlled by the network
interface controller. The LEDs are not visible when the board is
installed into the monitor.

The coding element interface block contains a unique network

address. The interface block is connected to the coding element.
The coding element contains information on the monitor
location. The network address and the monitor location
information are transmitted to the CPU board through the data
and address buffering and decoding block.

Part II- B-NET-3

 Service Manual
Datex AS/3 B-NET

」 θο8μθ]υ!
11899 Nİ jueuuele
Butpoo p= 6 000
비
spal
snjeis

Figure 2-1 B-NET Block Diagram

19419413
4 52

Part II- B-NET-4

| 28
Do
L Bo
бинаеэ
' 101094400 JaWojsuel}A__N 4010 0
999jJ9iul | | EEs >
OMEN ，У stru КЕ Lasvaoi | 기 OMION =sE5
' T os
na
eae | |

ASB
bus
uonejos]|
(9% 79) (A
AVd
 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

2.2 Control Logic

Adapter board consists of the following parts:

1O-decoding
buffer memory page selection and series EEPROM control
register
memory decoding and interrupt selection register
memory decoding
buffer memory page selection and series EEPROM status
buffer
coding element interface
bus arbitration

2.3 Coding Element Interface

At the edge of the adapter board there is a 9 -pin female D-
connector, see Chapter 2.5 Connectors and Signals.

2.4 Ethernet Interfaces

The data transformer is designed by Datex and hospital grade
approved.

Adapter's 10BASE-T interface is a normal interface with 7-pole

butterworth low-pass filter on unisolated transmit side of the
transformer and 7-pole butterworth lowpass filter on unisolated
receive side of the transformer. On the isolated side of the
transformer there is a common mode choke both for
transmitting and receiving lines.

There are also two pairs of LEDs indicating following things:

- transmission to Ethernet (V14) Green

- receiving from Ethernet ーー Yellow
- collision detection (V15) Yellow
- good link in 10BASE-T interface -"- Green

Part II- B-NET-5

 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

‘ 2.5 Connectors and signals

The pin assignments on the external Network Connector
locating on the Network Board are as follows.

Pin Signal
12345678
Tx +
F

Tx-
MR ON
au

Rx+
N/C
N/C
Rx-
N/C
eon

N/C

9-pin female D-connector (X2):

Pin Signal
IDCS1 (chip select)
ba

IDCL (clock)
GN

IDDI (data in)

IDDO (data out)
GR

IDPE (protect enable)

+5Vdc
O

unused
ON

unused
gnd
NO

Part II- B-NET-6

 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

CPU Bus connector (X1):

a b с
1 [|+15V AGND DGND
2 |-15V BALE DGND
3 | SAO SAT DGND
4 |SA2 SA3 RESET_RS485
5 |SA4 SA5 -RESET_RS485
6 |SA6 SA7 DATA_RS485
7 |SA8 SA9 -DATA RS485
8 |SA10 SA11 TXDD_RS232
9 |SA12 SA13 RXDD RS232
10 |SA14 SA15 BITOIN
11 | SA16 SA17 BITIIN
12 ¡SA18 SA19 TXDC
13 | SA20 SA21 RXDC
14 | SA22 SA23 RTSC
15 |-SMEMR -SMEMW CTSC
16 |-IOR ΙΟΥΝ TXDB
17 |CLK -RESET RXDB
18 | IOCHRDY IRQ10 RISB
19 |N/C 1 IRQ11 CTSB
20 | N/C_2 IRQ12 TXDA
21 | -SBHE IRQ15 RXDA
22 |500 SDI RISA
23 | SD2 SD3 CTSA
24 1504 SD5 LOUDSPEAKER
25 | SD6 SD7 +5 V
26 |508 SD9 +5V
27 15010 $011 +5 V
28 |SD12 SD13 +5 V
29 |SD14 SD15 ON/STBY
30 ¡+15VD -RESET_CPU +5 V_CPU
31 |+15VD +32 VD REFRESH_WD
32 | GNDD GNDD POWER FAIL

2.5.1 Extension Lead

Every B-NET Board is equipped with an Extension Lead which
facilitates the connecting and disconnecting the cable.

Part If- B-NET-7

 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES
Due to the nature of the Network Board, field service for the
board is limited to troubleshooting. The boards are returned to
Datex for repair.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide the

unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed fault
description.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with appropriate tools and

equipment are allowed to perform the tests and repairs outlined
in this section. Unauthorized service may void warranty of the
unit.

Please, refer to the Installation Manual of your monitor for

information on how to remove the Network Board.

Part II- B-NET-8

 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

4 TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom at the Problem at Explanation/correction

monitor end
Monitor does not Patch panel Patch cable not connected to
connect to network. HUB or to panel.

Monitor connects to
network, but
disconnects
unexpectedly
("Network connection
down” message on the
monitor screen).
Patch cable Patch cable or connector
defective.
HUB HUB not connected to power
supply.
HUB HUB port closed due to
physical layer problems.
HUB HUB port temporarily closed
and reopened due to physical
layer problems.
HUB HUB's not properly connected
to each other.
Monitor-Network cable Cable not properly connected to
wallplate or to monitor.
Monitor-Network cable Cable or connector defective.
Network board The network board is defective.
The board cannot be used. See
network service page for
details.
Network board EEPROM The EEPROM of the network
board is defective or
uninitialized. The board cannot
be used. See network service
page for details.
Identification plug There is no Identification plug
properly attached to the
monitor.

Part II- B-NET-9

 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

Identification plug The identification plug is

defective or uninitialized. The
plug cannot be used
“Network EEPROM Network board EEPROM | The EEPROM of the network
Error” message shows board is defective or
on the monitor screen uninitialized. The board cannot
be used. See network service
page for details.
"Check network Monitor-Network cable Cable not properly connected to
connectors” message wallplate or to monitor.
shows on the monitor
screen
Monitor-Network cable Cable or connector defective.
Identification plug There is no identification plug
properly attached to the
monitor.
Identification plug The Identification plug is
defective or uninitialized. The
plug cannot be used. See
network service page for
details.
“Network board error” Network board The network board is defective.
message shows on the The board cannot be used. See
monitor screen network service page for
details.
Network board EEPROM The EEPROM of the network
board is defective or
uninitialized. The board cannot
be used. See network service
page for details.
Other Site View shows No waveforms are set up Run AS/3 Network Setup to
no waveforms for Monitor-to-monitor verify current Monitor-to-
communication monitor communication set up.
Network printing fails Print server is busy Network manager's print server
is busy at the moment and
cannot take more print jobs. Try
again after 15 seconds.
Print queue is full There are too many unprinted
documents waiting in the print
queue. Check the printer, as it is
not operating properly.

Part II- B-NET-10

 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

Printer is off-line Printer cable is loose, printer is

out of paper, there is paper jam
or the printer is simply
switched to off-line state.
Record keeper menus There are no menus for Run AS/3 Network Setup to
are blank the record keeper verify the current set up.

Part If- B-NET-11

 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

5 SERVICE VIEW

Monitor Setup
Monitor Setup Install/Service
Waveform Fields Units

Digit Fields 100 Service View | 26 100

Select Mode Save Modes

Set Time and Date Interfacing

Install/Service | 16 Analog Outputs
Normal Screen Monitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu

Give password. Give password.

To enter Service Menu during normal operation:

1. Press the MONITOR SETUP key.

The Setup menu appears.

Turn ComWheel to highlight Install/Service and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 16 - 4 - 34.
The Install /Service menu appears.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 26 - 23 - 8.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight “Monitor” and push.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight “Communication” and

push.

Under Communication there are two service views about

networking: Network , and Computer Interface. Highlight
the desired one and push ComWheel.

Part II- B-NET-12

 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

r
Communication Network
Network Statistics In Qut
Packets 220 238
Computer If. Bytes 38655 35678
Previous Menu Data errors
TRL Frage Fransen.

Hardware errors
Intern. Missed FO Sverrun

Location TD 52
Address 004097000018

Connections
ALI

Network displays network related service data. Please see the

chart on the next page.
-
Communication Computer If.
Network Inteface status CLOSED
Computer If. Statistics In Gut
Packets 0
Previous Menu Bytes 0
so

Rx errors a

Computer If. displays computer interface related service data.

Interface status indicates if the connection is closed, opened or

active. Closed indicates that the necessary hardware is not
present or is not available, Opened indicates that the hardware
and software for the interface is running, but there is no
network connection or that there has been errors in using the
interface (e.g., no cable connected), and active indicates that the
interface is operating normally.

Rx errors indicates the number of received erroneous packets.

Part II- B-NET-13

 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

In the Network menu there are additionally following items that

describe the communication in the network.

Value Usage Notes

Received packets Total number of
(Statistics In/Packets) | received packets since
last cold start.
Transmitted packets Total number of
(Statistics Out/Packets) | transmitted packets
since last cold start.
Received bytes Total number of
(Statistics In/Bytes) received bytes since last
cold start
Transmitted bytes Total number of
(Statistics In/Bytes) transmitted bytes since
last cold start
CRC errors (CRC) Number of received
packets with incorrect
checksum.
Frame errors (Frame) Number of received Refers to physical layer
packets with incorrect | problems. An
frame structure. erroneous packet often
has both frame and
CRC error.
Transmission errors Number or errors in :
(Transm.) packet transmission. IN
Internal errors (Intern.) | Internal error of the Must always be 0. M
network board.
Missed packets Number of received Must always be 0.
(Missed) packets lost due to
overload.
FIFO errors (FIFO) Internal error of the Must always be 0.
network board.
Overrun errors Practically same as Must always be 0.
(Overrun) above.
Location ID Monitor’s location
given at the setup
Address Monitor's ethernet
address
Connections Names of AICs
connected

Part II- B-NET-14

 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS
Network Board, B-NET

Item description Order No.

Grounding plate 885414
Network cable extension *713698

* = the part is recommended for stock

Part II- B-NET-15

 Datex AS/3 B-NET
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
There are no earlier revisions of B-NET.

Part II- B-NET-16

interface Board, B-INT (Rev. 00)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 885942-2

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION
SPECIFICATIONS
2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
2.1 Main Components
2.2 Connectors and signals
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES
3.1 General Service Information
4 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 SERVICE VIEW

6 SPARE PARTS

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
The B-INT board provides an interface between AS/3
Anaesthesia Monitor and other monitors connected to it. It also
provides a connection between the monitor frame and the
Airway Module.

The list of the monitors that can be interfaced, and parameters

available from them, is in the installation manual of your
monitor.

Part H-Interface-1
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

I SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 Serial I/O Definitions

RS-232 buffered (channels 1-4)

All standard baud rates are possible from 300 to 115200

Every interfaced device has fixed baud rate.

1.2 Analog Definitions

9 There are four analog inputs available on channel 1 and 2.

All analog inputs are Op-Amp buffered, with input

impedance of 1 MQ. Each of these analog inputs are also
equipped with a 1 MQ pull-down resistor to -12 V for NC-
detection.

Sampling rate: 10 ms/sample/channel

Input range: -10 V - +10 V

Resolution: 10 bits -> 1024 voltage levels in range

Part II-Interface-2
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
B-INT detects and identifies the specified monitors connected to
its four 9-pin connectors (one D-connector and three pin row
connectors). The identification is made by a serial string.

There are three pin row connectors on the board surface. Two
for serial and analog connectors (for all interfaces) and one for
serial and digital connector.

In the back panel of the board there are two connectors; a 9-pin
serial D-connector and a 25-pin D-connector. The 25-pin D-
connector is used for connecting the Airway Module (as the Gas
interface board is removed when B-INT is installed).

If both numerical and analog real time waveforms are desired,

the external monitor can be connected to the serial/analog
connectors (X7 and X8) using additionally interface connector
cable.

For detailed installation instructions please refer to AS/3

Anaesthesia Monitor Installation Manual.

Part H-Interface-3
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual :

， EPROM
DATA
RS232 ' 3 x RS232
7 > CONTROL | BUFFERSK—————> SERIAL
: LINES
AS/3 elo PROCESSOR LOGIC
MODULE RESET 80C196KC ie し ，
BUS İN m | SRAM =

' RS485 ，
' BUFFERS $
・ a RS232
，' EEPROM QUART SO SERIAL
UNE
・ Isolation’

: 8 8, ' 8 ANALOG
< 7 INPUTS
8 LOW-
PASS
FILTERS

4 ‘ 4 DIGITAL
INPUTS

Figure 1 B-INT Block Diagram

Part II-Interface-4
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

2.1 Main Components

In general

The board contains 80C196KC16 (Intel) microcontroller.

External connections

The connectors of the board are:

- 96-pin E-connector to the CPU mother board (X1)

- 25-pin D-connector for an Airway module (X2).

9-pin D-connector. It is RS-232 level isolated serial

connector (X3). No analog inputs available.

In addition, three connectors on the board make the following

connections possible with AS/3 interface connector cable:

- RS-232 level serial and analog connectors for all interfaces

(X7, X8).

- RS-232 level serial and digital connector (X9).

X7 and X8 connectors are for analog inputs (four inputs each)

and X9 connector is for digital inputs (four inputs). Analog real-
time waveforms are interfaced through X7 and X8 connectors.
Also X3 and X9 connectors can be used to interface waveforms
from Drager Cato and Cicero. |
The board is connected to the AS/3 module bus through the
CPU mother board.

Serial communication signals for transmitting (TxD) and

receiving (RxD) are sent to the microcontroller ports. The
direction of the communication is controlled by REC/SND/
signal at the buffers. RESET/ signal always reset the
communication to RxD state.

Part I-Interface-5
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

Reset

The Interface board is resetted when AS/3 Central Unit is reset

(MAIN/RESET/) or when the module bus is reset
(RESET_RS485).
The RESET/ signal is sent to address decoding GAL circuit,
from which it goes to the microcontroller as RESET/Z. When
the RESET/ is active (low), the RESET/Z also goes low and
resets the microcontroller.

Serial communication channels

For four serial communication channels (TxD, RxD), there is a

QUART. The microcontroller is able to reset the QUART any
time by pulling QRESET signal high. The QUART is also reset
when the microcontroller is reset; the microcontroller pulls all
the port 1 signals high when it resets.

Memories

On the board there is static RAM, EPROM, EEPROM and

address decoding GAL unit.

The microcontroller communicates with the EEPROM in serial

mode.

Digital inputs

Four digital inputs are connected to connector X9 on the board.

They are passed through to the microcontroller's high speed
pins (DIGBUS). The digital inputs have an overvoltage
protection and a pull-up circuit.

Analog inputs

Eight analog inputs are connected to connectors X7 and X8.

They are passed through EMI filters and low-pass filters to the
microprocessor's port 0.

Part II-Interface-6
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

Power test connector

There is a power test connector X4.

Pin No | Signal
+5 Vref

ha
+5 V

PWN
+12V
DGND
-12V
au

NC

Analog test connector

This connector is for factory tests only.

Fuse

A fuse of 4 A is installed on the board for +24/+32 Vdirty input

voltage. This voltage is not used on the board but passed
through to 25-pin D-connector on the connector plate for
Airway module use.

Part II-interface-7
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

2.2. Connectors and signals

E Xi

Bili
AS/3 Bus connector (X1):
a b c
1 |+15V AGND DGND
2 |-15V BALE DGND
3 | SAO SAI DGND
4 ¡SA2 SA3 RESET_RS485
5 |544 $45 -RESET_RS485
6 |546 SA7 DATA_RS485
7 |SA8 SA9 -DATA_RS485
8 |SA10 SA11 TXDD_RS232
9 |SA12 SA13 RXDD_RS232
10 |SA14 SA15 BITOIN
11 | SA16 SA17 BITIIN
12 | SA18 SA19 TXDC
13 | SA20 SA21 RXDC
14 | SA22 SA23 RTSC
15 |-SMEMR -SMEMW CTSC
16 | -IOR -IOW TXDB
17 | CLK -RESET RXDB
18 | JOCHRDY IRQ10 RTSB
19 |N/C_1 КОП CTSB
20 | N/C_2 IRO12 TXDA
21 |-SBHE IRO15 RXDA
22 |500 SD1 RTSA
23 1502 $03 CTSA
24 |SD4 SD5 LOUDSPEAKER
25 |506 557 +5 V
26 |SD8 SD9 +5V
27 |SD10 SD11 +5 V
28 | SD12 SD13 +5 V
29 | SD14 SD15 ON/STBY
30 |+15VD -RESET_CPU +5 V_CPU
31 ¡+15VD +32 VD REFRESH_WD
32 | GNDD GNDD POWER FAIL

Part II-Interface-8
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

Rear Panel 9pin male D-connector (X2)

Pin No VO | Signal
N/C

ha
RXD RS

OOO Mm
GUN
TXD RS
+5 V
À
GND
G

N/C
GA

RTS RS
いさ

no
CTS RS
の

N/C
ら

CH 4 (non-floating, off-board D9-connector, X9):

Pin No Definition
DO digital input
r

RXD
GUN

TXD
D1 digital input
BP

GND
AG

D2 digital input
RTS
NI

CTS
O

D3 digital input
MO

Part H-Interface-9
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

Module Bus Connector (X3)

Pin No | W/O | Signal

1 0 RESET_RS485
2 O -15 VDC
3 O +15 VDIRTY
4 O +15 VDC
5 I/O |-DATA_RS485
6 I/O |DATA_RS485
7 Ground & Shield
8 O -RESET_RS485
9 O CTSB
10 1 RTSB
11 O RXDB
12 I TXDB
13 Ground & Shield
14 O +32 VDIRTY
15 О GroundDIRTY
16 O CTSC
17 I RTSC
18 0 RXDC
19 I TXDC
20 ON/STANDBY
21 BITOIN
22 RXDD_RS232
23 - TXDD_RS232
24 0 +5 VDC
25 o +5 VDC

Part II-Interface-10
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

Connectors for channels 1..4 are 9 pin male D-types, and their
pins are described below:
CH 1 (non-floating, off-board D9-connector, X8):
Pin No | Definition
AO analog input

F
RXD
GN TXD
A1 analog input
B

GND
G

A2 analog input
O

RTS
ON

CTS
A3 analog input
NO

CH 2 (non-floating, off-board D9-connector, X7):

Pin No | Definition
A4 analog input
F

RXD
worn Fr GN

TXD
A5 analog input
GND
aa

A6 analog input
RTS
CTS
A7 analog input

Part II-Interface-11
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES

3.1 General Service Information

Usually field service is limited to replacing the faulty circuit
board. The board is then returned to Datex for repair.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide the

unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed fault
description.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with appropriate equipment

shall perform the tests and repairs outlined in this section.
Unauthorized service may void warranty of the unit.

Part IH-interface-12
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

4 TROUBLESHOOTING
Enter the start Service View, see chapter Service View, 5. Select
Scroll Vers and scroll down the SW version/ Unit id list. Make
sure that the software code and level, control and serial
numbers of B-INT are displayed under SIO (B-INT).

If those are not displayed, B-INT is faulty.

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

B-INT not active in the Board is not connected Check that the board is firmly
Service View. properly. pushed into the connector.
B-INT faulty Replace B-INT board and
send it for repair.

Measured values from the Monitor not selected for Select right monitor in menu
interfaced monitor do not interface. Install Service /Interfacing.
appear on the display after
appr. one minute. Poor contact in the Check the cables and
interface cables. connections. Change the cable
to another connector.

Wrong interface cable. Check cable type and change

accordingly.

Part IT-Interface-13
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

5 SERVICE VIEW
To enter the Service View:

Monitor Setup
Monitor Setup Install/Service
Waveform Fields Units
Digit Fields 100 Service View | 26 100
Select Mode Save Nodes
Set Time and Date Interfacing
Install/Service | 16 Analog Üutputs
Normal Screen Monitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu
6 0

Give password. Give password.

Press the MONITOR SETUP key.

The Setup menu appears.

Tum ComWheel to highlight Install /Service and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 16 - 4 - 34.
The Install/Service menu appears.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 26 - 23 - 8.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Modules and push.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight the Interface and push.

Part II-Interface-14
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

Service Data

Interface Service Data

Gases I-INT:
Sp02 id: state:
E
NIBP в | ты
ch:0 id: tat
state:
9 e chi ig: State:
irometr [E ch? id: state:
p y ch:3 id: state:
$02/C.0, rt none
Previous Menu rt : none

Timeouts 0 RAM Ok
Bad checksums b RON Ok
Bad c-s by moc 0

Gases, SpO,, NIBP, Spirometry, S$O,/C.O indicates the

parameters of which service data is available. The data which
can be seen from those pages is raw data of the interfaced
monitors, which will be processed for the normal screen.

I-INT Indicates the status of the interface via UPI board.

B-INT Indicates the status of interface via the 4 interface

channels of B-INT.

id: The name of the interfaced monitor, e.g. Ultima

state describes the state of the connection, alternatives are:

‘init * -> the channel is initialized
‘wait '-> AS/3 monitor is waiting the external monitor
'online' -> the connection is ready
‘search’ -> the external monitor is searched

rt: real time values that are available via interface .

Part II-Interface-15
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many

times the module has not responded to the monitor's inquiry.
Bad checksums is a cumulative number that indicates how
many times communication from the module to monitor broke
down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how
many communication errors the module has detected.
The AS/3 Monitor starts counting these items at power up and
resets to zero at power off. The nonzero values do not indicate a
failure, but the continuous counting (more than 50 per second)
indicates either serial communication failure, or module not in
place. Also other modules can cause communication errors that
cause these numbers rise.

RAM indicates the state of the external RAM memory.

ROM indicates whether the checksum in the EPROM is in
accordance with the one the software has calculated.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place or a
communication error).

Part II-Interface-16
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS
NOTE: Accessories are listed in the AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Supplies and Accessories.

Interface Board, B-INT

Item description Order No.

Fuse T4A *51134

Grounding plate 885404
AS/3 Interface connector cable *882353

* the part is recommended for stock

Part ii-Interface-17
 Datex AS/3 B-INT
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
There are no earlier revision of B-INT, only software changes
have been made.

coe

Part II-Interface-18
 Airway Module, G-O (Rev. 00)

Airway Module, G-OV (Rev. 00)

Airway Module, G-AO (Rev. 04)

Airway Module, G-AiO (Rev. 03)

Airway Module, G-AiOV (Rev. 02)

Airway Module, G-AOV (Rev. 02)

Gas Interface Board, B-GAS (Rev. 01)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 885944-2

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Table of Contents
GENERAL DESCRIPTION I

I SPECIFICATIONS 2
1.1 General Specifications... sens 2
1.2 Typical Performance .... „2
1.3 Technical Specifications 4
2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 5
2.1 Measurement Principles 5
2.1.1 CO2/N20/AA Measurement inner nee ete 5
2.1.2. On Measurement линии виниле 6
2.13 Agent Identification riem ereneereareeeremeenrenereerrecearararaeraseaserereeseesasersera 7
2.1.4 Side Stream Spirometry seen 8
2.2 Main Components and Block DiagramS iii 10
2.2.1 in General
2.22 GasSampling5System...........................
e een
2.2.3 ACX-200 Measuring Unit
2.24 O7 Measurement μυ
2.2.5 ACX MeasuringBoard.................... eee
2.2.6 ASX Agent Identification Bench.
2.2.7 ASX Measuring Board
AI AAA nné
2.2.9 Gas Mother Board ...
2.2.10 Gas Interface Board
2.3 Connectors and Signals
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES
3.1 General Service Information... sus one one
3.2 Preventive Maintenance ........
3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly..
3.4 Adjustments and Calibrations ne teen
3.4.1 Gas Sampling System Adjustmeni..................................
eee eeeeereeneenee
3.4.2 Oxygen Measurement Unit Adjustments...
3.3.3 Flow Calibration in te een
4 TROUBLESHOOTING 50
4.1 General Troubleshooting Chart... inner 50
42 Gas Sampling System Troubleshooting
4.3 O2 Measurement Troubleshooting ....
44 ACX Troubleshooting ................... n
4.5 ASX Troubleshootmg… iii 57
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

4.6 PVX Board troubleshooting eee rie 58

4.7 Gas Mother Board Troubleshooting ...............eseeeseaereaseeeserereeneeereereerseraerersereeea 59
E AAA 60
5 SERVICE VIEW
5.1 Gas Mother Board... iii
5.2 ACX Service menu...
5.3 PVX Service Menu ....
5.4 ASX Service Menu

6 SPARE PARTS
6.1 Spare parts list iii
7 EARLIER REVISIONS 80
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The AS/3 Airway Modules, G-O, G-OV, G-AO, G-AiO, G-AOV
and G-AiOV provide airway and respiratory parameters
followingly:

All modules have a side-stream gas sampling system providing

measurements of CO, and O,. The G-AO module can also
measure N,O and anaesthetic agents. The modules G-AiO and
G-AiOV can additionally identify the anaesthetic agent used.
The modules G-OV G-AOV and G-AiOV provide the Side
Stream Spirometry measurement which enables the measuring
of respiratory parameters near the patient.

Gas Interface Board, B-GAS is used for connecting an Airway

Module to the Central Unit. The connection can also be made
through the Interface Board, B-INT.

This service manual section provides information required to

maintain and repair the Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Airway Modules, G-O,G-OV, G-AO, G-AiO, G-AiOV, and G-
AOV. This manual is applicable for the current production
revision of the modules.

Part H-Airway-1
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

I SPECIFICATIONS

I.I General Specifications

Module size WxDxH 135 x 410 x 135 mm
5.3x 15.0 x 5.3 in

Module weight 6 kg/ 13 lbs

1.2 Typical Performance

Sampling rate 200 ml/min nominal (180 - 220 ml/min)
Display update rate breath-by-breath

Automatic compensation for pressure, CO,-N,O, and CO,-O,

collision broadening effect.
Warm-up time 3 min for operation, 30 min for full specifications.

Auto-zeroing is performed at start-up, after 5 min, 5 min.,5

min., 15 min., 15min., 15 min., and after that at 60 min. regular
intervals.

co,
Measurement range 0 to 10 %, (0 to 10 kPa), (0 to 76 mmHg)
Extended range 10 to 15 %, (10 to 15 kPa), (76 to 114
mmHg)

If CO, concentration is below 0.1 %, 0.0 % is displayed.

RESPIRATION RATE

Breath detection 1 % change in CO, level

Measurement range 4 to 60 breaths/min

O,
Measurement range — Oto 100% O,

N,O
Measurement range 0 to 100% N,O

Part II-Airway-2
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

HAL, ISO, ENF

Measurement range 0to5%
Extended range 5 to 15 % (unspecified)

SEV
Measurement range 0Oto8%
Extended range 8 to 15 % (unspecified)

DES
Measurement range Oto 18%
Extended range 18 to 25 % (unspecified)

Resolution two decimals when the AA

concentration below 1.0 %
If AA concentration is below 0.10 %, 0.00 % is displayed.

AGENT IDENTIFICATION
Identified agents HAL, ENF, ISO, SEV, DES
Identification time 30 seconds (typical value with pure
agents)
Identification treshold 0.15 vol% (typical)
Mixture warning when minor component concentration > 0.3
vol% and >15 %of total agent concentration

SIDE STREAM SPIROMETRY

Values are valid when:
Respiratory rate adult 4..30 pedi 4..50
LE ratio is 1:3 - 1:0.5
Inner diameter of ET tube is >5.5 mm (adult) or 3 to 6 mm
(paediatric).

Airway Pressure (Paw)

Accuracy +15 cmH,O
Resolution 1 cmH,O
Measuring range -20 to +80 cmH,O

Tidal Volume (TV)

Accuracy 46 % or 30 ml (adult); +6 % or 4 ml
(paed)
Resolution 1ml
Measurement range 150 to 2000 ml (adult)
15 to 300 ml (paed)

Part II-Airway-3
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Minute Volume (MV)

Resolution 0.11/min
Measurement range 2 to 15 1/min (adult)
0.5 to 5 1/min (paed)

Flow
Measurement range 1.5 to 100 1/min for both directions
(adult)
0.25 to 25 1/min for both directions
(paed)

1.3 Technical Specification

co,
Measurement rise time <360 ms (from 10 to 90 %)
Gain stability <=0.2 %CO,/24h (0 to 8 %)
<=0.4 %CO,/24 h (8 to 10 %)
Gain temperature drift <=0.2 %CO,/10°C (0 to 8 %)
<=0.4 %CO,/10°C (8 to 10 e)
Nonlinearity error <=0.2 %CO, (0 to 8 %)
<=0.4 %CO, (8 to 10 %)
O,
Measurement rise time <480 ms (from 10 to 90 %)
Gain drift <=2 % 07/24 h
Gain temperature drift <=3 % 03/10°C
Nonlinearity error <=2 % O,

N,0
Measurement rise time <360 ms (from 10 to 90 96)
Gain temperature drift <=3 % N,0/10°C
Gain drift <=2 % N,0/24h
Nonlinearity error <=2 % N,O

AA
Measurement rise time <520 ms (from 10 to 90 %)
Gain drift <=0.4 % AA/24h
Gain temperature drift <=0.4 % АА/10°С
Nonlinearity error <=0.2 % АА

Protection against electrical shock Type BF

Part II-Airway-4
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

-2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Measurement Principle

2.1.1 CO /N,O/AA Measurement

The CO,, N,O, and anaesthetic agent gas measurements are
based on absorption of infrared light as it passes through the gas
sample in measuring chamber in the photometer. The light
absorption is measured at three wavelengths using an infrared
detector. One of the wavelengths is that of the CO, absorption
peak at 4.3 micrometers, the second is that of the N,O
absorption peak at 3.9 micrometers, and the third is that of the
anaesthetic agent absorption peak at 3.3 micrometers. The signal
processing electronics receive the signals from the IR detector
and demodulate it to get DC components out of these signals
which correspond to the content of each gas in the sample.

100
Transmittance

50

LN 3.5 4
/\ 4.5
Micrometers

Res= 2 cm--1

Figure 1 CO,/N,O/AA Gas Absorption Spectra

Part II-Airway-5
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.1.2. O, Measurement
The differential oxygen measuring unit uses the paramagnetic
principle in a pneumatic bridge configuration. The signal picked
up with a differential pressure transducer is generated in a
measuring cell with a strong magnetic field that is switched on
and off at a freguency of 110Hz. The output signal is a DC
voltage proportional to the O, concentration difference between
the two gases to be measured.

Part II-Airway-6
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.1.3 Agent Identification

The anaesthetic agent identification bench identifies Halothane,
Enflurane, isoflurane, Desflurane and Sevoflurane.

The bench measures the spectrum of the gas between 3.24 um

and 3.39 ym. Because the spectrum of each of the anaesthetic
agents is different it is possible to identify them.

The bench consists of an infrared source, a measuring chamber,

a rotating filter and a detector. The peak wavelength of the
narrow bandpass filter changes when the angle between the
light path and the filter is changed. When the filter rotates the
required spectrum is scanned through. The agent or a mixture of
agents is identified by comparing the measured spectrum with
stored reference spectra.

Anesthetic Agent Gas Absorption Spectra

500
450
400
—@— Halothane 0
350
—E Enflurane O
300 :
ir Isoflurane O
250
~-pt-~ Sevoflurane 0
200 +
—*— Desfiurane O
150 +
—e— Freon 0
100 +
50 +
3246

Wavelength inmj

Figure 2 Anaesthetic Agents Gas Absorption Spectra

Part II-Airway-7
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.1.4 Side Stream Spirometry

In anaesthesia, CMV (Controlled Mechanical Ventilation) is the
mostly used ventilation mode. In this mode, mechanical breaths
are delivered to the patient by a ventilator with a proper tidal
volume (TV), respiration rate (RR), and inspiration / expiration
ratio in time (LE) determined by the settings of the ventilator.

Delivery of life support gases is based on pressure. However,

without knowing volume measured of exhalation, one cannot be
sure that a breath occurred. The ultimate goal of ventilation is to
use the least amount of pressure to generate the most
appropriate volume for each breath.

The Side Stream Spirometry monitors ventilation in anaesthesia.

Both patient breathing circuit and the function of the ventilator
are monitored. The following parameters are displayed:

Expiratory and inspiratory tidal volume (TV) in ml.

Expiratory and inspiratory minute volume (MV) in 1/min.
Expiratory volume in first second (V1.0) in per cent for adults
and in 0.5 seconds for children.
Inspiration/expiration ratio in time (LE)
Airway pressures: Peak pressure (P-.,,), End inspiratory
pressure (Par), Positive end expiratory pressure (PEEP), Real
time airway pressure waveform (Pw)
Flow: Real time flow waveform (V")
Compliance (C)
Pressure volume loop
Flow volume loop

Airway pressure

PEEP, Pea and Po are measured by pressure transducer on

the PVX board. Atmospheric pressure is used as a reference in
measurement. The pressure measurement is made from the
airway part that is closest to the patient between patient circuit
and intubation tube.

Airway flow

The measurement is based on measuring the kinetic gas

pressure and is performed using Pitot effect. Pressure

Part IT-Airway-8
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

transducer is used to measure the Pitot pressure. The obtained

pressure signal is linearized and corrected according to the
density of the gas. Speed of the flow is calculated from these
pressure values and TV value is then integrated. MV value is
further calculated and averaged using TV and RR (respiratory
rate) values.

Side Stream Spirometry Sensor

Side stream spirometry is measured with a specific sensor, D-lite

or Pedi-lite. For more information about available sensors,
please refer to Datex AS/3 Supplies and Accessories Catalogue.

D-lite and Pedi-lite sensors are designed to measure kinetic

pressure by two-sided Pitot tube. The pressure reduction caused
by measuring cross is taken into account, too, especially in small
flows.

Velocity is calculated from pressure difference according to

Bernoulli's law. Flow is then determined using the calculated
Velocity.

v= 2x dP/p (Bernoulli's law)

F=vxA

where, F = flow (Ymin)

v = velocity (m/s)
А = cross area (m2)
dP = pressure difference (cmH,0)
р = density (kg/m?)

Finally the volume information is obtained by integrating the

flow signal.

Part II-Airway-9
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.2 Main Components and Block Diagrams

2.2.1 In General
The AS/3 Airway Module contains ACX-200 and OM-101 gas
measuring units, ASX-200 agent identification unit (i models),
PVX board for measuring airway volume and pressure (V
models), tubings, sampling pump, ACX Measuring board and
Gas mother board.

The gas sampling system samples the measured air to the

module, and removes water and impurities from it. A sampling
line is connected to the water trap on the front panel. The pump
draws gas through the sampling line to gas measuring units.
After the measurements, the gas is exhausted from sample gas
out connector on the rear panel of the module.

When Side Stream Spirometry is used, special sensors, D-lite or

Pedi-lite, replaces the normal airway adapter in the patient
circuit. The spirometry tubing is attached to the two connectors
on the sensor and on the module front panel.

The Gas mother board processor controls the module functions,

such as power supply to each measuring unit, serial
communication between module processor, and ACX
Measuring board. There are connectors for the pump, valves,
and gas measuring units on the board.

Part II-Airway-10
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

| Lamp
ACX Signal abla cx Supply ASX PVX Gas pressure
Board Bench Voltage Unit Board and flow in
Supply
voltages,
Control
X1 Xi
一 一 一 [ 1 E +
X2 rh X5 x3
o h X4 os Supply Supply
xygen
ygen ) Supply AČX Valve ASX voltages ΡΥΧ voltages mob
Measuing o . signal . serial
Unit voltagesseria! controls o serial
Supply 1/0 νο
+24/+32 VE) Fan
voltages ACX, ASX, 山
PVX serial +5 Y Lamp
vo AH control жен
Valve controîs Valve 15 VD +} Valves
+5 GND,
| amp
control
ss yp, GNBB 01497 i È
・
Ш po
χι Gas Module CPU -—— Pump control
Serial VO sj Serial 0 | İş... Mod key in x
Pump contrt— Pump Pump
Driver
+5 Vref +15 VD, GNDD— 처

HV 一一
+5 VL +15 V-—>) Regulator Х11 1
+15 VD GND—— Module
HAV
+24 /+32 VD Mod key. | Key
GND 4
GNDD Gas Mother Board |

Figure 3 Airway Module Block Diagram

Part IT-Airway-11 ・
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.2.2 Gas Sampling System

The function of the gas sampling system is to draw sample gas
into the monitor gas sensors at a fixed rate and to separate
impurities and condensed water from the gas flow.
Water trap

The gas sample enters the monitor through the water trap,
where it is divided into two flows, main flow and side flow (see
Gas Sampling System Block Diagram). The main flow goes into
the measuring system through a hydrophobic filter.

The side flow creates a slight sub-atmospheric pressure within

the water trap container. This facilitates cathering the fluid
removed by the hydrophobic filter.

Sampling line

The sampling line is an integral part of the total sampling

system. The resistance established by the sampling line is
significant when the software determines the occlusion and air-
leak alarm limits during the turn-on sequence.

The small inner diameter causes fluids such as blood or mucus

not to propagate within the tube, so that when the line is
clogged, it is replaced.

The Nafion™ tube

A special tube (tubes A or B, and C: see Figure 7) is used to

balance the sample gas humidity with that of ambient air. The
tube will prevent errors caused by the effect of water vapor on
gas partial pressure when humid gases are measured after
calibration with dry gases. It is inserted between the water trap
and the zero valve (models with i) or between the zero valve
and ACX-200 measuring unit (models without i). The tube is
also inserted between the CO, absorber and the zero valve.

Nafion is a trade mark of Du Pont.

Part II-Airway-12
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Zero valve

The main flow passes through a solenoid valve before

proceeding to the ACX-200 measuring unit. This valve is
activated to establish the zero points for the ACX-200 and O,
measuring units at start-up, at 5 minutes, and after that at
regular intervals. After 1-hour monitoring, the auto-zeroing is
performed once an hour. When the valve is activated, room air
is drawn through the CO, absorber into the internal system and
the gas sensors.
Gas measuring units

After the zero valve, the gas passes through the ACX-200 and O,
measuring units. In the ACX-200 measuring unit, infrared light
is passed through chambers containing the main flow gas
(measurement) and a chamber containing reference gas. The
measurement is made by determining the ratio between the two
light intensities.

The oxygen sensor has two inputs. One input accepts the main
flow and the other draws in room air for reference. The sensor
uses a differential pressure transducer to compare the pressure
gradient produced when both gases are exposed to an
oscillating magnetic field. Both gas flows exit from a single port.

Ini model, the ASX agent identification unit is installed in

parallel with the oxygen sensor. The task of the ASX unit is to
identify anaesthesia agents by infrared light method used also in
the ACX-200 unit.
Pressure valve

The pressure valve is used to measure the pressure gradient

between the O, measurement flow and the O, reference flow.
This pressure gradient reflects the condition of the D-fend water
trap filter.

Normally the pressure gradient between the O, measurement

flow and the reference flow is approximately +8 mmHg. If the
software detects the gradient to be between 0 and -5 mmHg, the
pressure valve will initiate pressure measurement of the
reference flow. If the gradient is greater than -5 mmHg, the
software triggers the message "REPLACE TRAP”.

Part II-Airway-13
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Flow cassettes

The internal flow rates are set using flow cassettes. These
cassettes are used to set the side flow rate and the O, reference
flow rate, the flow rates through the measuring units and the
total flow rate of the sampling system.
Sampling pump and damping chamber

The sampling pump is a vibrating membrane pump driven by

a 50 Hz/12 V/0.4 A square wave current.

The damping chamber is used to even out the pulsating flow

and silence the exhaust flow.

Part H-Airway-14
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

10 509
ados

499049
Buduogi
dung
sjepou AOIV “Olv-D

in
Suunsoay

o
Hun

Buunsoa
XSY

м бд
て
3Jnssajid
SAID,

40119548109
=

ayessog
200NPSUDI]
21188844

293
bulunspaW
00g-XOV
i
yun
SADA

OH
apis
ς
ΝΙ 338

JAVA
L
aly Wooy

ajdwog
Ni S09
IN

Figure 4 Gas Sampling System Block Diagram

In G-AO, AOV models, tube A is Teflon, B and C Nafion.
In G-AiO, AiOV models, tubes A and C are Nafion, B is Teflon.

Part II-Airway-15
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

ACX-200 Pump
Damping chamber /Filter

Sample out
-
Pressure valve

NC C
Pressure transducer

Absorber

02 meosuring unit

ASX- 200
CNC
NO

Zero valve

Ges mother board side

on ο ©1 1. Constriction values of flow cassettes
No € NC © Ol? are for reference onty.
O O] 4 Actua: volues moy differ.
NC=normally closed SA
9 ο
é
NO=normally open 5 一引 5
C=common

Figure 5 Gas Sampling System Layout

Part II-Airway-16
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Table 1 Flow Cassettes

FLOW CASSETTE CODE

50/26.0 878048
50/19.0 873800
50/16.3 878047
50/15.3 873801
50/14.1 878046
50/13.1 873802
50/12.4 878045
50/11.2 874770
50/10.4 873803
50/9.2 874509
50/8.7 873804
50/7.4 873805
50/6.5 878044
50/5.8 873806
50/5.1 878043
50/44 873807
50/3.8 878042
50/3.2 873808
50/3.0 878040
50/2.8 878039
50/25 878038
50/2.3 873809
50/2.0 878037
50/1.8 873810
50/1.6 878036
50/14 873811
50/11 873812

NOTE: The number on the cassette

represents relative flow when a specific
pressure is applied. Therefore 50/26.0
presents the least resistance and 50/1.1
the most.

Part l-Airway-17
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.2.3 ACX-200 Measuring Unit

CAUTION: The ACX-200 photometer and its components are
repaired/calibrated at the factory. Attempts to repair /calibrate
the unit elsewhere will adversely affect operation of the unit.
Datex supplies spare ACX-200 photometers. The information
provided for the ACX-200 is for reference only.

The ACX photometer is of dual path type. The infrared light

beam passes through a measuring chamber containing the gas to
be analyzed, and a reference chamber, which is free of CO,,
N,O, and AA. The measurement is made by determining the
ratio between the two light intensities.

Figure6 ACX Photometer (ACX-200 Measuring Unit)

Part II-Airway-18
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

A filter wheel is used to control the light from an incandescent

lamp that passes through the photometer. The filters are
arranged so that the light is passed sequentially:

- first at the CO, absorption wavelength through the

reference chamber

- then through the measuring chamber

- finally it is blocked completely

The same sequence is repeated at the N,O and anaesthetic agent

gas absorption wavelengths.

After passing through the filters the light is reflected and

focused by a mirror onto the infrared detector. This detector
measures the three light levels for each gas described above.

There is an optical sensor incorporated in the photometer which

detects light from a reflective surface on the filter wheel once
every revolution. The pulses from this sensor are used to
synchronize the electronics to the signal from the infrared
detector. A stabilizing diode measures the temperature, which is
needed to compensate for thermal drifts. The infrared detector,
the optical sensor and the stabilizing diode are mounted on the
preamplifier board.

Part II-Airway-19
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual ,

TEMPERATURE
003, Ν20, ΛΑ
DETECTOR SIGNAL] MEASURING -
CHANNEL

ACX—200 А,
MEASURING の
UNIT
(PHOTO PHOTOMETER ψ
METER} PARAMETERS
TIMING va COZ, N20, AA
PROCESSOR

MOTOR SiSPEED , SERIAL

MOTOR COMMUNICATION

PRESSURE
SAMPLING
SYSTEM
PRESSURE
AN,
ACX—200 i
MEASURING BOARD
GENERAL DIAGRAM

VERİ +10 VDC REFout m

10 VOC REF. +10 VDC REF.

MOTOR CONTROL

MOTOR emp, (Teme. || TEMP. TEMPERATURE

DRIVER SENSOR AMP.
MY | >
=
MOTOR OPTIC.
SWITCH PREAMP。 TIMING

| GAIN CURR./ | ml PEAK SAMPLE, 5

LAMP prove, ads. var” PPocreor [MIX how 圖 MUX AD PAGA DA
a a $
a ©
= Now. È V
= CHANNEL SELECT
È MUX
E PEAK SEARCH
2< V
き EE DARK TIMING co?
=BE5 GAIN PAMPLE/
HOLD M2
1 SN20
τα >
Be +15 VDC CONST. PRES- PRES- | PRESS. SERIAL - 7
Зы BIAS sure >} sure ‘COMMUNICATION:
95 VOLT. 215 006 CURR. Sensor] 7 | AMP.
EEPROMI CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
EEPROM PH (OTOMETER
TER P/ PARAMETERS

АСХ-200 ΑΟΧ--200 때
MEASURING UNIT MEASURING BOARD

Figure 7 CO,/N,0/AA Measurement Block Diagram

Part IT-Aïrway-20
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.2.4 O, Measurement
The oxygen measurement is based on the paramagnetic
susceptibility, which is a unigue property of oxygen among all
gases generally present in a breathing gas mixture. The gas to be
measured and the reference gas, which usually is room air, are
conducted into a gap in an electromagnet with a strong
magnetic field switched on and off at a freguency of
approximately 110 Hz.

An alternating differential pressure is generated between the

sample and reference inputs due to forces acting to the oxygen
molecules in a magnetic field gradient.

The pressure is measured with a sensitive differential

transducer, rectified with a synchronous detector and amplified
to produce a DC voltage proportional to the oxygen partial
pressure difference of the two gases.

CAUTION: Due to the complicated and sensitive mechanical

construction any service inside the O, measuring unit should
not be attempted.

Electromagnet
Mixture

Switched
magnetic
Microphone field

Sample in p“

Reference in r

Figure 8 O, Measurement Principle

Part IJ-Airway-21
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.2.5 ACX Measuring Board

The measuring electronics can be divided into a few functional
blocks, which are described below (See the block diagram in
Figure 9).

CAUTION: The ACX-200 Measuring board can be repaired and

calibrated only at the factory.

The ACX Measuring board controls gas measurements. It

converts the photometer signal into digital data, calculates
results and transmits it to Gas mother board. The board
contains, in addition to the 80C51FA processor, EPROM, RAM,
and EEPROM, several analog and digital I/O functions.

Internal and external bus

The processor has access to the Measuring board peripherals

(memory, A/D converter, D/A converters, etc) via an internal
bus. For communication between the Gas mother board and the
Measuring board, there is an external bus in connector X1.

Memory

Memory components include 64k x 8 bit program memory

EPROM, 32k x 8 bit low current CMOS RAM powered by a data
retention voltage generation circuit in Power supply board, and
EEPROM for permanent calibration values and setup memory.

Part H-Airway-22
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

~10 VDC REF, +10 VDC REF.

EEPROM “ PHOTOMETER PARAMETERS
MOTOR

TEMPERATURE | TEMP. TEMPERATURE

ACX-200 PT AMP.
MEASURING
UNIT TIMING +

， [ x
SIGNAL Syl GAIN CURR. PEAK SAMPLE ご
——> mı ai, > wx ği em wmA > aGITA
. | 4
o
‘ | cow Es V
| CHANNEL SELECT Mux
OM-101
OXYGEN ・ PEAK SEARCH
MEASURING
UNIT : DARK DARK TIMING 3
,， GAIN SAMPLE/|
SAMP
・ Lt
・ CONST. L PRES- PRES- PRESS. SERIAL .
' CURR. SURE © | AMP
SENSOR) SURE Re
COMMUNICATION

:・ EEPRONL CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
BUFFER İL 7 Se DATA

: EPROM e LATCH ————>ADDRESS

: RAM
'АСХ-200 MEASURING BOARD

Figure 9 ACX Measuring Board Block Diagram

Part Il-Airway-23
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.2.6 ASX Agent Identification Bench

The ASX-200 agent identification bench has one measuring
chamber. Background compensation is done by subtracting the
background spectrum from the measured signal. Background
spectrum is measured simultaneously with the zeroing of the
ACX-200 unit. The resulting spectrum is analyzed to identify the
agent.

The ASX unit requires two calibrations. One is the time between
synchronization pulse and measured spectrum (time offset) of
the ASX-200 and the other is the peak wavelength of the narrow
bandpass filter. The former is calibrated automatically together
with the gas calibration of the ACX and the latter is calibrated at
the factory.

ASX Bord

ASX Unit

Figure 10 ASX Measuring Unit

Part Il-Airway-24
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

ASX Preamplifier Board

The absorption of infrared light is measured with a lead selenide
detector. The signal is amplified and then led to the measuring
board.

2.2.7 ASX Measuring Board

The measuring electronics can be divided into a few functional
blocks, which are described below (See the block diagram in
Figure 11).

The ASX measuring board controls the measurement. It

converts the ASX photometer signal to digital data, calculates
results and communicates with the main CPU through a serial
channel. The board contains, in addition to the 80C196
processor, EPROM, RAM, and EEPROM, several analog and
digital I/O functions.

Processor section

Processor is a 80C196 and works at 12 MHz. It has an internal

A/D-converter with a multiplexer. One channel is used for
converting temperature signal. Two others are for the
measurement signal from preamplifier board.

The processor uses an internal bus to access EPROM (64k x 8

bit), SRAM (8k x 8 bit) and two D/A-converters. It
communicates with the Gas mother board through a serial
channel (RXD, TXDB).

EEPROM is a 64 x 16 bit serial chip. It is partly protected so that

if jumper X1 is installed the processor can erase or write the
protected registers by serial communication commands. The
protected section contains permanent factory calibrations.

Part II-Airway-25
Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

i
04008 Ja1N|OLUD3JJ XSY

ASX Measuring Board Block Diagram

| P у '
100 109$ | ὃν
80 | ， | 30}
— 022095 |
ev | 290 RI :7 |
v/a O У
| А A
joule:
ul | 10005 ，
HA ev Y ja |

Part H-Airway-26
εν zv id ‘ 61-71A '8-9V
ーー -
JOJOW
UONDAUNLUWIOI Wa -30
10195 sna
AOSd ヨ 3 ーーー =>
LCA ‘OCA "ον 80
J0HH
6ulss950oJd odo
sa NAS esind 2446

Figure 11
У Tv TAN 1
961908 に
NOYdI ndo | - asuas
Wvas v 94291
dual |
Ev 9A
za
σα {9 |
ça
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.2.8 PVX Board

CAUTION: The PVX-100 measuring unit can be repaired only at
the factory.

NOTE: Overpressure or negative pressure of more than 300

cmH,0 to the flow and volume tubing should never be applied.

The board is intended to perform the following tasks

- Measure the pressures in airways and the speed of
breathing flow.
- Calculate tidal volume, minute volume, compliance and
other useful information on patient lungs.

Pressure transducers

There are two pressure transducers on the PVX board for airway
pressure measuring purposes.

The breathing flow of a patient passing through D-lite adapter

creates pressure difference. This pressure difference is measured
by pressure transducer, B1. Overpressure and negative pressure
in airways are measured by another pressure transducer B2.

NOTE: Never apply DIFFERENTIAL pressure higher than 25

cmHLO to the spirometry tubing. Make sure that both
spirometry tubes are always connected.

Temperature compensation

Temperature is measured by B1. This signal is used only for

temperature compensation of the pressure transducer B1 on the
PVX board.

Data processing

After the multiplexer, the signals, PRESS, FLOW0, FLOW1, and

TEMP are A/D converted for data processing.

External communication

Communication between the PVX board and the Gas mother

board is established in serial form, using the serial channel (pins
10 and 11) of CPU on the PVX board.

Part II-Airway-27
Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

©
x
3119523 8
o
s
0
100 10406 | £
+
Board

za 4919A Νο o
-409 =
| va n
o
ul 0006 | σα o
Mother

ХПИ

PVX board block diagram

IBA
Z0
195330 (leupd }U04
Gas

\31508 sng

Part II-Airway-28
000 [ 92186914 509
from/to

ono «| AIOA o
sa 097 NI
aunssasg 山008
so 1401
IMA M
SUSA
e
-409 dial AT | singsarg wooy
19898 a/v
ua XNA BUD 14024 цю) №
Mol Pug

Figure 12
| BjnsSajd 509
asuas
SS3ad > 96614
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.2.9 Gas Mother Board

The Gas mother board controls power supply to each measuring
unit, as well as the serial communication between the units and
the module processor. There are connectors for the pump,
valves and gas measuring units on the board. The board
contains a processor which controls the functions within the
module.

The tasks of the module processor are:

- to receive commands from the main CPU board and pass

them on to Measuring boards.
- to gather measurement results from the Measuring boards,
analyze them, and transmits data to the main CPU board.
- to control the valves and pump based on the data which
ACX Measuring board transmits.

Main parts

- © Module processor 80C196KC/16 MHz.

- 16 MHzoscillator.
- EPROM program memory.
- External RAM memory
- EEPROM.
- Address and data bus latch.
- Address decoding GAL-circuit.
- — 4-channel serial communication IC (QUART, D4).

External communication

Serial communication bus inside the module processor is used.

The bus is connected to module bus via RS-485 buffer. Transmit
and reception controls of buffer are controlled by the processor.

Connections to Measuring boards

Data collection from the measuring units takes place in serial

communication bus. Serial communication lines of the
measuring units are connected to QUART IC on the Gas mother
board; Channel 1 - АСХ, channel 2 - ASX, channels 3 - PVX,
channel 4 - not in use). The transmit side of QUART has a buffer
IC and the receipt side has a pull-up resistor.

Part II-Airway-29
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Valves, pump, and infrared lamps control

Valves are controlled by ACX Measuring board from which the

control signals are ran through buffer IC to the valve connector.
OCCLUS signal controls the pressure (occlusion) vaive and
ZERO signal controls the zero valve.

Control signal for the pump comes from the module processor.
The signal is 50 Hz pulse-width modulated sguare wave.
Control command is received from ACX Measuring board in
serial communication.

Control command (LAMP) of the infrared lamps of the

chambers comes from the module processor.

Key push reading

CPU reads the front panel key pushes.

Reset

Voltage supervising circuit performs power-on reset. Reset from

the module bus is connected via RS-485 buffer.

Part Il-Airway-30
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

X4: OM
SENSOR NRESET

X2: AOX X5: ASX xi: X3: PVX ANALOG: VOL.

> UNIT SENSOR AUX VO SENSOR AWFLOW, AWPRE

buffer
TI buffer

Y Y
SERIAL COMM. CHIP <

Υ у
EPROM CPU MODULE pus
SERIAL COMM.
RAM <— > RS-485 buffer >

X11: MODULE
KEYBOARD

PUMPDRV > PUMP DRIVER > X7: PUMP

LAMPDRV 、| LAMP DRIVER | | X9:ACX X8:ASX

LAMPS

ZERO OCCLUS VALVE DRIVERS > X12: VALVES

5 JCPURESN x m
MODULE BUS as
RESET 85
Y OS

RS-465 butter >? NRESET

> Lo
POWER RESET © 一 一一

Figure 13 Gas Mother Board Block Diagram

Part II-Airway-31
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.2.10 Gas Interface Board

The Gas Interface Board, B-GAS is used for connecting an
Airway Module to the Central Unit.

The board connects Airway Module signals to the module bus

and supplies voltages from the module bus to the Airway
Module.

On the board there is a fuse (T4A) and some capacitors to

regulate the power supply.

Part IT-Airway-32
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

2.3 Connectors and Signals

Module Bus Connector Configuration

Module Rear Panel 25-Pin Male D-Connector and B-GAS Board Rear Panel
Female D-Connector

Pin No VO Signal Notes

1 I RESET_RS485
2 I -15 VDC
3 I +15 VDIRTY
4 I +15 VDC
5 1/0 -DATA_RS485
6 1/0 DATA_RS485
7 Ground & Shield
8 I -RESET_RS485
9 n/c
10 n/c
11 n/c
12 n/c
13 Ground & Shield
14 I +24/+32 VDIRTY Depends on power supply
15 I GroundDIRTY
16 n/c
17 n/c
18 n/c
19 n/c
20 I GASFR For factory use only
21 I CTSD For factory use only
22 I TXDD For factory use only
23 ο RXDD For factory use only
24 I +5 VDC
25 I +5 VDC DIRTY for infrared lamps

For B-GAS CPU Mother Board connector, see CPU Bus

Connector in the Central Unit Section.

Part II-Airway-33
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Gas Mother Board Connectors

X1 Module connector. Serial communication bus to the main

CPU board. Supply voltages.

X2 ACX Measuring board.

X3 PVX board.

X4 Oxygen measuring unit.

X5 ASX Measuring board.

X7 Sampling pump.

X8, X9 Power supply for infrared lamps (ACX, ASX)

X10 Fan.

X11 Module front panel keys

X12 Valves.

Part II-Airway-34
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Connector pin configurations

ACX Measuring board (X1) - Gas mother board (X2)

Pin No. a b c
1 +15 V NC AGND
2 -15V NC +10 VREF
3 AOUT6 NC AOUT5 AA
4 AOUT4 VL NC AOUT3 CO,
5 AOUT2 0, NC AOUT1 N。O
6 DAC1 FLOW NC DACO PRES
7 AIN7 SAL NC ADC6 VOUT R
8 ADC5 AWL NC ADC4 VOUT IR
9 ADC3 O, NC ADC2
10 ADC1 AWP NC AIN4 SSIGN
11 NC AGND NC
12 NC AGND NC
13 NC LAMP NC
14 NC PB5 NC
15 NC SSYNC NC
16 RBD2 SMOTOR NC
17 -RESET -PCO TO RTSO
18 SEROUT 0 NC SERIN 0
19 P11 PC2 FGAIN 1 P10
(20 OPO RTSA PC3 FGAIN 2 INTO
21 SEROUT 1 PC4 OCCLUS SERIN 1
22 OP1 RTSB PC5 PUMPON IP2 TIMERIN 0
23 SEROUT 2 PC6 ZERO SERIN 2
24 NC PC7 RTSO NC
25 NC PAO NC
26 NC PAi NC
27 NC PA2 NC
28 INTI PA3 INT3
29 +5 V DRV PA4 +5У
30 +15 VDIRTY PAS +5V
31 +12V PA6 21 VAC
32 GND DIRTY PA7 ALR CALL DGND

NC = not connected ~
AIN is an AD-converter and AOUT is a DA-converter in ACX board. |
ADC is an AD-converter and DAC is a DA-converter in the Gas mother board. i

Part İl-Airway-35
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

ASX board (X5) - Gas mother board (X5)

Pin No. Signal

1 Analog ground
2 N/C
3 N/C
4 N/C
5 +15 V
6 -15V
7 DIRB (not used)
8 RXD
9 TXDB
10 N/C
11 -RESET
12 +5 V
B +15 VDIRTY
14 Digital ground

Part Il-Airway-36
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

PVX board (X1) - Gas mother board (X3)

Pin No. a b с
1 +15 V NC AGND
2 -15V NC +10 VREF
3 NC NC NC
4 NC NC NC
5 NC NC NC
6 DAC1 FLOWY NC DACO PRES
7 VOL NC NC
8 FLOW NC NC
9 NC NC NC
10 PRESS NC NC
1 NC NC NC
12 NC NC NC
13 NC NC NC
14 NC NC NC
15 NC NC NC
16 NC NC NC
17 -RESET NC NC
18 NC DIR NC
19 NC NC NC
20 NC NC NC
21 RxD NC TxDP
22 NC NC NC
23 NC NC NC
24 NC NC NC
25 NC NC NC
26 NC NC NC
27 NC NC NC
28 NC NC NC
29 NC NC +5V
30 +15 VDIRTY NC +5 V
31 NC NC NC
32 GND DIRTY NC DGND

Part İl-Airway-37
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES

3.1 General Service Information

Usually field service is limited to replacing the faulty circuit’
boards or mechanical parts. The boards are then returned to
Datex for repair.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide the

unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed fault
description.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with appropriate equipment

shall perform the tests and repairs outlined in this section.
Unauthorized service may void warranty of the unit.

NOTE: After any component replacement see Chapters

Adjustments and Calibrations.

Part II-Airway-38
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

3.2 Preventive Maintenance

We recommend that you perform these checks after any service
and at least once a year to keep the AS/3 Airway Module in
good condition.

1. Visual inspection

Fan is running and rear panel dust filter is clean (clean it

at least once a month).

If the module is disassembled, check that grounding

wires and all connectors are properly connected and
there is no loose object inside the module. Check that no
tube is in contact with the sampling pump or oxygen
measuring unit. Check also that tubes are not pinched
and there is no sharp bend before attaching the module
box.

2. Functional checks

Use an original Datex sampling line and clean D-fend water

trap. Connect the sampling line to the water trap before
switching the power on. Wait five minutes for the Airway
module to warm-up.

As the sampling line is taking in room air, the numeric

display of FIO, should be 21 + 1 after five minutes.

Select Enflurane in Agent select menu. Perform gas

calibration (see Operator’s manual) when at least 10
minutes have passed after the power on. The measured
values should be within the tolerance ranges listed below.

Gas Tolerance range

CO, +0.5 % CO, (> 8 % CO,) or
+0.4 % CO, (<8 % CO»)
O, +5 % O, (about 100 % O,)
№0 +5 % N30 (about 100 % N,0)
ENFL + 0.6 %

Press Normal screen key to end calibration.

Block the sampling line and make sure that the Occlusion
warning comes on after 15 seconds.

Part II-Airway-39
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Remove the water trap and make sure that the Air leak
warning comes on after 15 seconds.

Perform the sampling system leak test (see chapter 4.2).

Check the rates of main flow, side flow, and oxygen

measurement reference flow.

Perform the water separation test (see chapter 4.2).

Go to Service Menu and ACX Service Menu (see chapter 5).

Check the functions of zero and occlusion valves, and

pump. Additionally key (button) function in AO and
AOV models. ]

Check working pressure (Work press). It should be about

700 mmHg. Check also oxygen measurement pressure
difference (OMin-OMref). It should be between 5 to 10
mmHg.

Exit the Service Menu.

Perform gas calibration again. The measured values

should be within the tolerance ranges listed above. If
required, perform the adjustments.

Press Normal screen key to end calibration.

Part II-Airway-40
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly

The Airway module (AiOV model) is disassembled in the
following way. See chapter 6.1 for the exploded view of the unit:

a) Remove three screws from the rear panel.

b) Remove one thumb screw and one 5 mm cross recess

screw from the bottom of the Airway module case.

с) Slide the case rearward and detach it from the module.

d) Lift off the top protection cover.

Now two pc boards are exposed: PVX board (front) and ACX
Measuring board (rear).

The PVX board can be detached by pulling sideways after two

tubes are disconnected from two valves.

The ACX Measuring board can be detached by pulling sideways

after a ribbon cable connector is disconnected and a tube is
pulled off from pressure transducer.

e) Remove the bronze plate from the right side of the

module by pulling it up.

f) To remove the Gas mother board cover, remove two front

panel screws from the side of the module, and the D-
connector screws.

5) The front panel can be detached by removing three

screws.

h) Tubing system plate with tubes and flow cassettes can be

lifted off.

i) Fan can be lifted off after plastic pc board rail is detached.

Gas mother board is attached to the side of the module with

screws.

The ASX unit, the ACX Measuring unit, and the O, measuring
unit are attached to the chassis with two screws each.

Part II-Airway-41
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

The pump and its magnetic shield can be removed from the
chassis by unscrewing the two screws beneath two springs at
the port side of the pump.

Damping chamber/ filter case can be slided out of hooks.

Reassembling is essentially reversing what was described above.

CAUTION: When reassembling the module, make sure that the

tubes and cables are not pinched between the boards and the
cover.

Part IT-Airway-42
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

3.4 Adjustments and Calibrations

See Operator’s manual for normal gas calibration instructions.

3.4.1 Gas Sampling System Adjustment

Flow rates should be measured and possibly adjusted under the
following conditions:

- After any part within the sampling system has been

replaced
- Gas response is slow

NOTE: Adjust the flows with a new, clean D-fend water trap
and original Datex sampling line.

NOTE: Before adjusting the flows, make sure that there is no

leakage in the sampling system.

NOTE: Let the monitor warm up for 30 minutes before

measuring flow rates.

For the flow rate measurements a flowmeter with a low flow

resistance and capability to measure low flow rates is required.
A normal length of sampling line has to be connected to the
monitor as it has a considerable effect on the flow.

The flow rates are adjusted by changing the flow resistance

cassettes (constriction cassettes) in the sampling system. See
Table 1 in chapter Gas Sampling System for the alternative
cassettes.

The adjustments and the respective constrictions to be adjusted

are shown in the next figure.

Flow Rate
If any flow rates are not correct, first replace the D-fend water
trap. Then recheck the incorrect flows before adjusting the
flow rates.

The sampling flow rate is measured by a flowmeter at the

sampling line. The rate should be between 180 and 220 ml/min.

Part II-Airway-43
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

The flow rate is adjusted by changing the flow cassette which is

located behind the pump (no. 6).

MMO|J
100 $09

一一 一
9

Jaquupy?
6uldulpd
sjapow AOIV 'OIV-り

αἱ | Buunsosy

100
vun
XSY
21185914}

ayyessag,
il 38900800]
22138924

FE TE
Buunsoay,
00Z-XQYV
Hun
NDA
0:37

У
ap

ЗАМА
+
diy Wooy

aldwoS
Ni $09
wooyJy

ON

Figure 14 Gas Sampling System Adjustment Chart

Part II-Airway-44
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Rate of the side flow is checked by blocking the side flow after
the water trap and measuring the flow rate as above. The rate
should decrease by 10 to 27 ml/min.

Measurement flow and reference flow of the oxygen measuring

unit are checked as follows:

{a) Connect the flowmeter behind the flow cassette (no. 2)

ahead of the oxygen measuring unit REF inlet. The
flowmeter should show between 25 and 42 ml/min. The
flow rate is adjusted by changing the cassette.

(b) Connect the flowmeter between the oxygen measuring

unit IN inlet and the tube which is connected to it. The
flow rate should be between 18 and 25 ml/min larger
than the REF flow. This is adjusted by changing the flow
cassettes (no. 4 and 5) which are located between the IN
and OUT inlets.

(©) Flow rate of CO, absorber is measured by connecting the

flowmeter to the unoccupied connector of the flow
cassette (no. 1). Make sure that the monitor is in normal
situation (APNEA text on the screen). The flow rate
should be zero. When the gas zeroing takes place, the rate
should be between 180 and 220 ml/min. The gas zeroing
can be simulated in the ACX Service Menu manually
(pump start, zero valve on). The flow rate is adjusted by
changing the cassette (no. 1).

CAUTION: When changing cassettes make sure that the tubes

are reconnected properly.
Flow to Constr. No, Nominal value
be adjusted (see Figure| (tolerance) ml/min
14)
sampling flow 6 200 (180 to 220)
side flow 3 10 to 27

O, measurement in 4and5 45 to 60

O, reference in 2 , 25 to 42

CO, absorber flow 1 180 to 220 when

zeroing

Part II-Airway-45
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

NOTE: Changing any of the cassettes will have some effect on

the other flow rates. After any adjustments check the other flow
rates as well.

O, measurement flow pressure measurement

Gradual decrease of main flow rate due to the water trap filter
clogging can be checked by measuring pressure difference
between the O, measurement flow and the O, reference flow.
Remember that the sampling line should be attached to the
water trap before starting the test.

The pressure difference is automatically checked after every gas

zeroing.

See ACX Service Menu chapter later in this manual for further
information.

3.4.2 Oxygen Measurement Unit Adjustments

The only field service procedures for the O, measuring unit are
the offset (zero), gain, and frequency adjustments. In case of any
other trouble, the measuring unit should be replaced and the
faulty one sent to Datex for repair.

Offset (zero) adjustment

Because the oxygen measuring unit is a differential sensor,

which actually measures the difference between the O,
concentrations in the sample and reference gases, its output
must be adjusted to equal zero when atmospheric air is present
at both inputs.

a) Connect a digital voltmeter to the output of the O,

measuring unit at pin 7 of connector X4 on the Gas
mother board.

b) Let the monitor draw in room air and adjust the voltage
to zero with the O, measuring unit trim resistor
designated "ZERO" (see Figure 15) in the O, module PC
board. The potentiometers are located at the same side of
the measuring unit as the tubing connectors.

Part II-Airway-46
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

c) Perform gas calibration (refer to Operator's Manual).

Gain adjustment

a) Adjust the O, measuring unit offset as described in the

previous section.

b) Sample 100 % oxygen and adjust the measuring unit

output to between 7.7 V and 8.3 V with the trim resistor
designated 'GAIN' (see Figure 15). If the output will not
exceed 7.7V, it is acceptable that the output exceeds at
least 5 V. At that level software is still able to compensate
the output.

c) Check and if necessary readjust the offset and gain until

the readings remain stable.

c) Perform gas calibration (refer to Operator's Manual).

Temperature compensation adjustment

Factory calibrated.

Freguency adjustment

The switching freguency of the electromagnet of the O,

measuring unit has been selected to be 110 Hz to avoid
interference from harmonics of both 50 Hz and 60 Hz mains
freguency.

Fine adjustment is seldom necessary. However, if you wish to

reduce the effects of mechanical resonance peaks of the cabinet
which appears as high noise level of the O, measuring unit
analog output (above 20 mV peak to peak) it is worth of trying
the fine freguency adjustment. One turn of trimmer
"FREOUENCY" will change the freguency by 1.5 Hz. Try to find
minimum noise but do not deviate more than +5 Hz.

Part II-Airway-47
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

ZERO
TEMP.COMP.
GAIN
FREQUENCY

Gas connectors

OUT IN REF
© © (6
0
Vibration insulation

Figure 15 O,Measuring Unit Adjustments

3.3.3 Flow Calibration

PVX board is calibrated at the factory and due to the board’s
design calibration is not regularly needed. The calibration data
is saved into the board’s EEPROM memory and if the software
EPROM of the board is changed the calibration must be
performed. It is recommended to perform the calibration both
with adult values using the D-lite, and with paediatric values
using Pedi-lite.

a) Connect spirometry tube to the Airway module pressure

and volume connector, and the D-lite sensor to it. To
improve the accuracy, the endotracheal tube and all
acessories which are in use with normal monitoring
should be attached also during calibration.

Part II-Airway-48
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

b) Go to service menu: Monitor Setup -> Install Service

(Password 16 - 4 - 34)-> Service View (26 - 23 - 8) >
Modules -> Gas Unit -> PVX -> Flow Calibration.

After the flow is zeroed ( "Zero OK" message displayed )

attach Calibration Pump or Spirometry Tester (code
884202) to the flow sensor ( D-lite or Pedi-lite ). To start
the calibration select Adult or Paediatric sensor
calibration according to the flow sensor used.

d) Set calibration volume for adult 1000 ml and for the

pediatric patients 300ml.

Work on the calibration pump slowly, appr. 1 pump in 5

seconds, pump until 'adjust'-message appears. If you use
the Spirometry Tester, perform the calibration according
to the tester instructions.

Adjust the reading to match the calibration volume used (

1000 ml for the D-lite and 300 ml for the Pedi-lite ).

Press Normal Screen to return to waveform display.

Part II-Airway-49
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

4 TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 General Troubleshooting Chart

TROUBLE POSSIBLE CAUSE/TREATMENT

No response to Sampling line or water trap blocked or loose, or improperly

breathing attached.
Water trap container full.
Interface cable to monitor disconnected.

See the Gas sampling system troubleshooting.

SENSOR INOP. The temperature is too high, check fan and filter at the rear
message panel
Communication error, check timeout and bad checksum
values at the service menu
Check Airway Module connection cable, and supply voltages.
Check ACX measuring board
xx ZEROING ERROR- | Gas zeroing failed. Condensation or residual gases are
message affecting zero measurement. Allow module to run drawing
room air for half an hour and calibrate again.

AIR LEAK-message Air leak in sampling system. Probably waiter trap or the
sampling line is not attached properly. Gas zero valve failure.
Pump failure or gas outlet blockage. Supply voltage missing
REPLACE TRAP- Flow resistance increased due to residue built-up on water
message trap membrane. Replace the water trap.

REBREATHING- CO» concentration in inspiratory air is too high. Possibly CO9

message absorber in ventilation is saturated. Change the absorber.
OCCLUSION- Sampling line or water trap is occluded. Water trap container
message is full. If occlusion persists check internal tubing for blockages.
Check the power supply voltages.

SELECT AGENT- No anaesthetic agent is selected though delivery is started.

message Vaporizer valve is broken. Traces of cleaning or disinfecting
agent in the water trap container affecting the readouts.
Replace the water trap.
No response to any gas | Sampling line, water trap, or internal tubing, blocked or loose,
or improperly attached.
Pressure valve malfunction. Pump failure. Supply voltage
missing. Serial communication error. Check those items.

Part H-Airway-50
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

TROUBLE POSSIBLE CAUSE/TREATMENT

Sudden increase in gas Measuring chamber contamination.

display
+15 V supply voltages missing.

Water trap malfunction. Check all internal tubing and the

interior of the water trap for occlusions or leaks. Replace
water trap.
Check flow rates.

Abnormally high Pressure transducer failure. Exchange the ACX Measuring

response to all gases board.
(or abnormally low) or
sudden occlusion
warning

Random output Chopper motor timing pulses out of sync.

(resembling noise) Chopper motor not running,
motor faulty or connection loose.
Chopper motor driver transistor C-E open circuit or current
limiter short circuit.
Exchange the ACX measuring board.
Strong drift in all gases Leakage in the sampling line or internal tubing (especially in
conjunction with too low readings).
Exchange the ACX measuring board.

Part ii-Airway-51
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Supply voltage troubleshooting

TROUBLE POSSIBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

“Gas module removed” +5V lost Gas module CPU not running. Check
No Gas module exists after Gas Interface cable.
turning the monitor on. Check +5V from module mother board
and timeout value from module service
page.

Random CO, value. +5Vdirty lost Check the IR lamp resistance

No CO, or AA response. (approximately 4 Ohm)and the lamp
Abnormal AA mixture voltage (module mother board
messages and AA selections. connectors X8 and X9)
“Unknown Agent” X8 = ASX lamp(i-models)
“Zero error” after zeroing X9 = ACX lamp
“Calibrate Agent ID”
“Sensor Inop”

“Continuous Occlusion” + 15V lost Check voltage from module mother

“Sensor Inop” board X1 pin 4, X2 pin la, X3 pin la, X4
Random curve trace and gas pin 9 and X5 pin 5.
digit values(resembling noise).
Pressure and flow curves
extremely low.

CO, value high. - 15V lost Check voltage from module mother
“ Air leak” board X1 pin 2, X2 pin 2a, X3 pin 2a, X4
“Sensor Inop” pin 6 and X5 pin 6.
Paw and Flow curves extremely
high.

“Air Leak”-message remains on | +15V dirty lost Check voltage from module mother
the screen. board X1 pin 3, X2 pin30a , X3 pin 30a,
X4 pin 1 and X5 pin 13.

Fan Stopped. +32V lost Check the fuse on Gas interface board.
Check the fan and regulated fan supply
voltage from module mother board
connector X10.

“Calibrating gas sensor” One or more of the Check those voltages as above.
remains on the screen. voltages lost: +5Vdirty,
+15V,-15V, +15Vdirty
ACX measuring board Check whether the ACX software
not communicating with version is available in the service menu.
the Gas mother board. If not, replace the ACX measuring board.
ACX measuring unit Replace the ACX measuring unit.
badly contaminated.

Part Il-Airway-52
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

4.2 Gas Sampling System Troubleshooting

The faults which can occur in the sampling system are: leaks or
blockages in the tubing, failure of the sampling pump or the
magnetic valves, or diminishing of the flow rates because of
pump aging or dirt accumulating in the internal tubing.

The following checks should help in localizing the fault.

Whenever suspecting the sampling system and always after
working on the sampling system check and if necessary adjust
the flow rates.

The sampling system details are illustrated in Figures 4 and 5.

CAUTION: The special internal sample tube is mechanically

fragile. Sharp bends will cause leaks.

NOTE: D-fend water trap should be replaced when the

OCCLUSION message appears during the monitor startup.

NOTE: If any liquid has entered the ACX-200 measuring unit

due to water trap filter failure, contact Datex Technical Services.

- Connect power cord and sampling line. Turn the power

on and wait until the initialization is over.

1. SAMPLING SYSTEM LEAK TEST

1) Choose ACX Service Data page in the Gas Unit Service

Menu.

2) Connect a tube to the sample out connector and drop its

other end into a glass of water.

3) Block the sample inlet, reference flow of the oxygen

measuring unit, and the CO, absorber port that draws
room air in. Wait for one minute.
There should be less than 1 bubble per 10 seconds coming
out of the tube. Bubble should not move upwards more
than 11 mm per 30 seconds inside the tube. If it does,
there is a leak between the pump and the sample out
connector.

Part II-Airway-53
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

4) Perform leak test to the CO, absorber by opening zero

valve. The maximum permitted leakage is the same as
above.

CAUTION: Do not turn the pump off while performing the leak
test. Negative pressure in the sampling system will suck in
waiter in the glass.

2. WATER SEPARATION

1) Dip the patient end of the sampling line into water

quickly (about a half second) three times at 45 seconds’
interval. After that drop the end into water and lift it up
when the sampling line is totally filled with water.

2) Check that all the water goes into the trap container and
not into the monitor.

3. STEAM TEST FOR THE SPECIAL TUBES

Choose Halothane as anaesthetic agent and let the monitor

sample room air. Then quickly feed air of 100 % relative
humidity (for instance from a kettle in which you are boiling
water) to the monitor. If the digital reading jumps as much as
0.1 % replace the special (Nafion) tubes.

Gas Sampling System Troubleshooting Chart

Part YI-Airway-54
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

4.3 O, Measurement Troubleshooting

Because of the complex and very sensitive construction of the
oxygen measuring unit no repairs should be attempted inside
the unit. Instead, if the fault has been found in the measuring
unit itself, it should be replaced and the faulty unit be sent to
Datex for repair.

In cases of no response to O, or strong drift, check the tubing for

loose connections, blockages and leaks.

CAUTION: Never apply overpressure to the O, measuring unit

as the pressure transducer may be permanently damaged.

If the message ‘O, zero error’ is displayed check the O,

measuring unit output voltage on Gas mother board (see Section
Offset adjustment).

If the adjustment range of the (software) calibration is

insufficient check the O, measuring unit output voltage and
adjust the gain if necessary (see Section Gain adjustment).

If there are problems with O, response time check the O,

measurement flow rate and adjust it if necessary (see Section
Gas Sampling System Adjustments).

If the O, signal is noisy, check the measurement unit suspension.

Freguency adjustment may help in some cases (see Section
Freguency adjustment).

Part 1l-Airway-55
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

4.4 ACX Troubleshooting

CAUTION: The measuring unit ACX-200 can be repaired and
calibrated only at the factory. Due to sensitivity of the
measuring chamber surface, the measuring chamber of ACX-200
should not be attempted to clean with any detergent, not even
with water.

The ACX troubleshooting is carried out in the General

Troubleshooting scheme. The ACX testing is explained at the
ACX Service Information section, please refer to it.

Part IT-Airway-56
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

4.5 ASX Troubleshooting

NOTE: Please read also troubleshooting section in Operator's
Manual.

CAUTION: The agent identification bench ASX-200 can only be

repaired and calibrated only at the factory.

TROUBLE POSSIBLE CAUSE/TREATMENT

AGENT MIXTURE- Repeat calibration.

message when If the module contains ASX-100, it is not capable to identify
calibration gas calibration gas R23, therefore the message. However, the ASX-100
(Freon) is fed will still calibrate with R23.

No response from ASX Communication between ASX unit and Central Unit is lost. ASX
bench disconnected or faulty. Check that the motor is running.

No identification

Go to ASX service
—— > view and check peak
normal value

Is ASX motor Check ASX unit

running? ~ “| supply voltages

Check Err status in Gas

Mother board service page.
Fault in serial communicat.,
ReplaceASX board or Gas
Mother Board.

ASX Troubleshooting Chart

Part II-Airway-57
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

4.6 PVX Board troubleshooting

CAUTION: The measuring unit PVX-100 can be repaired and
calibrated only at the factory.

NOTE: Never apply DIFFERENTIAL pressure higher than 25

cmH,0 to the spirometry tubing. Make sure that both
spirometry tubes are always connected.

NOTE: Never apply overpressure or negative pressure of more

than 300 cmH,O to the spirometry tubing.

No spirometry

Go to PVX service
view

Check Err status in Gas

Mother board service page.

NOTE: The PWX software string does not appear onto the list
when using the combination of G-AOV module and monitor
software S-___94,

Part H-Airway-58
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

4.7 Gas Mother Board Troubleshooting

Due to the complexity of the LSI circuitry there are only a few
faults in the CPU digital electronics that can be located without
special equipment.

Check that the RAM, EPROM, CPU and other I.C.'s that are on
the socket are properly.

See Gas mother board Service pages for more information.

Instructions After Replacing the Software or Gas

Mother Board
After replacing the software or Gas mother board board:

- perform the gas calibration.

- re-establish previously used settings or inform the

monitor user that settings are default values.

Part II-Airway-59
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

4.8 Error Messages

MESSAGE EXPLANATION
Occlusion The sample tube inside or outside the monitor
is blocked or water trap is occluded. If
occlusion persists, measured gas values
disappear.
Air leak -the water trap is not connected

-the gas outlet is blocked

-there is a leak in the sampling line inside the
module. If air leak persists measured gas
values disappear.

Replace trap Indicates residue build-up on the water trap

membrane. This decreases air flow.

Zero valve error Opening the valve does not change working
pressure enough.

Gas calibration is not available Calibration not allowed during the first 5
during the first 5 minutes after power up and in mentioned
minutes / during situtations.
occlusion / during air leak
Select agent No agent selected

Continuous occlusion. Check Occlusion over 40 seconds.

sampling lineand water trap.
Air leak detected. Check water Air leak over 40 seconds
trap and sample gas out-flow.
Press normal screen to continue.

Part II-Airway-60
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

MESSAGE EXPLANATION
CO»:

Zero error Unsuccessful zeroing

Unstable Unsuccessful calibration

CO: over scale CO signal exceeds the maximum waveform

area

Os:

Og zero error Unsuccessful zeroing

O over scale Os signal exceeds the maximum waveform
area

Op Unstable Unsuccessful calibration

N20:

N20 zero error Unsuccessful zeroing

N20 Unstable Unsuccessful calibration

Ane agents:

AA zero error Unsuccessful zeroing

Zero error

AA unstable Unsuccessful calibration

Unstable

AA over scale AA signal exceeds the maximum waveform

area

Menu messages during

calibration:

Zero error Unsuccessful zeroing

Adjust Calibration gas accepted and monitor is ready

for adjusting the gas values to match the
calibration gas concentration

Unstable Unsuccessful calibration

Part II-Airway-61
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

5 SERVICE VIEW
Monitor Setup
Monitor Setup Install/Service
waveform Fields Units
Digit Fields 100 Service View | 26 100
Select Mode Save Modes
Set Time and Date Interfacing
Install/Service | 16 Analog Outputs
Normal Screen Monitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu
0 0

Give password. Give password.

To enter Airway Module Service menu:

1. Press the MONITOR SETUP key.

The Setup menu appears.

Turn ComWheel to highlight Install/Service and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 16 - 4 - 34.
The Instail/Service menu appears.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 26 - 23 - 8.

Turn the Com Wheel to highlight Modules and push.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight the Gas Unit and push.

Part II-Airway-62
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

5.1 Gas Mother Board

Mother Board Service Data

Previous Menu GAS ACK ASK РУХ
Oper state £ C Û 5
ERR status LE Č € 0
Serial comm FFFF FFFE £ 0
Rep status EFFC С 타다 FEFF
Gen sta 0

Timeouts 65525
Bad checksum: 65535
Bad c-s by me 1

Service Data
Oper State

Internal operation state of the module:

0...9 function performed, if staying on, failure is
indicated
10...29 Initialization
30...39 Normal operation state
40...49 Zeroing
50...59 Calibrating

Part II-Airway-63
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Err status

Indicates measuring unit malfunction:

GAS: 0 no error
1 error in ACX measuring system
2 error in ACX communication
10 error in ASX measuring system
20 error in ASX communication
40 error in PVX measuring system
80 error in PVX communication
Possible failure source: Gas CPU, ACX, ASX or PVX.

ACX: 0 no error
if not 0, replace ACX unit

ASX: 0 no error
if not 0, replace ASX unit

PVX: 0 no error
if not 0, replace PVX unit

Serial Communication

Serial Copmmunication indicates a state of serial

communication between the module processor and a measuring
unit.

GAS: FFFF Continuously

ACX: FFFF Continuously

ASX: Value is for factory use only.

PVX: Value is for factory use only.

Rep status

Rep status is a four-digit number, where all digits, abcd , can

have different values.

Gas rep status:

Part l-Airway-64
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

a 0 Nosevoflurane or desflurane measurement

available
3 ACX can measure sevoflurane and desflurane

b: 0 No gas measurements available

F CO2, 02 N20 and AA measuremnts available
3 CO2 and O2 available

c. 0 No ACX, ASX, nor PVX board running

1 ACXboard running
3 ACXand ASX board running
5 ACX and PVX board running
7 ACX, ASX and PVX board running

d 0 Normal operation state

1 Occlusion
2 Aïrleak
4 Other sampling system error
8 Replace trap

ACX rep status:

a empty Normal operation state

1 ACX initialization

b empty Normal operation state

2 Occlusion
4 Air leak

c C Normal operation state

others values used in manuafcture’s testing

d 0 Normal operation state

others values used in manuafcture’s testing

АСХ rep status FFFF continuously

PVX rep status FFFF continuously

General Status 0 Normal operation state

8000 Initialization
If not 0 or 8000, replace the Gas mother board.

Part 11-Airway-65
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many

times the module has not responded to the monitor's inquiry.
Bad checksums is also a cumulative number that indicates how
many times communication from the module to monitor broke
down (first line) and from monitor to the module broke down
(second line).
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how
many communication errors the module has detected.
The monitor starts counting these items at power up and resets
to zero at power off. The nonzero values do not indicate a
failure, but the continuous counting indicates either serial
communication failure or module not in place.

The timeouts etc numbers should not grow faster than 50/s.

Part II-Airway-66
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

5.2 ACX Service menu

ACK Service Data
Pump ctrl 202 Uz Nau ΔΑ
Fall time 280 440 320 400
Zero valve ctrl | Noise OFF 0 0 0 0
Calib zero 28380 16325 46869 25765
Pres valve ctr} gain 9060 8437 4686 21838
Ex p 8 2090 0 -2
Noise Meas Insp 8 2090 9 -2
Fall i
time Meas Pressures:
Work gress Ambient
7 2 sero 765
53
i
Previous Menu re: chnl
Tera 725 in-re

Pump ON -
Zero valve OFF Pres valve UFF
ACX temp 32
C02-02 Delay 400
C02-N20 Delay 80
CO2-AA Delay 240
AUX ASK Delay 676

Timeouts 0
Bad checksums 0
Bad c-s by moc 0

Menu items:

1. Turn pump on/off

2. Turn zero valve on/off

3. Turn pressure valve on/off

4. Noise measurement

5 Fall time measurement

6 Return to previous menu

Fall time

Fall time indicates the response time of the measuring units.

Select ‘Fall time meas’ from the menu. Notice that text ‘feed’
appears under each gas. Feed the calibration gas until every |
‘feed’ is replaced by ‘start’. Remove the sampling line quickly
from the gas source.

Check that fall times are:

O2 < 480) ms

Part II-Airway-67
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

CO2 < 360 ms

N20 < 360 ms
AA <520 ms

NOTE: The measurement can be performed only with the

modules using module software 884295.

Noise measurement

O2, CO2 and N20

Feed the calibration gas until the gas values are stabilized on
screen. Start the measuring by selecting ‘Noise meas’ from the
menu. After 10 seconds stop measuring by reselecting ‘Noise
meas’. Close the gas source. Noise values should be: O2< 100,
CO2 < 20, N2O< 150.

AA

Select halothane for anaesthetic agent. Feed the room air until
gas values are stabilized. Perform the noise measuring as above,
the value should be < 20.

NOTE: The measurement can be performed only with the

modules using module software 884295.

Calib zero and gain

These values are calibration constants of zero and gain for each
gas. The zero values may change at gas zeroing, the gain values
at gas calibration.

Exp, Insp

Gas concentration value from the ACX measuring unit

Pressures

Ambient is the ambient pressure measured at the initialization.

Work press is the internal pressure of sampling system
measured by the ACX measuring board pressure transducer.
Typically the value is appr. 700 mmHg. The difference between
these two pressures is Amb-Work and if the pump is
functioning, it should be > 40.

Part II-Airway-68
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

OM(in-ref) is a pressure difference between the O,

measurement flow and the O, reference flow. This pressure
difference is automatically checked after every gas zeroing and
it should be between 5 to 10 mmHg. If the pressure difference
turns negative a message ‘Replace trap’ is displayed when the
limit of -5 mmHg is exceeded.

Pump, zero valve, and pressure valve are operated manually by

highlighting and pushing the ComWheel. During patient
monitoring, the valves are in OFF position

ACX temp indicates temperature inside the ACX bench, and the
value is typically + 10 °C higher than the prevalent room
temperature.

Delays indicate the time delays within or between measuremnt

units.

Delays are measured at the same time as fail times.

Check that the ACX_ASX delay is between 400-800.

NOTE: The measurement can be performed only with the

modules using module software 884295.

Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many

times the module has not responded to the monitor's inquiry.
Bad checksums is also a cumulative number that indicates how
many times communication from the module to monitor broke
down (first line) and from monitor to the module broke down
(second line).
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how
many communication errors the module has detected.
The monitor starts counting these items at power up and resets
to zero at power off. The nonzero values do not indicate a
failure, but the continuous counting (more than 50 per second)
indicates either serial communication failure or module not in
place.

Part II-Airway-69
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

5.3 PVX Service Menu

РУХ Service Data
- T ADULT
Fiow Calibration | aw Pres Zero 1933
dw Pres Gain 8662
Temp & Hum Flow Zero | 2301
Insp Flow Gain 5500
Zero PYX Exp Flow Gain 5800
Common Offset 0
Sensor Type Yalves
Zeroing enabled
Previous Nenu

Menu items:

1 Flow Calibration service data

2 Humidity and temperature service menu.

3 PVX zeroing

4 Sensor type selection

Return to previous menu

Flow Calibration Service Data

Aw Pres Zero...The value of airway pressure zero is changing
within the range of 1000 to 2400.

Aw Pres Gain...Gain of pressure measurement. This value

should be fixed to 8662.

Flow Zero....The value corresponds to the pressure transducer

BI output during PVX zeroing. Number 0 corresponds to 0 V
and 4095 corresponds to 10 V. The value is typically within the
range of 100 to 4000.

Part II-Airway-70
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Insp Flow Gain...Gain of inspired gas volume. Typically the

value is between 5000 and 9000 depending on which sensor is
used (adult/pediatric).

Exp Flow Gain...Gain of expired gas volume. Typically the

value is between 5000 and 9000 depending on which sensor is
used (adult/pediatric).

*Common Offset...Cancels common error which is caused by

pressure from the pressure transducers. This is a transducer's
own constant. The value should be between -230 and +230.

Valves...Position of zero valves.

Zeroing....Automatic zeroing is cancelled (disabled) or active

(enabled).

NOTE: Items marked with asterisk (*) are not to be changed.

NOTE: The shown values are for the Adult module only.
Changing the mode does not change the values.

Part H-Airway-71
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Flow Calibration

РУХ | Service Data

Flow Calibration 1934
8662
Sensor adult | Zera OK ao
Sensor Paedit Zero OK 5800
Previous Henu

Last calibration:

adult ~ 一
08601 ーーー

Zeroing flow. Keep sensor free

from any gas flow.

For information on the flow calibration, please refer to section

3.3.3, Flow Calibration.

NOTE: The last calibration dates are saved into the main CPU
board memories. The information is not saved permanently.

Part If-Airway-72
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Temp & Hum Service Menu o

PVK Service Data

Temp & Hum 4095 E
그 :

Room Humidity 50 0
F
Insp Temperature 32.0
abled
Insp Humidity 50
Exp Temperature 25.0
Exp Humidity 82
Previous Henu

Change room temperature to

correct calibrated volume.
It is used as a reference.

If circumstances noteceably differ from normal, or additional

accuracy is required, the use of Temp & Humidity menu may be
advisable.

Especially small errors in tidal values may indicate that

temperature and humidity settings of the monitor differ too
much from the used system.

Room Temperature and Humidity: these are needed only in

calibration procedure.

Insp Temperature: The setting regarding the temperature of

inspired gas. The value is used in calculations. Change if
necessary.

Insp Humidity: The setting regarding the humidity of inspired

gas. The value is used in calculations. Change if necessary.

Exp Temperature: The setting regarding the temperature of

expired gas. The value is used in calculations. Change if
necessary.

Exp Humidity: The setting regarding the humidity of expired

gas. The value is used in calculations. Change if necessary.

Part II-Airway-73
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

5.4 ASX Service Menu

NOTE: The ASX Service Menu in monitor software S-___94, S-
___95 and S-___96 supports only modules equipped with the
ASX-200.

ASK Service Data

ID result: 0 None
Total 0.00 Noise U. UO
- Temp C 0.00
Previous Menu Relg AGC 0
Fre O Motor DAC 0
На] O Motor Fiuct 0
Enf 0
Iso 0 Alc comp val 0
Des 0 sta Cl
Sev 0 C
Peak normal 0.00
Peak mirror 0.00
. Fact EEPRO RAM
Time offset 0 D 0
Spectrum 0 1

-ὲὲ----

1 Zero gases

2 Return to previous menu

Service Data
ID result displays the identified gas or mixture

Total % is the anaesthetic agent concentration measured by ASX

bench.

Rel % is the relative percentage of each measured agent in the

mixture.

Noise value should be less than 80. Check the value only when
no gas is fed and after a minimum of one minute stabilization
time.

Temp C is the temperature inside the ASX unit.

Part Il-Airway-74
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

AGC (Automatic Gain Control) should be between 100 and

3500.

Motor DAC is a motor speed control voltage, 100...3900, and

Motor Fluct is the speed fluctuation, should be < 200.

Alc comp val is the compensation factor for alcohol content

measured during halothane, enflurane or isoflurane measuring.
Sta shows the status of compensation, 0 means off, and 1 means
on.

The value without a leading text is for factory use only.

Peak normal, Peak mirror give the place of the spectrum’s peak
in the channel numbers. The peak normal value should be 10.3-
10.7 with calibration gas R23, and 12.9-13.1 with R22. If the value
is not within the range, the cas calibration must be performed.
(see Operator’s manual for instructions).

Time offset is the time between motor synchronization pulse

and filter 0° angle. Fact is the factory value for it, EEPRO is the
user calibration result, stored in the ASX, and RAM is the user
calibration result, stored in the gas mother board.

Spectrum values tell about the scales of the spectrum display.

Part H-Airway-75
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS

6.1 Spare parts list

NOTE: Only changed part numbers are listed under later
revisions. To find the desired part: check first the list of the
revision that corresponds your device. If the part is not listed
there, check the previous revision, etc. until you find the right
number.

NOTE: Accessories are listed in the booklet AS/3 Supplies and

Accessories.

Item numbers refer to the exploded view in chapter 6.2.

Airway Modules

G-AO Rev. OI, G-AiO Rev. 00

Item Item description Order No.

Gas mother board, G-AO / G-AiO *(880352) Use 885174

ACX-200 measuring board *880270
ACX-200 measuring unit #879849
ASX-100 agent indentification unit *881107
Lamp, ASX-100/200 *878756
Sample pump, Airway module #881298
O2 mesuring unit *(872898) Use 888511
Cover, top protection 878859
CO2 Absorber, Airway Module *880067
Damping chamber / Filter 880068
Valve, pressure 158534
Valve, zero 58534
Internal sampling tubings incl. system plate *880375
Nafion tube {A or B, 500 mm: see Serv. Man) *733383
Nafion tube (C, 300 mm) #733382.
Spring for D-Fend 875598
Front panel unit, G-AO (880374) Use 887477
Front panel unit, G-AiO (881116) Use 887477
Membrane keypad, G-AO / G-AOV 879371
Fitting plate, G-AiO / G-AiOV / G-O / G-OV 880550
Plug, tube connector 880294
Rear panel sticker, Airway module (Eng) 880460
Rear panel sticker, Airway module (Ger) 880462
Rear panel sticker, Airway module (Fre) 880461
Front panel sticker, small, G-AO / G-AOV (Eng) 880376
Front panel sticker, small, G-AO / G-AOV (Ger) 880546
Front panel sticker, small, G-AO / G-AOV (Fre) 880454

Part Il-Airway-76
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

17 Front panel sticker, small, G-AiO / G-AiOV / G-O / G-OV 880471

18 Front panel sticker, large, G-AO 880377
18 Front panel sticker, large, G-AiO 880472
4 Fan 880049
3 Case, Airway module 878864
24 Grommet for tubes 65094
8 Latch for flow casettes 880343
27 Connector, sample gas out 871981
31 Cross recess screw M6x16 61678
32 Bushing, AS/3 Airway Module 879512
Thumb screw, AS/3 Airway Module 879511

G-AO Rev. 02, G-AiO Rev. 01, G-AOV Rev. 00, G-AiOV Rev. 00

Item Item description Order No.

14 Gas mother board, G-AOV / G-AiOV *(881775) Use 885174

20 Front panel unit, G-AOV (880374) Use 888292 ”
20 Front panel unit, G-AiOV (881116) Use 888292 ”
37 Repair set for spirometry connectors, AS/3 *886978
28 PVX-100 without software *881444
29 PVX tubings 882723
30 PVX board support 880435
18 Front panel sticker, large, G-AOV 881300
18 Front panel sticker, large, G-AiOV 881301

G-AO Rev. 03, G-AiO Rev. 02, G-AOV Rev. Ol, G-AiOV Rev. OI

Item Item description Order No.

14 Gas mother board, AS/3 Airway module *885174

35 EMC cover, Gas mother board 884116
33 Bronze plate 884117
34 Insulation plate for 884116 879914

G-AO Rev. 04, G-AiO Rev. 03, G-AOV Rev. 02, G-AiOV Rev. 02,
G-0 Rev. 00, G-OV Rev. 00

Item Item description Order No.

22 ASX-200 agent indentification unit *882718

23 O2 mesuring unit *888511
36 Grounding spring 885602
20 Front panel unit, G-AO (885280) Use 887477
20 Front panel unit, G-AiO (885281) Use 887477
20 Front panel unit with metal SSS -connectors, AS/3 888292 "
20 Front panel unit w/o SSS -connectors, AS/3 887477
38 Spirometry connector, short male 886636
39 Spirometry connector, short female 886638

Part II-Airway-77
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

29 PVX tubings 885867

1 Rear panel sticker, Airway module (Spa) 886187 :
1 Rear panel sticker, Airway module (Swe) 885984
1 Rear panel sticker, Airway module (Dut) 886123
1 Rear panel sticker, Airway module (Ita) 886762
1 Rear panel sticker, Airway module (Fin) 888879
17 Front panel sticker, small, G-AO / G-AOV (Spa) 884405
17 Front panel sticker, small, G-AO / G-AOV (Swe) 885843
17 Front panel sticker, small, G-AO / G-AOV (Dut) 886065
17 Front panel sticker, small, G-AO / G-AOV (Ita) 886760
17 Front panel sticker, small, G-AO / G-AOV (Fin) 888876
17 Front panel sticker, small, G-AiO /-AiOV / -O / -OV 880471
18 Front panel sticker, large, G-O 885233
18 Front panel sticker, large, G-OV 886972

The Flow cassette’s and their order numbers can be found listed in the Gas Sampling System -
section of this manual.
* = the part is recommended for stock
» NOTE:
In case only the plastic spirometry connectors need repair, or compatibility with
adultérpaediatric Side Stream Spirometry accessories is needed, the Repair set for
spirometry connectors, order number 886978, is recommend to be used.

The Front panel unit, order number 888292, does not contain a membrane keypad,
fitting plate and small front panel sticker. Those should be added separately according
to the Airway module type and revision.

Gas Interface Board, B-GAS

Item description Order No.

Fuse T4A 250V *51134

Grounding plate 885404
6.2 Expioded view of the module

Part II-Airway-78
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

Figure 16 Exploded View of the Airway Module

Part IL-Airway-79
 Datex AS/3 Airway Module
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
This manual supports all the other Airway Module revisions
except the following ones. For further information on those
revisions see corresponding manual.

G-AO Module revision 01 Service Manual p/n 880850

G-AiO Module revision 00 +.

G-AO Module revision 02 Service Manual p/n 882580

G-AiO Modules revision 01 ーー
G-AOV Module revision 01 一-
G-AiOV Module revision 01 ーー

Part TE-Airway-80
 Anaesthesia Keyboard, K-ARK (Rev. 00)

Keyboard Interface Board, B-ARK (Rev. 00)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 885943-2

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

AN,
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION 1
i SPECIFICATIONS 2
2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
21 AnaesthesiaKeyboard,K-ARK.................................. 3
2.1.1 Controller Board -
2.1.2 АЙрва-питемс КеуБоага РС Воагц.............. лилии 5
2.1.3 Connectors and Signals...............eeeeemeeeeeremeeeem
eee
2.2 Keyboard Interface Board, B-ARK...
2.2.1 Connectors and signals...................
3. SERVICE PROCEDURES 8
3.1 General Service ImformatiOo ss 8
3.2 DisassembiyandReassembiy..................................... erme 8
4 TROUBLESHOOTING 9

5 SERVICE VIEW 10
Service Da ir иитииитиититититинитиннииня 11
6 SPARE PARTS LIST 12
6.1 Spare Parts list
6.2 Exploded view een 13
7 EARLIER REVISIONS 14
Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
This service manual section provides information required to
maintain and repair the Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor
Anaesthesia Keyboard, K-ARK and Keyboard Interface
Board, B-ARK. The information is applicable for the current
production revision of the modules.

Part H-ARK-1
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

.I SPECIFICATIONS
ANAESTHESIA KEYBOARD

Dimensions 313 x 230,5 x 60 mm/

(WxDxH) 12.3 x 9.0 x 2.4 inch

Weight 1,23 kg / 2.7 lb.

Electrical requirements + 5V DC +10% -25%, 75 mAmax

supplied by Datex AS/3 Monitor

Character set 256 characters ASCII

Communications PC compatible line,

interface AS/3 type serial line

Part H-ARK-2
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Record Keeper is an automated
anaesthesia documentation system. For record keeping the
Anaesthesia Keyboard, K-ARK ,and the software S-
ARK95/ARK96 (or S-ARK94) are needed.

The Anaesthesia Keyboard, K-ARK is connected to the

Anaesthesia Monitor via the Keyboard Interface Board, B-
ARK. Alternatively, the Keyboard can be connected to the
Command Board connector on the LCD-Display, or on the
Display controller board, B-DISP (or B-DHIGH).

K-ARK is connected to the Compact Monitor via the K-ARK

connector on the side panel.

The Anaesthesia Record Keeper combines the physiological

data measured by the monitor and the information entered
via the Anaesthesia Keyboard into a printable anaesthesia
record.

The Anaesthesia Record Keeper can be connected to a

network, or run in a stand-alone AS/3 Monitor. If a stand-
alone monitor is used, the Memory Module, M-MEM (or B-
CMMEM) is needed for data storage. To get information of
Memory module’s maintenance and service, please refer to
the Memory module section of this manual.

2.1 Anaesthesia Keyboard, K-ARK

The Anaesthesia Keyboard consists of following main parts:
Controller Board, Alphanumeric keyboard and membrane
keypads.

2.1.1 Controller Board

The Controller board is located inside the Anaesthesia
Keyboard of AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor. The board reads the
status of the front panel keys (including selection and alpha-
numeric keys) and the ComWheel on the front panel and
forwards the information to the CPU Board, B-CPU2 or B-
CPU3, in RS232 serial communication mode.

Part II-ARK-3
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
] Service Manual

Additionally, the board's own CPU controls the LEDs on the

front panel.

External communication

Communication with the host processor takes place either in

RS232 serial communication channel which is available in the
AS/3 bus, or, there are also two bidirectional signals (TxD
and RxD) for PCKB format communication.

For serial communication, the Anaesthesia Keyboard is

connected to the AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor Central Unit by
9-pin-26-pin interface cable. The cable is connected to
Keyboard Interface Board, B-ARK or to Display Controller
board, B-DISP (or B-DHIGH), in the Central Unit.

In case of PCKB type communication, the Keyboard can be

connected to the AS/3 LCD Display, D-LCC10 or to the
Compact Monitor.

CPU

The CPU on the Controller board is of a type 80C51FA and

its oscillator's frequency is 11.059 MHz.

There is a power-up-reset whose time constant is about 1

second.

Serial communication

RS232 serial communication IC needs only +5 V supply

voltage because it chops the necessary RS-level supply
voltages to its external capacitors. There is a diode that
allows the use of two keyboards, the pull-down resistor on
the CPU board of AS/3 Anaesthesia Monitor is used for
pulling the corresponding line to the negative RS-level. The
speed of the serial communication is 19.2 kBaud.

LEDs

The CPU on the board drives the alarm LEDs under the
commands received from the host processor.

Part II-ARK-4
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

2.1.2 Alpha-numeric Keyboard PC Board

The board reads the status of alpha-numeric keys and
forwards the information to the Controller board using the
RS232 serial communication.

The board is connected to the Controller board with a 26-pin

ribbon cable.

An alpha-numeric keypad can also be connected to the board

with PC's access format.

2.1.3 Connectors and Signals

Anaesthesia Keyboard 9-pin male D-connector

Pin No I/O Signal

1 1/0 |PC KEYBOARD
2 I RX
3 O TX
4 I +5 V
5 GND
6 1 RESET
7 N.C.
8 N.C.
9 1/0 | PC KEYBOARD

2.2 Keyboard Interface Board, B-ARK

This pc board is installed to the Central Unit of the AS/3
Anaesthesia Monitor. It has a 26-pin female D-connector to
which the Anaesthesia Keyboard is connected.

This board has no other functions than letting signals from

the Anaesthesia Keyboard pass through to the AS/3
Monitor.

Part П-АВК-5
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

2.2.1 Connectors and signals

The connector located on the Keyboard Interface Board, B-
ARK.

5 Pin No | YO Signal
261 00000000 ) 19 2 N/C
3 N/C
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 O |Ground
7 N/C
8 N/C
9 N/C
10 N/C
11 N/C
12 N/C
13 N/C
14 N/C
15 O +5V
16 N/C
17 N/C
18 N/C
19 I RxD RS232
20 O | TxD RS232
21 N/C
22 N/C
23 N/C
24 N/C
25 N/C
26 N/C

Part II-ARK-6
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

The AS/3 bus connector (X1):

a b で
1 +15 V AGND DGND
2 -15V BALE DGND
3 SAO SAT DGND
4 SA2 SA3 RESET_RS485
5 SA4 SA5 -RESET_RS485
6 SA6 SA7 DATA_RS485
7 SA8 SA9 -DATA_RS485
8 SA10 SA11 TXDD_RS232
9 SA12 SA13 RXDD_RS232
10 | SA14 SA15 BITOIN
11 |SA16 SA17 BITUN
12 | SA18 SA19 TXDC
13 | SA20 SA21 RXDC
14 |SA22 SA23 RTSC
15 | SMEMR -SMEMW CTSC
16 |-IOR -IOW TXDB
17. | CLK -RESET RXDB
18 | -IOCHRDY IRO10 RTSB
19 ¡N/C_1 IRQ11 | CTSB
20 |N/C_2 IRO12 TXDA
21 |-SBHE IRO15 RXDA
22 |500 SD1 RTSA
23 |502 $03 СТЗА
24 |SD4 SD5 LOUDSPEAKER
25 |506 SD7 +5 V
26 |508 $09 +5 V
27 |SD10 SD11 +5 V
28 | SD12 SD13 +5 V
29 [SD14 SD15 ON/STBY
30 |+15 VD -RESET CPU +5 V CPU
31 |+15 VD +32 VD REFRESH WD
32 | GNDD GNDD POWER FAIL

Part II-ARK-7
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

3. SERVICE PROCEDURES

3.1 General Service Information

Usually field service is limited to replacing the faulty circuit
boards or mechanical parts. The boards are then returned to
Datex for repair.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide

the unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed
fault description.

CAUTION: The tests and repairs outlined in this section

should only be attempted by trained personnel with the
appropriate equipment. Unauthorized service may void
warranty of the unit.

3.2 Disassembly and Reassembly

The Anaesthesia Keyboard is disassembled in the following
way. See Figure 1 for the exploded view of the module:

a) Disconnect the interface cable from the 9-pin D-

connector of the Anaesthesia Keyboard.

b) Remove four screws from the back of the keyboard

and detach the cover from the bottom.

Part II-ARK-8
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

4 TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM CAUSE TREATMENT

Power on LED does not AS/3 monitor power is off. Turn the power on.
light
Cable is not connected or Cable to AS/3 Anaesthesia
broken. Monitor (p/n 881152) or to
LCD Display or Compact
Wrong type of cable is Monitor (881154) should be
connected. used.

Connect right type of cable

properly.

Keys have not effect on Cable is not connected or Connect right type of cable
the display broken. properly (see above).

Wrong type of cable is Detach the bottom plate and

connected. check connectors and
components.
Loose connector inside.

Component failure inside.

Membrane key not Switch cable loose or broken. Check the items. Replace them
working Keyboard cable loose or if necessary.
broken. D-connector pin
failure. IC failure on the
Controller board. RS232
communication failure on the
main CPU board.

NOTE: Cancel key does not

respond if menu is closed.
Modify key may not work if
there is no even selected.

Led does not light at Cable loose or broken. LED Check the items. Replace them
alarm or stays lit after broken. if necessary.
alarm is over
Component failure on the
Controller board.

Part II-ARK-9
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

5 SERVICE VIEW
Honitor Setup
Monitor Setup Install/Service
Waveform Fields Units
Digit Fields 100 Service View | 26 106
Select Hode Save Modes
Set Time and Date Interfacing
Install/Service | 16 Analog Outputs
Normal Screen Honitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu
0 G

Give password. Give password.

To enter the Service menu:

1. Press the MONITOR SETUP key.

The Setup menu appears.
Turn ComWheel to highlight Install/Service and push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 16 - 4 -
34. The Install/Service menu appears.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and

push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 26 - 23 -
8.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Keyboard and push.

Part II-ARK-10
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

Keyboard Service Data

Message count 0
Upper Led Leds upper OFF tower OFF
Lower Led Direct action keys
Dummy Press Silence Freeze Mark Alarms
Alarms Event Setup
Previous Henu .
Recorder ECG NIBP Invasive
Pressures
Normal
Screen
Help Reset Display Monitor
Case Trends Setup
Patient Pulse Airway Others
Data Oximetry Gas

Control wheel
Press
Clockwise 0 Counterclockwise 0

1. Silence Alarms upper led (red) check.

2. Silence Alarms lower led (yellow) check.

3. ComWheel pressing check.

4. Return to previous menu.

Service Data
Message Count counts whenever a function is selected.

Leds upper and Leds lower indicate Silence Alarms leds’

state.

Direct action keys’ 17 items change its color when the key is
pressed. If the color does not change, the key may be
mechanically damaged.

In Control wheel, Press counts whenever the ComWheel is

pushed. Clockwise and Counterclockwise counts whenever
the ComWheel is turned.

NOTE: Counters in this page are automatically zeroed on

returning to the previous menu.

Part II-ARK-11
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS LIST

6.1 Spare Parts list

Item numbers refer to the exploded view in chapter 6.2.

Anaesthesia Keyboard, K-ARK

Rev. 00

Item Item description Order No.

3 Controller board, K-ARK (Rev. 00) *884177

2 Alpha-numeric Keyboard PC board, K-ARK (Rev. 00) *884178
4 Rotary wheel 879872
5 ComWheel cover and spring 879191
10 Membrane keyboard 879373
8 Membrane keyboard 879964
9 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Eng) 881648
9 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Fre 884731
9 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Ger) 885140
9 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Spa) 886200
9 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Swe) 885915
9 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Dut) 886162
7 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Eng) 884017
7 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Fre 884406
7 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Ger) 885133
7 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Spa) 886198
7 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Swe) 885916
7 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Dut) 886282
7 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Fle) 886161
7 Front panel sticker, K-ARK (Sca) 884632
1 Pad 65142
6 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x6 61721

Keyboard Interface Board, B-ARK

Item description Order No.

Grounding plate 885398

* = the part is recommended for stock

Part H-ARK-12
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

6.2 Exploded view

Figure 1 Exploded View of the Anaesthesia Keyboard

Part II-ARK-13
 Datex AS/3 Anaesthesia Keyboard
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
Rev. 00 is the first revision of the K-ARK, and B-ARK.

Part II-ARK-14
Neuro Muscular Transmission Module, M-NMT (Rev. 00)

All specifications subject to change without notice.

Document No. 887780-1

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION I

i SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 General Specifications... ss iii
1.2 Technical Specifications
2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 4
2.1 Measuring Prmeiple ieri 4
2.1.1 Nerve Stimulation .ee kernerne end 4
2.1.2 Response inner
2.1.3 Regional Block...
2.2 Main Components eee
2.1.1 μου μμ μμ μμ μμ μμ μμ μμ --ᾱ-ᾱ-,
2.1.2 띠 터 0070606079000000 나 나 나 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 이 아 이 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 라 아 머 아 아 아 마 아 어 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 아 이 아 니7
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES
3.1 General Service Information... ss
3.2 Preventive Maintenance ............
3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly
4 TROUBLE SHOOTING 12

5 SERVICE MENU 14
5INMTServiceMenu............................... eee ereeeeeenenanazanı 15
6 SPARE PARTS 18
6.1 Spare Part List sense 18
6.2 Exploded View of Module uns 19
7 EARLIER REVISIONS 21
Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
The M-NMT module contains peripheral nerve stimulation
and response measurement which supports
electromyography EMG. Module can be used also as a nerve
locator for regional nerve block with Regional block -cable in
which case there is no response measurement.

Part H-NMT-1
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 General Specifications

Module size + 37x 180 x 112 mm
WxDxH 15x 7.1x44in

Module weight 0.37 kg /0.8 Ibs.

Power consumption 3,8W

1.2 Technical Specifications

NMT

Stimulation modes Train of four (TOF)

Double burst (3.3) (DBS)
Single twitch (ST)
50 Hz tetanus + post tetanic count (PTC)

Measurement intervals for TOF and DBS

Manual, 10 s,12s,15s,20 s
1s,1 min, 5 min, 15 min
Measurement intervals for ST
Manual, 1 s,10s,20 s

STIMULATOR

Stimulus pulse Sguare wave, constant current

Pulse width 100, 200 or 300 us

Stimulus current range 10-70 mA with 5 mA steps

Stimulus current accuracy

10 % or +3 mA which ever is greater
measured as average

Max load 3kQ

Max. voltage 300 V

Part II-NMT-2
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

REGIONAL BLOCK MODE

Stimulation modes Single Twitch

Intervals 1s,2s,3s

Stimulus pulse Square Wave, constant current

Pulse width 40 us

Stimulus current range 0-5.0 mA with 0.1 mA steps

Stimulus current accuracy

20 % or 0.3 mA which ever is greater
measures as average

Part Н-ММТ-3
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

2.2 Main Components |

2.1.1 NMT Board

Module has constant current stimulator, measuring
electronics for the EMG signals, a processor part for the
stimulation and measuring control and for the counting the
measuring results, and it has also a communication part (see
the figure). Processor is Intel 80C196KD.

Serial bus speed is 500 kbit/s and the bus itself is half
duplex, data can be transferred to both direction but only
one way at the time.

to central unit
to module prosessor

RS485

(module bus)
Receive data Driver

Opto isolation Send/recelve

RS4B5
Driver

Figure 2 Communication

Stimulator
Constant current stimulator generates pulses, of which
amplitude is independent of the load. Main components of
the stimulator are transformer, capacitor and transistor.
Transformer produces high enough voltage, capacitor
charges and transistor adjusts the pulse width and amplitude
of the current.

Part II-NMT-6
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

— | Power supply

Current
m adjustment 80C196KD
トーーーー
ゴP W M
Patient Constant current
generator Current HSO
eo Li control 그
|
Continuous
stimulation
congestion

Figure 3 Stimulator Block Diagram

2.1.2 NMT connectors

The pin assignments on the NMT Connector located on the
M-NMT module are as follows.

Pin Signal
EMG Signal +
-

EMG Signal -
Not Used
01 & ϱ

Stimulus +
so

Stimulus -
Ground
Not Connected
Sensor Identification
+5 V
Mechanical Signal
二

Part II-NMT-7
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

Rear panel 25-pin female D-connector (X1)

Pin No I/O Signal

1 I RESET. RS485
2 I -15 VDC
3 I +15 VDIRTY
4 I +15 VDC
5 I/O |-DATA RS485
6 ГО |DATA RS485
7 Ground & Shield
8 I -RESET_RS485
9 I CTSB
10 О RTSB
11 I RXDB
12 O TXDB
13 Ground & Shield
14 I +32 VDIRTY
15 I GroundDIRTY
16 I CTSC
17 O RTSC
18 1 RXDC
19 O TXDC
20 ON/STANDBY
21 PWM_ECG
22 RXDD_RS232
23 TXDD_RS232
24 +5 VDC
25 +5 VDC

Part H-NMT-8
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES

3.1 General Service Information

Usually field service is limited to replacing the faulty circuit
boards or mechanical parts. The boards are then returned to
Datex for repair.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide

the unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed
fault description.

Datex NMT Stimulator (order code 871251) is recommended

for functional checks.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with appropriate

equipment shall perform the tests and repairs outlined in
this section. Unauthorized service may void warranty of the
unit.

Part II-NMT-9
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

3.2 Preventive Maintenance

Perform these checks after any service and at least once a
year to keep NMT Module in good condition.

Visual Inspection

If the module is disassembled, check that grounding

wires and all connectors are properly connected and
there is no loose object inside before attaching the
module box.

Functional checks

__: Insert the NMT module M-NMT into the AS/3

monitor. Check visually that the NMT accessories are
not damaged.

___: Connect the NMT sensor cable and connect the NMT
sensor to the Datex NMT stimulator. Set stimulator
controls to “fade off” and max. Push start-up key on
the module.

__: Check that no error messages are displayed while the

monitor searches for the supramaximal current and the
reference level. To discontinue push the
Stop/Continue key on the module.

Part II-NMT-10
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

3.3 Disassembly and Reassembly

Disassemble the NMT module in the following way. See
Figure 4 for the exploded view of the module.

1. Remove the two screws from the back of the module.

2. Pull the module box slowly rearward and detach it from

main body. Be careful with loose latch and spring pin
for locking.

3. Detach the NMT board by removing the two screws that

are located near the front panel frame, disconnect the
cables and pull out the front panel frame.

CAUTION: When reassembling the module, make sure that

the cables are reconnected properly.

Part II-NMT-11
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

4 TROUBLE SHOOTING

TROUBLE CAUSE TREATMENT

Check the stimulus Loose electrodes Change or attach the
electrodes. or loose stimulus clip. electrodes or clip.
EMG electrode off
Supramax. not found Loose electrodes Change or attach the
or loose stimulus clip. electrodes or clip.
Stimulus electrodes Change the place of the
attached to wrong place. stim. el.
Patient is relaxated.
Response too weak. Loose stimulus electrodes. Change or attach the
electrodes.
Measuring electrodes Change the place of the
attached to wrong place. meas. electrodes.
Patient is relaxated.
Ref. not stable Patient is relaxated.
Movement artefact.

Part II-NMT-12
 - Datex AS/3 M-NMT o
Service Manual

Open NMT Servica Menu

Check Timeouts, Bad checksums,

Bad c-s by mod
Does another module Replace original NMT
work in tha same slo!

Fault not in NMT module

Does the test pass with ‘are the NMT input board
another sensor? wires connected? Replace NMT module

Check that sensor is identified

Does tha test pass with Replace the original sensor

another sensor?
no

Does the test pass with Replace the original NMT sensor
enother NMT sensp

|
Does the test pass with Replace the original NMT input

|
πο
Repíace NMT module
Connect ElectroSensorto NMT
stimulator and start measurement ー

Does the test pass with Replace the original sensor

another sensor?

Does the test pass with Replace the original NMT sensor

Replace the original NMT input

са
|

Check front panel key functions

15 the keypad Connect the keypad

connected?

Does the test pass with

another keypad?, Replace the original keypad

Replace NMY module

Part I-NMT-13
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

5 SERVICE MENU
Monitor Setup
Monitor Setup Install /Service
Waveform Fields Units
Digit Fields 100 Service View | 26 100
Select Mode Save Modes
Set Time and Date Interfacing
Instali/Service | 16 Analog Outputs
Normal Screen Monitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu
0 9

Give password. Give password,

To enter Service Menu:

1. Press the MONITOR SETUP key.

The Setup menu appears.

Turn ComWheel to highlight Install/Service and

push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to

display each password number and confirm the
number by pushing the ComWheel. Password
numbers are 16 - 4 - 34. The Install /Service menu
appears.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and

push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to

display each password number and confirm the
number by pushing the ComWheel. Password
numbers are 26 - 23 - 8.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Modules and push.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight the NMT module

and push.

Part II-NMT-14
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

5.1 NMT Service Menu

NMT Service Data
MT Setup Cable: ENG
Cable check value: 1
Start Curr. test
Module keys: Start-up StopyCont.
Tix/ref i
Stimulus mode: TOF Measurement: ON
Previous Menu
Tis 1900 Absolute TL 2143
τος 678 Absolute T2 1495
Tax 508 Absolute T3 1089
Ta al? Absolute T4 680
RatioW 317 Ref 2143
Noise 19
Offset 512
Current test (mA): 30 ck 50 ok 70 ok
Done
Curr set as Curr mess 268
Pulses
Piezo probe: T1% OFF Ref.search OFF
Timeouts 0 RAM DK
Bad checksuns 1 RON BK
Bad c-s by moc 1 EEPROH OK

By selecting NMT Setup you can enter the setup

menu and change the values needed. Please refer to
Operator's Manual for further information. '

Start Curr. Test is a test where the module itself

checks the difference between current given and
measured. 3 kQ resistance should be set between the
stimulus electrodes before starting the test. All the
currents checked will be displayed on the service data
screen. After the current value, there is also shown the
status of the test. If the test is not passed, send the
module back to the factory for calibration.

3. T1%/ref not in use.

Service Data Detailed Description

Cable shows the type of cable used at the moment.

Cable check value show the bit amount. From the following
chart you can check the values to each cable:

EMG -100...+100
Cable OFF >1950

Part II-NMT-15
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

Module Keys checks the function of the module keys. Blue

background appears to the back of the text when the keys are
pushed more than one second.

Stimulus mode shows the selected stimulus. Stimulus mode

can be changed from the NMT Setup menu.

Measurement indicates ON/OFF.

T1%, T2%... shows the measured response. Value 1000

corresponds to 100%.

Absolute Ti, T2... shows the voltage measured from the AD

converter.

Noise indicates the interference just before the

measurement. Typical value is <10.

Offset is an average length of the noise measurement.

Typical value is 510.

Curr set is the selected current, value 700 corresponds to 70

mA.

Curr meas is the measured current, value 700 corresponds to

70 mA.

Pulses indicates pulses the module has produced.

Piezo probe T1% and ref. search not in use.

Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many

times the module has not responded to the monitor's
inquiry. Bad checksums is a cumulative number that
indicates how many times communication from the module
to monitor broke down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how
many communication errors the module has detected.
The AS/3 Monitor starts counting these items at power up
and resets to zero at power off. The non-zero values do not
indicate a failure, but the continuous counting (more than 50
per second) indicates either serial communication failure, or
module not in place. Also other modules can cause
communication errors that cause these numbers rise.

Part II-NMT-16
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

RAM indicates the state of the RAM memory.

ROM indicates whether the checksum in the EPROM is in
accordance with the one the software has calculated.
EEPROM indicates if the values stored in the permanent
memory are valid.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place or a
communication error).

Part H-NMT-17
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS
6.1 Spare Part List
NOTE: Only changed part numbers are listed under later
revisions. To find the desired part: check first the list of the
revision that corresponds your device. If the part is not listed
there, check the previous revision, etc. until you find the
right number.

NOTE: Accessories are listed in the booklet AS/3 Supplies

and Accessories.

Item numbers refer to the exploded view in chapter 6.2.

NMT Module, M-NMT

Rev. 00

Item Item description Order No.

8 NMT board, M-NMT (Rev. 00) *887487
9 EMC cover, M-NMT 886320
5 Front panel unit, M-NMT (Rev. 00) 887186
11 NMT input board 887184
12 Membrane keypad 880101
13 Front panel sticker, M-NMT (Eng) 886002
13 Front panel sticker, M-NMT (Ger) 886003
13 Front panel sticker, M-NMT (Fre) 886004
13 Front panel sticker, M-NMT (Ita) 887542
13 Front panel sticker, M-NMT (Swe) 887369
13 Front panel sticker, M-NMT (Dut) 887370
13 Front panel sticker, M-NMT (Spa) 887498
13 Front panel sticker, M-NMT (Fin) 888873
1 Module box (single width) 886167
2 Latch 879181
3 Spring pin 879182
7 Metal frame 879184
4 Cross recess screw M3x8 black 616215
6 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x6 61721
10 Cross cylinder-head screw M3x12 628700
The front panel unit includes all the connectors and input boards.
* = the part is recommended for stock

Part II-NMT-18
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

6.2 Exploded View of Module

Figure 4 Exploded View of Module Box

Part II-NMT-19
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

Figure 5 Exploded View of M-NMT Module

Ῥατί Π-ΝΜΤ-20
 Datex AS/3 M-NMT
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
There are no earlier revisions of M-NMT.

Part II-NMT-21
UPINET Board, B-UPINET (Rev. 00)

All specifications subject to change without notice

Document No. 888737

March, 1996

Datex Division, Instrumentarium Corp.

P.O.Box 446 FIN-00101 Helsinki Finland
Tel. +358 0 39411 Fax +358 0 1463310
Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION I

1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 3
ANS
ANN
2.1.2 NET Section.
2.2 Ethernet InterfaCeS................... essences
2.3 Conmnectors and Signals eee eee nnné
2.3.1 Ethernet Network Interface
2.3.2 Network Coding Element Interfac@............................ rire 8
2.3.3 Serial Data Interface iii 9
2.3.4 Connection to the AS/3 Bus te aero eee 10
3 SERVICE PROCEDURES HI

4 TROUBLESHOOTING 12
4.1 Troubleshooting for the NET Section... 12
4.2 Troubleshooting for the UPI secton линии
иена 14
5 SERVICE VIEW 15

6 SPARE PARTS 18

7 EARLIER REVISIONS 19
Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
Datex AS/3 UPINET Board, B-UPINET integrates the UPI
board and the Network Board, B-NET.

Compared to a combination of the UPI board and the

Network board, the UPINET board has a limited number of
input/output signals. There is only one digital output signal
and one analog output signal available on the UPINET
board.

For installing the board, please refer to the Installation

Manual of your monitor.

Part II-UPINET-1
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

I TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

UPINET Board
e Supports xxx86 real/protected mode programming
« © JTAG testing and programming
« © Voltages used:
+5 V 500 mA
+15 V 20 mA
-15Vde 20mA
+15 VD 50 mA +isolated power supply

Ethernet |

+ Meets IEEE802.3 specifications (10BASE-T)

+ Hospital grade approved data transformer
・ © Coding element interface
» © 64 Kbyte linear shared-memory / 8x8 Kbyte paged
shared-memory in world wide format for
communication buffer

UPI

» Supports RS-485 bus type 500 Kbit/s communication

with 80196KC
e Isolated RS-232 level communication driven by B-CPU2,
B-CPU3
e Isolated power supply
» Voltage and temperature measurement
・ 32x2 Kbyte paged shared-memory in world wide format
for communication buffer

Part II-UPINET-2
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 General

2.1.1 UPI Section

The UPI section functions as a general I/O-board. It
performs I/O duties assigned to it by the CPU board. The
main processor in the CPU board and the processor in the
UPI section communicate through a dual-port memory
which is located on the UPINET board.

Functional blocks

The UPI section contains the external bus interface, a

processor, program- and dual-port memories, I/O-block,
and an isolated serial bus interface.

External bus interface

The UPI section is connected to the CPU mother board. The

following signals pass on between the UPI section and CPU
mother board: data bus, address bus, reset, read and write
signals, and other related signals.

Processor

The processor in the UPI section is an 80C196KC-16, which

functions at 16 MHz frequency.

Isolated and non-isolated serial bus interfaces

There are isolated and non-isolated serial bus interfaces. The

isolated serial bus is connected to the connector X4 and the
non-isolated serial bus is connected to the module bus
through the CPU mother board.

Isolated power supply consists of a transformer and other

peripheral components. It gives about 10 -15V/5 W output.

Part II-UPINET-3
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

| isolation
|
15VD '
+ Isolation | Isolated power 5
power 5
Lİ supply Е
| Unisolated serial channel | 8

==
decoding
Se
gf [interface
|| Isolated serial channels
2>
a

= tue) 2
5= i
=
n
ii £o
i 5© -

Address FF] 이
buffers
=a
8 Address bus
ec
2
9 Processor
=
5 Interrupt
1 © poms register ro
2©
o
+ |
“| C
Control bus
a é
É Timing Memory:
¿al Control | | logie -DP W:
£ | register code
-data

i 5 i
—= Data 3
i. buffer! Data bus È
register m 1 digital output | & e 이
Digital Ve i
output a
Lo a i

| PAM BCG . Lec Direct ECG |

|
E

Figure 1 UPI Section Block Diagram

Part II-UPINET-4
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

2.1.2 NET Section

The NET section is illustrated in a block diagram shown in
figure 2.

The network interface controller is basically the heart of the

NET section. The interface controller communicates with the
CPU board through the data and address buffering and
decoding block, or through the RAM. During the startup
sequence the CPU board loads the network communication
software into the RAM. The processor then executes the
communication software.

The network interface controller transmits data packets to

the AS/3 Network and receives data packets from the
network through the 10BASE-T transformer. The
transformer filters and transforms the data and also provides
the isolation.

The Ethernet status LEDs indicate the status of the network

communication. The status LEDs are controlled by the
network interface controller. The LEDs are not visible when
the board is installed into the monitor.

The coding element interface block contains a unique

network address. The interface block is connected to the
coding element. The coding element contains information on
the monitor location. The network address and the monitor
location information are transmitted to the CPU board
through the data and address buffering and decoding block.

Part II-UPINET-5
Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

ΖΧ

NET Section Block Diagram

' eseuajyul
o LA uauele
upoo EA Bupoo ド
|
spe} |
snjejs
NE

Part II-UPINET-6
£
D
一 一 一 一 一 一 一一 7 。 TV8
| 83
ex ' | Bo IX
Buijgeo AN doloseuuoo | à] seuoysuen = en
eoejo |,|] [| À 8
BP
eiu
momen NY) Sera. NOVÍ 1-39\8아 ам S
2 y E

Figure 2
: T E
=> sng
esse
TV SV
uonejos| |
(2149; ve) pf
VH
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

2.2 Ethernet Interfaces

The data transformer is designed by Datex and it is hospital
grade approved.

Adapter's 10BASE-T is a interface with 7-pole butterworth

low-pass filters on the unisolated side of the transformer. On
the isolated side there is a common mode choke for both
transmitting and receiving lines.

There are also four LEDs on the board, which are not seen
from the outside, indicating the following things:

- transmission to Ethernet V3 Green

- receiving from Ethernet V2 Yellow
- collision detection V4 Yellow
- good link in 10BASE-T interface V5 Green

The transmission LED (V3) flashes when a packet is sent to

the AS/3 Network. The reception LED (V2) flashes when a
packet is received from the network. The collision detection
LED (L4) indicates a packet collision on the network. The
collision detection LED should flash only occasionally,
otherwise there may be a physical layer problem. The link
LED (V5) indicates whether or not the communication link to
the HUB is functional. The link LED should always be lit.

2.3 Connectors and signals

2.3.1 Ethernet Network Interface

Network Connector X3

Pin Signal
Tx+
ο

Tx-
ATE
GQ DN

12345678
Rx +
N/C
N/C
Rx-
N/C
SN

N/C

Part I-UPINET-7
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

2.3.2 Network Coding Element Interface

Coding Element Connector X2

9.-pin female D-connector

Pin Signal
IDCS1 (chip select)
그

1 00000 |5
el 0000 |9 IDCL (clock)
ND

IDDI (data in)

©

IDDO (data out)

#

IDPE (protect enable)

NI O O1

+5Vdc
Fast analog ECG
Nurse call
%

gnd
\ら

Fast analog ECG (pin 7)

- Delay (max.): 15 ms
- Gain ECG (in)/ECG(out): 1 mV/1V
- Frequency band:
- ST and diagnostic: 0.5 - 35 Hz
- Monitor: 0.9 - 35 Hz

NOTE: Fast analog ECG is available with the Central unit

version 02 or higher, and with ESTPR/ESTR/ETPR modules
and with ESTP module revision 02 or higher , and ETP/EST
module revision 01 or higher .

Nurse Call (pin 8)

The nurse call signal is generated by the red, yellow and

white alarms. When activated, the signal is set to the high
state and remains at the high state until the alarm situation is
over or the SILENCE ALARM key is pressed. The high state
range is from 2.8 to 5 V, while the low state range is from 0 to
0.8 V.

If the output signals are used simultaneously with the coding

element, the B-UPINET Y-cable, order number 889308, is
recommended to be used.

Part II-UPINET-8
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

2.3.3 Serial Data Interface

Serial Data Connector X4

Isolated serial data interface (RS232). The pin assignments

are as follows.

Pin Signal

esseJe) |?
1 00000 |5 1
3
RxD
N/C
TxD
4 Vout (10-15V) i
5 GND ーー
6 N/C
Z RTS
8 CTS
9 N/C

Part I-UPINET-9
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

2.3.4 Connection to the AS/3 Bus

AS/3 Bus connector X1

a b c
1 +15 V AGND DGND
2 -15 V BALE DGND
3 |SAO SA1 DGND
4 SA2 SA3 RESET_RS485
5 SA4 SA5 -RESET RS485
6 SA6 SA7 DATA_RS485
7 SA8 SA9 -DATA_RS485
8 SA10 SA11 TXDD_RS232
9 SA12 SA13 RXDD_RS232
10 |SA14 SA15 BITOIN
11 | 9Α16 SA17 BIT1IN
12 |SA18 SA19 TXDC
13 | SA20 SA21 RXDC
14 |SA22 SA23 RTSC
15 |-SMEMR -SMEMW CTSC
16 |-IOR -IOW TXDB
17 | CLK -RESET RXDB
18 | -IOCHRDY IRQ10 RTSB
19 |N/C_1 IRQ11 CTSB
20 |N/C_2 IRQ12 TXDA
21 |-SBHE IRO15 RXDA
22 |500 SD1 RTSA
23 1902 SD3 CTSA
24 |SD4 SD5 LOUDSPEAKER
25 |506 507 +5 V
26 |508 $09 +5V
27 |SD10 SD11 +5
28 | SD12 SD13 +5V
29 |SD14 SD15 ON/STBY
30 |+15 VD -RESET CPU +5 V CPU
31 |+15VD +32 VD REFRESH_WD
32 |GNDD GNDD POWER_FAIL

Part II-UPINET-10
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

3 SERVICE PROCEDURES
Due to the nature of the UPINET Board, field service is
limited only for troubleshooting. Faulty UPINET boards are
returned to Datex for repair.

Datex is always available for service advice. Please provide

the unit serial number, full type designation, and a detailed
fault description.

CAUTION: Only trained personnel with appropriate tools

and equipment are allowed to perform the tests and repairs
outlined in this section. Unauthorized service may void
warranty of the unit.

Please, refer to the Installation Manual of your monitor for

information on how to remove the UPINET Board.

Part H-UPINET-11
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

4 TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 Troubleshooting for the NET Section

Symptom at the Problem at Explanation/correction
monitor end
Monitor does not Patch panel Patch cable not connected to
connect to the network. HUB or to panel.
Monitor connects to the
network, but
disconnects
unexpectedly (“Network
connection down”
message on the monitor
screen).
Patch cable Patch cable or connector
defective.
HUB not connected to power
supply.
HUB port closed due to
physical layer problems.
HUB port temporarily closed
and reopened due to physical
layer problems.
Hubs not properly connected to
each other.
Monitor-Network cable Cable not properly connected to
the wallplate or to the monitor.
Monitor-Network cable Cable or connector defective.
UPINET board The UPINET board is defective.
The board cannot be used. See
network service page for
details.

Part II-UPINET-12
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

Symptom at the Problem at Explanation/correction

monitor end
UPINET board EEPROM The EEPROM of the UPINET
board is defective or
uninitialized. The board cannot
be used. See network service
page for details.
Identification plug There is no Identification plug
attached to the monitor.
The identification plug is
defective or uninitialized. The
plug cannot be used.
“Network EEPROM UPINET board EEPROM The EEPROM of the UPINET
Error” message shows board is defective or
on the monitor screen uninitialized. The board cannot
be used. See Network service
page for details.
“Check network Monitor-Network cable Cable not properly connected to
connectors” message the wallplate or to the monitor.
shows on the monitor
screen
Cable or connector defective.
Identification plug There is no identification plug
X properly attached to the
monitor.
The Identification plug is
defective or uninitialized. The
plug cannot be used. See
network service page for
details.
“Network board error” UPINET board The UPINET board is defective.
message shows on the The board cannot be used. See
monitor screen network service page for
details.

Part II-UPINET-13
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

Symptom at the Problem at Explanation/correction

monitor end
UPINET board EEPROM The EEPROM of the UPINET
board is defective or
uninitialized. The board cannot
be used. See network service
page for details.
Other Site View shows No waveforms are set up Run AS/3 Network Setup to
no waveforms for Monitor-to-Monitor verify current Monitor-to-
communication Monitor communication setup.
Network printing fails Print server is busy Network manager's print server
is busy at the moment and
cannot take more print jobs. Try
again after 15 seconds.
Print queue is full There are too many unprinted
documents waiting in the print
queue. Check the printer, as it is
not operating properly.
Printer is off-line Printer cable is loose, printer is
out of paper, there is paper jam
or the printer is simply
switched to off-line state.
Record keeper menus There are no menus for Run AS/3 Network Setup to
are blank the record keeper verify the current set up.

4.2 Troubleshooting for the UPI section

Please refer to troubleshooting in the central unit section.

Part II-UPINET-14
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

5 SERVICE VIEW

Monitor Setup
Monitor Setup Install/Service
Waveform Fields Units
Digit Fields 100 Service View | 26 108
Select Hode Save Modes
Set Time and Date Interfacing
Insta] 1/Service Le Analog Gutputs
Normal Screen Konitor Settings
Printer Settings
Previous Menu

Give password, Give password.

To enter the Service Menu:

1. Press the MONITOR SETUP key. The Setup menu

appears.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Install/Service and

push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 16 - 4 -
34. The Install /Service menu appears.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight Service View and

push.

Give the password by turning the ComWheel to display

each password number and confirm the number by
pushing the ComWheel. Password numbers are 26 - 23 -
8.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight “Monitor” and push.

Turn the ComWheel to highlight “Communication” and

push.

Part II-UPINET-15
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

8. Under Communication there are two service views

about networking: Network and Computer Interface.
Highlight the desired one and push the ComWheel.

Communication Network
Network Statistics In Dut
Packets 220 238
Computer If. Bytes 38659 35678
Previous Menu Data errors
CRC Frane Transn.

Hardware errors
Intern, Misged as Sverrun

Location 10 52
Address 004097000018

Connections
ALİ

Network displays the network related service data. Please

see the chart on the next page.
—
Communication Computer If.
Network Inteface status . CLOSED
Computer If. Statistics m Out
Packets 0
previous Menu Bytes 6
oo

Rx errors 9

Computer If. displays monitor computer interface related

service data.
Interface status indicates if the connection is closed, opened
or active. Closed indicates that the necessary hardware is not
present or is not available, Opened indicates that the
hardware and software for the interface are running, but
there is no network connection or that there has been severe
errors in using the interface (e.g., no cable connected), and
active indicates that the interface is operating normally.
Rx errors indicates the number of received erroneous data
packets.

Part II-UPINET-16
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

In the Network menu there are additionally following items

that describe the communication in the network.

Value Usage Notes

Received packets Total number of
(Statistics In/Packets) received packets since
last cold start.
Transmitted packets Total number of
(Statistics Out/Packets) transmitted packets
since last cold start.
Received bytes Total number of
(Statistics In/Bytes) received bytes since last
cold start
Transmitted bytes Total number of
(Statistics In/Bytes) transmitted bytes since
last cold start
CRC errors (CRC) Number of received
packets with incorrect
checksum.
Frame errors (Frame) Number of received Refers to physical layer problems.
packets with incorrect An erroneous packet often has
frame structure. both frame and CRC error.
Transmission errors Number or errors in
(Transm.) packet transmission.
Internal errors (Intern.) | Internal error of the Must always be 0.
UPINET board.
Missed packets Number of received Must always be 0.
(Missed) packets lost due to
overload.
FIFO errors (FIFO) Internal error of the Must always be 0.
UPINET board.
Overrun errors Practically same as Must always be 0.
(Overrun) above.
Location ID Monitor's location
given at the setup
Address Monitor's Ethernet
address
Connections Names of AICs to
which connected

Part I-UPINET-17
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

6 SPARE PARTS
UPINET Board, B-UPINET

Item description Order No.

Grounding plate 887930

EMC cover 889296

* = the part is recommended for stock

Part IT-UPINET-18
 Datex AS/3 B-UPINET
Service Manual

7 EARLIER REVISIONS
There are no earlier revisions of the UPINET board.

Part II-UPINET-19